EnRoute 4

User‟s Guide
Version 4.0 5/08

© Copyright 2004-2008
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Table of Contents
1. WELCOME ..................................................................................................... 1
W ELCOME TO ENROUTE ................................................................................... 1
W HAT‟S NEW IN ENROUTE ................................................................................ 1
RECOMMENDED SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 3
INSTALLING A HARDWARE KEY .......................................................................... 4
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE .............................................................................. 4
ENROUTE 4 SUPPORT SERVICES ...................................................................... 5
2. GETTING STARTED ...................................................................................... 7
W ORKFLOW...................................................................................................... 7
BASIC ELEMENTS OF ENROUTE ......................................................................... 7
W ORKING WITH VIEWS ...................................................................................... 8
MENUS............................................................................................................. 8
TOOLBARS ....................................................................................................... 8
CHANGING UNITS ............................................................................................. 9
STATUS LINE .................................................................................................... 9
USING SCROLL BARS ...................................................................................... 10
PRECISION INPUT CENTER .............................................................................. 10
USING SNAPS ................................................................................................. 11
USING GUIDELINES ......................................................................................... 12
EDIT GUIDELINES DIALOG ............................................................................... 12
CHANGING THE VIEW ...................................................................................... 14
ZOOM COMMANDS .......................................................................................... 15
REDRAW ........................................................................................................ 15
VIEW SETUP ................................................................................................... 15
USING THE UNDO AND REDO FEATURES .......................................................... 16
W ORKING WITH LAYERS .................................................................................. 16
CHANGING A CONTOUR‟S LAYER ..................................................................... 18
USING HELP ................................................................................................... 19
SETTING PREFERENCES.................................................................................. 19
EXITING THE SOFTWARE ................................................................................. 26
3. TOOLBARS AND COMMAND ICONS ........................................................ 27
OTHER COMMAND ICONS ................................................................................ 44
4. WORKING WITH FILES ............................................................................... 51
CREATING NEW FILES ..................................................................................... 51
USING TEMPLATES ......................................................................................... 53
OPENING A DESIGN ........................................................................................ 53
SAVING A DESIGN ........................................................................................... 53
CLOSING A DESIGN ......................................................................................... 54
IMPORTING A DESIGN ...................................................................................... 54
EXPORTING A DESIGN ..................................................................................... 54
PRINTING ....................................................................................................... 55
 CALCULATOR ................................................................................................. 55
SNAPSHOT ..................................................................................................... 56
MEASURE ...................................................................................................... 56
5. CREATING CONTOURS ............................................................................. 59
LINE, POLYARC OR BEZIER CURVE .................................................................. 59
RECTANGLE ................................................................................................... 64
CIRCLE .......................................................................................................... 65
DRAWING AN ARC .......................................................................................... 66
DRAWING AN ELLIPSE ..................................................................................... 67
DRAWING A POLYGON .................................................................................... 68
TEXT ............................................................................................................. 69
DIMENSIONS .................................................................................................. 72
6. CONTOUR EDITING .................................................................................... 75
EDITING POINTS ON A CONTOUR ..................................................................... 75
EXTENDING CONTOURS .................................................................................. 77
TRIMMING CONTOURS .................................................................................... 79
FILLETING CONTOURS .................................................................................... 81
JOINING CONTOURS ....................................................................................... 83
OFFSET CONTOURS ....................................................................................... 84
PARTIAL OFFSET CONTOURS .......................................................................... 84
MERGING SELECTED OPEN CONTOURS ........................................................... 85
EXPLODE SELECTED CONTOURS..................................................................... 86
CONVERTING CONTOURS TO ARCS ................................................................. 86
REVERSE OPEN CONTOURS ........................................................................... 86
CREATING MULTIPLE COPIES OF A CONTOUR .................................................. 87
VECTORIZING BITMAPS ................................................................................... 92
CLEANING UP CONTOURS ............................................................................... 93
7. ARRANGING CONTOURS .......................................................................... 95
SELECTING CONTOURS .................................................................................. 95
CUTTING, COPYING AND PASTING CONTOURS ................................................. 95
DELETING CONTOURS .................................................................................... 96
GROUPING AND UNGROUPING CONTOURS ....................................................... 97
MOVE OBJECTS ............................................................................................. 98
ROTATING CONTOURS .................................................................................. 101
SCALING CONTOURS .................................................................................... 102
DISTORT CONTOURS .................................................................................... 103
MIRRORING A CONTOUR ............................................................................... 104
ALIGNING CONTOURS ................................................................................... 106
W ELDING CONTOURS ................................................................................... 107
USING THE CUT BY LINE TOOL ...................................................................... 110
NESTING CONTOURS .................................................................................... 111
8. WORKING WITH TOOLPATHS ................................................................ 117
OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 117
CREATING ROUTING OFFSET TOOLPATHS ..................................................... 118
 CREATING OPEN CONTOUR OFFSET TOOLPATHS ........................................... 128
CREATING HATCH FILL TOOLPATHS ............................................................... 130
CREATING ISLAND FILL TOOLPATHS ............................................................... 135
SPIRAL FILL TOOLPATHS ............................................................................... 138
DRILL TOOLS ................................................................................................ 139
CREATING SLOT TOOLPATHS ........................................................................ 148
CREATING AN ENGRAVE TOOLPATH ............................................................... 149
CREATING PYRAMID TOOLPATHS ................................................................... 151
EDITING TOOLPATHS..................................................................................... 153
EDITING THE TOOLPATH PLAN ....................................................................... 154
EDITING ENTRY/EXIT POINTS ........................................................................ 155
EDITING BRIDGES ......................................................................................... 157
DELETING TOOLPATHS .................................................................................. 159
9. PREVIEWING OUTPUT ............................................................................. 161
SIMULATING OUTPUT IN 2D ........................................................................... 161
SIMULATING OUTPUT USING AN ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEW ................................... 163
CREATE RENDERED VIEW OF TOOLPATHS ..................................................... 164
10. CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE ............................................................ 169
CONFIGURING MACHINE DRIVERS ................................................................. 169
EDITING THE MATERIAL LIBRARY ................................................................... 175
EDITING THE TOOL LIBRARY .......................................................................... 176
11. OUTPUT TO MACHINE ............................................................................. 181
SETTING THE TOOLPATH ORDER ................................................................... 181
GENERATING OUTPUT................................................................................... 182
USING OUTPUT CONTROL CENTER TO MANAGE OUTPUT ................................ 187
12. 3D SURFACES AND 3D TOOLPATHS ..................................................... 191
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 191
3D SURFACE APPLICATIONS ......................................................................... 191
CREATING 3D SURFACES.............................................................................. 192
CREATING OUTPUT FOR 3D SURFACES ......................................................... 192
13. CREATING RELIEFS ................................................................................. 193
CREATING A RELIEF ...................................................................................... 193
RELIEF SHAPE .............................................................................................. 193
RELIEF OPTIONS........................................................................................... 194
APPLICATION METHOD .................................................................................. 196
RELIEF PARAMETERS .................................................................................... 199
USING THE RELIEF DIALOG............................................................................ 202
14. REVOLUTIONS AND EXTRUSIONS......................................................... 207
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 207
REVOLVE ..................................................................................................... 207
SPIN ............................................................................................................ 213
EXTRUDE .................................................................................................... 224
 SWEEP TWO RAILS ...................................................................................... 233
15. CHAMFERING ........................................................................................... 241
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 241
STANDARD CHAMFER .................................................................................. 241
CHAMFER CENTERLINE ................................................................................ 248
BAROQUE CARVE CHAMFER ........................................................................ 252
16. USING 3D MESHES .................................................................................. 255
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 255
USING 3D MESHES FROM OTHER APPLICATIONS ........................................... 256
CREATING 3D MESHES WITH ENROUTE TOOLS ............................................. 256
APPLYING MESHES TO A RELIEF.................................................................... 258
17. MODIFYING AND COMBINING RELIEFS ................................................ 263
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 263
SELECTING RELIEFS ..................................................................................... 263
CUTTING, COPYING AND PASTING RELIEFS .................................................... 263
DELETING RELIEF OBJECTS .......................................................................... 264
CLEARING RELIEFS....................................................................................... 264
MOVING RELIEFS ......................................................................................... 264
ROTATING RELIEFS ...................................................................................... 265
SCALING RELIEFS......................................................................................... 266
FIT RELIEF TO PLATE .................................................................................... 267
SMOOTHING RELIEFS ................................................................................... 267
INVERTING RELIEFS ..................................................................................... 268
CREATE A MESH SURFACE FROM A RELIEF ..................................................... 271
MERGING RELIEFS ....................................................................................... 272
COMBINE RELIEFS ........................................................................................ 274
EXTRACTING SLICES .................................................................................... 274
18. USING BITMAPS ....................................................................................... 279
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 279
APPLYING BITMAPS TO A RELIEF ................................................................... 279
USING A MASK ............................................................................................. 281
3D EFFECTS USING BITMAPS ........................................................................ 282
19. TEXTURE TOOLS ..................................................................................... 285
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 285
APPLYING TEXTURES TO A RELIEF................................................................. 285
20. RELIEF EDIT TOOLS ................................................................................ 291
EDIT RELIEF TOOLBAR.................................................................................. 291
FADE AND SHRINK ........................................................................................ 292
BUILD PARAMETER ....................................................................................... 293
21. 3D TOOLPATHS ........................................................................................ 295
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 295
 3D TOOLPATH STRATEGIES .......................................................................... 295
3D TOOLPATH STRATEGY PARAMETER .......................................................... 296
3D TOOLPATHS WITH A STEP ROUGH ............................................................ 305
ENGRAVE TOOLPATHS ON A RELIEF ............................................................... 312
CREATE RENDERED VIEW OF TOOLPATHS ..................................................... 316
22. AUTOMATIC TOOLPATHS ....................................................................... 319
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 319
DESIGN APPLICATION SUPPORT .................................................................... 320
OVERVIEW OF THE ATP PROCESS ................................................................. 320
ACTIVATING THE ATP DIALOG ...................................................................... 321
THE ATP DIALOG ......................................................................................... 322
SELECTING THE ACTIVE DESIGN APPLICATION ............................................... 323
SELECTING FILES TO PROCESS ..................................................................... 324
LAYER MAPPING ........................................................................................... 326
ORDERING AND NESTING .............................................................................. 332
ATP SETUP.................................................................................................. 338
EXAMPLE STEPS TO PROCESS YOUR FILES ................................................... 341
APPENDIX A - KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS ...................................................... 347
INDEX ................................................................................................................ 349
Software License Agreement
Carefully read the following terms and conditions sign and return as accepting these terms
and conditions.
This is a legal agreement between you, the end user (either an individual or an entity), and SA International, Inc. If
you do not agree with the following, you should promptly return the package. Use of this program indicates your
acceptance of the terms and conditions stated below.
The enclosed computer program "Software" is licensed, not sold, to you by SA International, Inc., for use on a
non-exclusive, non-transferable basis, only under the following terms, and SA International, Inc., reserves any
rights not expressly granted to you. You may not disclose to any third party any confidential information
concerning the Software or SA International, Inc. or use such confidential information to the detriment of SA
International, Inc...
1. License.
This software is protected by the United States Copyright Law and International Treaty Provisions. Therefore, you
must treat the Software just as you would any other copyrighted material, such as a book. This license allows you
to:
(a) Make one copy of the Software in machine readable form; provided that such a copy of the original
may be used solely for backup purposes. As an express condition of this License, you must reproduce
on each copy of the SA International, Inc., copyright notice and any other proprietary legends on the
original copy supplied by SA International, Inc.
(b) Transfer the Software and all rights under this License to another party together with a copy of this
License and all written materials accompanying the Software provided you give SA International, Inc.,
written notice of the transfer and the other party reads and agrees to accept the terms and conditions of
this License.
(c) Use this Software on a single computer only, but may transfer it to another computer as long as it is
used on only one computer at a time. “In Use” constitutes being loaded onto either temporary (i.e.,
RAM) or permanent memory (e.g., hard disk, CD-ROM or other storage device) of a computer.

2. Restrictions.
You may NOT distribute copies of the Software to others or electronically transfer the Software from one
computer to another over a network. You may not de-compile, reverse engineer, disassemble or otherwise reduce
the Software to a human perceivable form. You may not modify, adapt, transfer, rent, lease, loan, resell for profit,
distribute, network or create derivative works based upon the software or any part thereof.
3. Termination.
This License is effective until terminated. This License will terminate immediately if you fail to comply with any of
its provisions. Upon termination, you must return the Software, and all copies thereof, to SA International, Inc.,
and you may terminate this License at any time by doing so.
4. Export Law Assurances.
You agree that neither the Software nor any direct product thereof will be transferred or exported, directly or
indirectly, into any country prohibited by the United States Export Administration Act or any international export
laws and the restrictions and regulations thereunder, nor will it be used for any purposes prohibited by the Act or
laws.
5. Warranty Disclaimer, Limitation of Remedies and Damages.
In no event will SA International, Inc., be liable for any damages, including infringement, lost data, lost profits, cost
of cover or other special, incidental, consequential or indirect damages arising from the use of the program
however caused and on any theory of liability. This limitation will apply even if SA International, Inc., or an
authorized dealer or distributor has been advised of the possibility of such damage. SA International, Inc. MAKES
NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, AND DISCLAIMS, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. SA International, Inc. does not warrant any drivers for plotting, scanning or either devices. These
drivers are provided for our customers as a service only, and were developed using information provided to us at
the time by the equipment manufacturers.
SA International, Inc. is not responsible for any typographical errors in the software or in the documentation.
6. General.
If you are a U.S. Government end-user, this License of the Software conveys only "RESTRICTED RIGHTS," and
its use, disclosure, and duplication are subject to Federal Acquisition Regulations, 52.227-7013(c) (1) (ii). This
License will be construed under the laws of the State of Pennsylvania, except for that body of law dealing with
conflicts of law, if obtained in the U.S., or the laws of jurisdiction where obtained, if obtained outside the U.S. If
any provision of this License is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to law, that provision of this
License will remain in full force and effect.
© Copyright 2002 by SA International, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopy,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher. Printed in the United States of
America. The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment
on the part of SA International, Inc.
Acrobat® Reader Copyright© 1987-2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe and Acrobat
are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions. PostScript®
software Copyright© 1984-1998 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Flexi, FlexiFAMILY, FlexiSIGN-Pro, FlexiSIGN Plus, FlexiEXPERT, FlexiSIGN, FlexiLETTER, FlexiDESIGNER,
FlexiCUT, FlexiENGRAVE, PhotoPRINT Server, PhotoPRINT, PhotoPRINT SE, EnRoute-Pro, EnRoute Plus,
EnRoute, EnRoute-Machine Shop, and/or other SA International products referenced herein are either
trademarks or registered trademarks of SA International, Inc. Illustrator is a registered trademark of Adobe
Systems Incorporated. FreeHand is a registered trademark of Macromedia Corporation. CorelDRAW! is a
trademark of Corel Systems Corporation. AppleTalk, ImageWriter, LaserWriter, and Macintosh are registered
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. The names of
actual companies and products mentioned herein may be the trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. Adobe® is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated or its subsidiaries and may be
registered in certain jurisdictions. PostScript® is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated or its subsidiaries
and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
SA International, Inc.
International Plaza Two, Suite 625
Philadelphia, PA 19113-1518
1. Welcome

Welcome to EnRoute
EnRoute is a design, toolpath generation, and output application that will allow you to create a wide
range of finished products. With it you can create two-dimensional (2D) and three dimensional (3D)
designs and then create all of the toolpaths necessary to produce the parts using your CNC machine.
EnRoute includes many productivity-enhancing features that simplify the design process. Templates
can be saved at many points in the process so that your decisions regarding material types, tool
choices, toolpath strategies, and output ordering may be saved for future use.
The goal of your design process is to produce finished parts efficiently and economically. EnRoute‟s
wide range of toolpath creation tools, nesting, and output ordering options help you accomplish this
goal.
This manual is intended to serve as a starting point for learning EnRoute. It is also available in the
form of online Help in the software. Many other training options are available from SAI for those who
would like additional assistance in taking advantage of EnRoute‟s capabilities.
In this chapter, you will learn about:
 What‟s new in EnRoute
 Recommended System Requirements
 Installing a hardware key
 Installing the Software
 EnRoute 4 Support Services

What’s new in EnRoute

Version 4 of EnRoute includes many significant changes and improvements from previous versions.
Virtually all areas of the software, from the design tools to the toolpath capabilities to the output
capabilities have been enhanced. The following list of changes represents the most significant
enhancements. Each of these is explained in more detail throughout this manual.

Drawing Tools
Text – The text tool allows the user to place text and then edit it to change parameters such as size,
font, style and spacing. The user is able to select text to place on a curve or an arc.
Dimensions – EnRoute has several new dimensioning tools that allow the user to dimension
lengths, angles radii and diameters.
Snapping – New snapping capabilities have been added and are available in more tools.
Drawing Tools – The Rectangle, Circle, Ellipse Arc and Polygon tools have been recreated to make
them more capable and easy to use.
Poly-Arc Tool – This new drawing tool will make it much easier to draw a polyline comprised of lines
and arcs. It allows the user to create each segment either graphically or precisely, and switch

Welcome Page 1
between arcs and lines easily.
Node Editing - The node editing tool will allow zooming and panning within the tool.
Move, Rotate, Scale – New tools have been created that allow for better precision.
Measure – A new measuring tool allows the user to measure distances, angles, and areas.
Partial Offset – This offset tool has been improved to allow the user to select sections of a contour
to offset, as well as open contours.
Offset – The contour offset tool now provides a preview of the offsets before they are accepted.
Fillet – The fillet tool offers more options, provides a preview of the fillet, and allows either individual
fillets or for an entire contour to be filleted.
Mirror – The new mirror tool provides more options, including the ability to define the axis around
which to create the mirror, and the option to create a copy with the mirror. Also, a preview of the
mirrored object is created.
Nesting Report - EnRoute provides the option to have a nesting report generated that provides
information about the efficiency of the nest.
Dynamic Nesting – EnRoute has a new nesting tool that allows the user to drag objects onto the
plate and have them automatically rotate to fit within the constraints of other objects and the edge of
the plate. Several parameters allow you to adjust offsets and rotations steps.

Reliefs
Relief Editing – EnRoute has a suite of new relief editing tools that allow the user to interactively edit
a selected relief. These powerful tools provide a new creative option for relief creation and editing.
Textures – EnRoute has a new parametric texturing engine that provides a new and unique way to
add textures to surfaces without the need to use bitmaps. The new texturing tools create textures
that go out in all directions, automatically match the resolution of the relief, and are parametrically
defined which allows the user to create unique effects.
Baroque Chamfer Tool – This is a unique tool that allows the user to simulate the effect of a
traditional hand-carved surface. It automatically determines convex and concave sections of the
artwork and then applies different profiles to these sections, with smooth transitions between them.
Relief Rendering – EnRoute has improved the rendering of reliefs in all of the views. Also available
are lighting options so that you can change how the relief is lit.

Toolpaths
Spiral Fill – EnRoute has a new spiral fill option that will be useful in certain applications.
Bridges – EnRoute has implemented several new types of bridges that improve the smoothness of
movement of the tool as it creates the bridge.
Bridge Editing – the Bridge editing functions have been improved.

Page 2 Welcome
Automatic Toolpath (ATP)
DXF Part Quantities – You will be able to specify the quantities of parts you want to process using
DXF files that are not associated with a specific design application.
Cut List Sorting – You are able to sort parts in the cut list by clicking on the column headers.
Reporting – EnRoute has worked to improve the organization and presentation of the printed report
that is generated showing the nested sheets. Recommended System Requirements
Before you begin installing the software, read the hardware requirements below. For optimal
performance we suggest that your system meet the recommended requirements. As with all
computer software, systems with faster processors, more RAM, and greater amounts of storage
space allow you to work with larger files and keep your processing time to a minimum.

Recommended System Requirements

Windows
Processor Pentium 4 or better
RAM 512 MB
Install Space 300 MB
Working Disk Space 4 GB
Operating System Windows 98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP
Video 1024 x 768 resolution with 24-bit color
Other CD-ROM drive or DVD drive
Free USB port for hardware key

Welcome Page 3
Installing a Hardware Key
The software will not run without a hardware protection key, also known as a dongle. The hardware
key protects the software from being unlawfully copied and must be connected to your computer
whenever you use the software.
There are two types of hardware keys: Parallel and USB keys.

Parallel key USB key

1. Turn off your computer.
2. Plug the hardware key into the port (USB, or parallel).
3. Turn on your computer.

 When using parallel port keys, we recommend that you plug the key into its own parallel port that
is not used by any other device.

Installing the Software

Place the installation CD in the appropriate drive of your computer. The installation will automatically
begin after 10-15 seconds.
If the installation does not automatically begin, do the following:
1. From the Start menu choose Run.
2. Type D:\ \SETUP.EXE (where D:\ equals the appropriate drive of your CD) and press Enter.
The installation procedure will start.
3. Click Yes to accept the Registration and License agreement.
4. Click Next to accept the default directory, or click Browse to select a different drive/directory
5. Click Next to accept the default folder that will be created and placed in Windows Start Menu
6. You will be asked whether or not you want to install the current HASP drivers. If you have
recently installed EnRoute or other SA International, Inc. software this is not necessary. If you
are unsure, then install the latest drivers.
7. You will then be prompted to install the password for your key and the version of EnRoute
you are using. The password is a 20-digit alpha-numeric number.
8. After installation is complete, reboot your computer.

Page 4 Welcome
EnRoute 4 Support Services
On-Line Support Services
SA International recognizes the pressures you must endure with you business, computers and new
software. There are times when you need help, which we understand. SA International is available
to help you with your technical question, as well as your “How To” problems with our software. A
variety of help methods are available to fit your budget, as well as your urgency to offer true value
and peace of mind.

Support in North America

New and upgraded products qualify for 90 Days Free Support from the date of purchase. During
these first 90 days, unlimited free technical support is available in North America by calling our
Technical Support Team Line: 800.229.9044

Technical Support Hours: Monday – Friday 8:30 AM – 6:00PM EST

E-Support: www.SAintl.biz
Questions regarding current version products can be submitted to our e-Support at no charge at any
time. Replies are generally made within one business day.
Fax Support:
Questions regarding current version products can be submitted to our Technical Support Fax line at
anytime. Replies are generally made within one business day.
Contact
Fax Support Line: 610.521.9033

Corporate Office
International Plaza 2, Suite 625
Philadelphia, Pa 19113 USA
Tel: 800.229.9068
Tel: 610.521.6300
Fax: 610.521.0111

European Office
Minevastraat 14 Bis
B-19+30 Zaventem, Belgium
Tel: +32.2.725.52.95
Fax: +32.2.725.28.09

Welcome Page 5
Page 6 Welcome
2. Getting Started

Workflow

Design Toolpath Output

The graphic above illustrates the basic concept for completing a project in EnRoute. It may seem
overly simplistic, but it does have a valuable practical use. When you are working in EnRoute, you
are at all times within one of these steps of the process, and it is important to always understand
where you are in the process. In the Design phase you are typically creating 2D contours for your
design. You might also be creating a relief surface. Everything you do to define the geometry and
surfaces of your design is part of the design process.
After completing the design, you are ready to create the toolpaths for cutting out the design. In this
stage, it is important to understand such things as the material you plan to use, the tools you have
available, and the quality of the finish required on the cut edges and surfaces of the parts. Output to
the machine requires you to select the correct output driver, and to make sure that the configuration
in EnRoute matches your specific machine.

Basic Elements of EnRoute

The main display area shows a view of the workspace. It can display a Top, Right, Front or
Perspective view of the workspace, or all four views at the same time. Although you will likely do the
majority of your work in the top view, it is often very convenient to be able to view contours and
toolpaths from other views in order to see how they relate to each other.

Getting Started Page 7

Working with Views
To maximize a view, double-click on the name of the view that appears in its upper left corner.
Double-clicking on the name a second time returns you to the four-view layout.
You can also toggle between the top view and the perspective view using the F12 key.

Menus
All tools and options are available by selecting them from the menus at the top of the screen. File
Edit, View, etc. Click on the Menu name to open the menu.

Toolbars
In addition to locating the tools through the menus you can also find the tools readily available on the
toolbars. Some of the toolbars contain flyout Toolbars. The flyout Toolbar is a group of tools that
share the same space on a toolbar, the entire group of tools “fly out” when you press and hold the
first tool. A small yellow triangle in the lower right corner indentifies the first tool in a fly-out toolbar.

Hiding and Displaying Toolbars

Menu: Setup / Toolbars
The user has the option to turn off some or all of the toolbars associated with this program. If there is
a check mark in front of the toolbar‟s name the toolbar is turned ON.

Resetting Toolbars
Menu: Setup / Toolbars / Reset to Defaults
Select Reset to Defaults if you would like to set the toolbars back to their original position.

Using Toolbar Flyout Menus

Many toolbar icons have a small yellow triangle in their lower right corner indicating that a flyout
menu for the tool exists.
A quick click on the toolbar icons will activate that particular tool. Click and hold for a short time in
order to access the flyout menu containing several more tools.

If you click on the edge of a flyout menu and drag it, the menu will “tear off” and form a floating menu.

Page 8 Getting Started

The original flyout menu will still be there: the floating menu is a duplicate.

Rulers
Menu: View / View Ruler
Rulers appear along the top and left side of the main screen to help you measure and align contours.
Rulers can be activated for the top, right and front views from the View menu. The rulers can be very
helpful in keeping track of where you are in a design as you move around in the design during the
design process.
The rulers are also a handy way to bring guidelines into the work area, by just clicking on a ruler and
dragging the guideline into the design.

Displaying and Hiding Rulers

Menu: View / View Ruler
To show or hide the rulers, from the View menu, point to View Ruler and click Top, Right or Front
view.

Changing Units
Menu: Setup / Preferences / Units tab
To change the units used for all the drawing elements in your design, from the View menu, click on
Preferences and choose the Units tab. Select the unit of measure desired.

Status Line
The status line along the bottom of the display provides a number of pieces of information. On the left
side of the status bar the current coordinates of the cursor are constantly updated. If objects are
selected, their size is displayed to the right of the coordinates.
During operations that require more than a moment or two of processing, a status bar is activated to
provide feedback of the progress of the task.

Getting Started Page 9

Using Scroll Bars
Menu: View / View Scroll Bars
Scroll bars are horizontal and vertical bars located on the bottom and left side of your design area.
Use them to scroll the design area.

Click the arrows on both sides to scroll

the design area in small increments

Click the blank area to move the

design area in large increments

Click and drag to scroll the design

area

To toggle scroll bars on and off, from the View Menu, select the View scroll bars option.

Precision Input Center

The Precision Input Center is utilized as an interface for some of EnRoute‟s activities. It can be
activated at any time by pressing F2. Activating the Precision Input Center by using F2 provides a
simple method to move, scale or rotate selected objects. Other, more detailed, methods for moving,
scaling, and rotating selected objects are also available, and are discussed in other sections of this
manual.

For example, if you want to move the selected contour to a specific location, press F2 and select the
Move tab. Then enter the coordinates for the new location to move the contours to that location.
Note also the Reference Grid control, which allows you to choose which corner, side or
center point on the contour, will be lined up over the specified point when the contour is
moved.

Page 10 Getting Started

Using Snaps
Menu: Setup / Snaps
Snaps allow you to select specific points
during geometry construction and editing
activities. Within most of the drawing
commands, if you have snaps activated then
as you move the cursor around on the screen
the cursor will snap to other drawing element
points that meet the criteria of the snap. For
example, if you have Snap to Endpoint on and then move the cursor close to a contour endpoint the
cursor will snap to the point. Snapping makes it much simpler to precisely create and edit contours.

Icon Description Cursor

Snap to grid Snaps to the nearest grid point. The grid
spacing is configured on the Grid page in
Preferences.
Snap to Snaps to a nearby guideline when the cursor
guideline gets close. Also when dragging a contour, the
perimeter of the contour snaps to nearby
guidelines.

Snap to Snaps to the intersection of two line segments.

intersection

Snap to Snaps to the endpoints of arc, curve and sine

endpoint segments.

Snap to Snaps to the nearest point on a contour when

nearby the cursor gets close to it.
contour
Snap to Snaps to the center of an arc segment when
center of arc the cursor is placed near the arc.

Snap to Snaps to the midpoint of a segment when the

midpoint cursor gets close to it.

Snap to When constructing line segments, after

perpendicular defining the first point in the segment, the
point second endpoint will snap to a point on a
contour so that the line segment will be
perpendicular to the contour.

Getting Started Page 11

 Snap to When constructing line segments, the second
tangent point endpoint will snap to a point on an arc so that
the new line segment will be tangent to the
arc.
The snap distance value is set on the General Tab of the Preferences Dialog. See “Setting
Preferences” for details.

Using Guidelines
Menu: View / Edit Guidelines
Guidelines are design aids that display as a dotted line in your design view. If Snap to Guidelines is
enabled, contours moved near a guideline will automatically be positioned along the guideline.

 Clicking on the Next button will allow you to move through the guidelines that have been placed.
The guideline will be highlighted in blue to show which guideline has been selected.

Edit Guidelines Dialog

Menu: View / Edit Guidelines
Use the Edit Guidelines Dialog to Create, Delete, Move, Rotate, Lock or Hide a guideline.
To open the Guideline Dialog: Select Edit Guideline from the View Menu.

Page 12 Getting Started

Creating a Guideline
Menu: View / Edit Guidelines
The simplest way to place a guideline is to „drag‟ it from the horizontal or vertical rulers on the screen.
Place the guideline by left-clicking on the ruler and then dragging the guideline out into the design.
You can also create a new guideline using the Edit Guideline dialog:
1. Activate the view in which the
guideline is to be placed by
clicking in that view.
2. Enter in the coordinates and
angle of the new guideline.
3. Click on the New button.
4. Click on Done to exit the dialog.

Deleting a Guideline
Menu: View / Edit Guidelines
1. Activate the Guidelines dialog.
2. Click on the Next button until the guideline is highlighted in blue.
3. Click on the Delete button.

 It is also possible to right-click on a guideline and then select Delete guideline from the shortcut
menu. You cannot delete a guideline by dragging it out of a view.

Moving a Guideline
Menu: View / Edit Guidelines
1. Activate the Guidelines dialog.
2. Click on the Next button until the guideline is highlighted in blue.
3. Enter the coordinates for the new location.
4. Click on the Move button.

 Guidelines may also be moved interactively by simply selecting the guideline with the
mouse…left click, hold and drag to the desired location. If the lock guides option has been
enabled this interactive method does not work.

Getting Started Page 13

Rotating a Guideline
Menu: View / Edit Guidelines
1. Activate the Guidelines dialog
2. Click on the Next button until the guideline is highlighted in blue.
3. Enter the angle (in degrees) you would like the guideline to be rotated to in the Angle field.
4. Click Rotate.
5. Click Done.

Locking Guidelines
Menu: View / Edit Guidelines
The Lock Guidelines feature prevents guidelines from being moved or edited by accident.
Guidelines may be added while the guidelines are locked, but may not be deleted, moved or edited.
1. Activate the Guidelines dialog.
2. Check the Lock Guides box.
3. Click Done.

Hiding Guidelines
Menu: View / Edit Guidelines
The Hide Guidelines feature allows you to hide the guidelines without actually deleting them. While
this feature is enabled, no guidelines will be displayed, and the Snap to Guidelines feature will be
disabled.
1. Activate the Guidelines dialog.
2. Check the Hide Guides box.
3. Click Done.

Changing the View

The commands available in the View menu and the Zoom toolbar allow you to zoom in and out to
get a closer look at part of your design or see the whole thing. The zoom commands do not change
the size of any part of your design; they simply change your view of the information.

Zooming with the Mouse

To zoom in and out using the mouse, hold down the CTRL key and drag with the right mouse button.
Dragging the mouse up or left zooms out, down or right zooms in.

Zooming using a Wheel Mouse

Zooming with a wheel mouse is a particularly handy way to get around a drawing. Move the cursor
to where you want to work, and move the wheel backward to zoom out or forward to zoom in.
Zooming is centered on the cursor location which makes it very easy to zoom into a particular
location.

Page 14 Getting Started

Zoom Commands
Menu: View
Toolbar: Zoom

Function Icon Description

Zoom The Zoom Window command allows you to select an area to
Window magnify.
4. Click with the mouse and drag a box around the area
you want to magnify.
5. Release the left mouse button and the software will
zoom in on the selected area.

Zoom In Zoom in towards the center of the window.

(Ctrl + I)
Zoom Out Zoom out and enlarge the view of the design
(Ctrl + K)
Zoom to
Plate Display the entire plate.
(Ctrl + P)
Zoom Return to the previous zoom setting.
Previous
Zoom to
Extents of Zoom in on the currently selected contour or contours.
Selection
Zoom to Zoom out to display all contours, including the plate if one is
Extents of designed.
all Objects

Redraw
Menu: View / Redraw
The Redraw Tool is used to redraw or refresh the screen and clear any remnants left over from
manipulating drawing elements, from the View menu, select Redraw or press Ctrl + R.

View Setup
Menu: View / Setup
Menu: Setup / View Tab

The View Setup tab of the Preferences dialog determines how information is displayed on screen. To
access the View Setup tab, from the View menu, select View Setup.

Getting Started Page 15

Using the Undo and Redo Features
Menu: Edit / Undo

To undo the last operation, from the Edit menu, select Undo […] or type CTRL+Z. . The name
of the last operation is displayed after the Undo command.
If you decide that you didn't want to undo an action, from the Edit menu, select Redo […] or type

CTRL+SHIFT+Z.

 If you have more than one design open, the Undo and Redo commands only affect changes
made to the active design.

Working with Layers

Menu: Setup
Toolbar: Settings
EnRoute offers the ability to organize your designs into Layers. Layers provide a way to separate
design information and toolpaths into groups. Individual layers may be displayed or hidden at any
time. In addition, contours contained in different layers can be displayed in different colors to help
distinguish different parts of the design.

Toggle Layers
Toolbar: Settings
To activate the layers toolbar click on the layers toggle icon. This will open the layers toolbar. The
layers can be easily managed using the arrows to access the different layers.

By clicking on the Activate all layers icon you can easily switch between the current layer
displayed and displaying all of the layers.

Layers Dialog
Menu: Setup
Toolbar: Settings
Each layer has several options for display and use. These options include: On, Off, Lock and Move
Lock. A check in the box indicates that this function is turned on for this layer.

If the Layer is: The Objects on the layer:

On All objects on that layer are displayed and can be selected.

Page 16 Getting Started

 Off None of the objects on the layer are displayed, and none of the objects on that
layer can be selected.
Lock
All of the objects on the layers are displayed but cannot be selected. You can
still snap to the objects using the snap tools.
The current layer cannot be locked.

Lock Move All of the objects on the layers are displayed, they can be selected but they
cannot be moved.

To access the Layers dialog, click on the Layers icon

To: Do The Following:

Select the Current Check the box in the Current column for that layer.
Layer The current layer is the layer in which any contours will be created.
Add a New Layer Click New.
The layer is added to the bottom of the list, and is automatically selected as
the current layer.
Delete Layers Select the layer and click Delete.
If there are contours contained in that layer, you will be asked to confirm
your action. If you delete the layer, its contents will also be deleted.
Remove Empty Click on the Remove Empty button to remove all layers that are empty. This
is useful in helping to clean up a drawing by removing empty layers.
Rename a Layer Edit the text in the Name column for that layer.
Highlight and type the new name.
Change the Color Click on the color displayed in the Color column for that layer. A standard
of a Layer Windows color selector window will open.

Getting Started Page 17

 Select the new color and click OK.
Moving Layers To move a layer, select the layer and click on Move Up or Move Down. You
can also move a layer by dragging the row header at the left edge of the list.

Hide or Display In the On and Off column, check On to display a layer, Off to hide it. The
Layers current layer cannot be hidden.

Lock a Layer Check the box in the Lock column to lock a layer. Contours contained in a
locked layer cannot be edited or deleted.

Unlock a Layer Clear the box in the Lock column to unlock the layer.
The current layer cannot be locked.

Save Changes Click OK to save all changes and close the dialog.
and Exiting
Cancel Changes Click Cancel to close the dialog without saving any changes.

Changing a Contour’s Layer

Menu: Transform / Change Layer
Toolbar: Settings

When a contour is created, it is placed on the current layer.

To change a contour‟s layer:
1. Select the contour(s).
2. Activate the Change Layer dialog either from the menu or from the toolbar button.

Page 18 Getting Started

 3. Click on the layer you want to move the contours into.
4. Click OK.

Using Help
Menu: Help
To display the EnRoute Help system, from the Help menu, select Help Contents. You can also
press F1.

Setting Preferences
Menu: Setup / Preferences
EnRoute allows for several categories of options to be individually chosen by the user. Access the
preference settings in the Setup Menu. Enter your preferred settings. Click OK to save changes.
Click Cancel to close the dialog without saving changes.

The available settings are:

General Tab
Merge Designs which were created and exported from other drawing programs are not
Contours always created as closed contours. This function provides for and automatically
merges contours together.

Getting Started Page 19

 Import Check this box to merge contours when they are imported.
Paste Check this box to merge contours when they are pasted from the
clipboard.
Tolerance The maximum separation between contour endpoints that will still
be merged.
Automatic These options specify whether the program should automatically delete short
Cleanup segments when importing or copying contours into the program.
Import Check this box to delete segments when contours are imported.
Paste Check this box to delete segments when contours are pasted from
the clipboard.
Tolerance The maximum length of segments that will be deleted.
Undo Sets the number of operations that are saved so that the Undo command can
Operations undo them.
Limit
Unlimited All operations since the last save can be undone.
Limited The Undo command will be able to undo only the specified number
of operations.
Save The Auto Save function automatically saves the current design at the specified
time interval.
Auto Check to enable the AutoSave function.
Save
Time The time interval at which the design is automatically saved.
Interval
Allow scaling Check to allow groups of toolpaths to be resized as a group. If cleared, toolpath
of toolpath groups cannot be resized. Checked by default.
groups
Clip toolpaths If checked, output toolpaths will not extend outside the boundary of the plate.
to plate
Horizontal If this option is available, it allows you to control whether you want to allow
Cutting toolpaths to be rotated out of the horizontal x-y plane. This is only appropriate if
your machine has the ability to cut toolpaths that are not in the x-y plane – most
likely using an aggregate head. If this option is available in your version of
EnRoute, it should most likely remain unchecked unless you specifically need to
rotate toolpath groups.
Bump Set the amount that a selection is moved when an arrow key is pressed.
Increment
 When moving a contour using the arrow keys to bump it, it is normally
bumped by the increment specified here. However by holding down the shift
key, the bump becomes a portion of the display width, so it gets smaller as
you Zoom In.

Page 20 Getting Started

Click Sets the amount that values in a field are changed by when the “spinner” to the
Increment right of the field is clicked.
Snap The distance in pixels at which the snap function is triggered, snapping a contour
Threshold to a grid point or other positioning guide.

Initialization Tab
Maximize Check this box to automatically maximize the software on startup.
Application
Maximize Enable this function to automatically maximize new documents when they
Document are opened.
Display 4 Check to display designs in the 4-view mode by default.
Views
Prompt for Check to open the Define Plate dialog automatically when a new design
Plate document is created.
Small Part This parameter is used by EnRoute for selecting „small parts‟ when the
Size option to output small parts first is selected in the output dialog.
Threshold
rd
Solutions This defines the path of any installed 3 party applications that provide
Path additional functionality to EnRoute.

Display Tab
The Display tab allows the user to define which colors are associated with the different types of
drawing elements.
To change a color:
1. Double-click on the color you want to change
2. Select the color desired and click OK.
3. Click OK to exit and save any changes.

Show Layer Check this box to show the colors assigned to the individual layers.
Colors
Update This should typically be checked. It allows EnRoute to update buttons so that
Buttons buttons are only enabled when they are appropriate based on the current status
of the selected objects. If it is not checked, then buttons will be left enabled even
though they might not be functional.

Enable This parameter allows EnRoute to utilize the best drawing and rendering
OpenGL capabilities of the graphics card in your computer. It should only be turned off if
there is a compatibility issue with the OpenGL implementation in your computer
and EnRoute.

Units Tab
The Units tab allows you to select the units that will be used to measure Length, Time and Speed in
the software.
Getting Started Page 21
If the units are changed, the measurements of any existing contours will be converted to the new
units so that they remain the same size.

 If the units are changed while a design containing toolpaths is open, the measurements of the
toolpaths may not be converted correctly. For this reason, you should save and close the
design, then change the units and reopen the design. This ensures the toolpaths will be
converted properly.

Grid Tab
The Grid tab allows the user to determine the view of the grid shown on the document page. Using
the grid is very helpful in determining the placement of contours. There are two levels of the grid that
may be enabled and adjusted to the layout of a particular project.

Show Grid A checkmark in this box indicates the grid is turned on.
Interval of the grid The distance between the grid marks.
marks
Style of grid marks Select None, Cross, Tick, or Line.
Size Size of the grid marks in pixels.
Color Color of the grid marks.
Show grid in Check this box to display the grid in the Perspective view.
perspective

View Setup Tab

The View Setup tab determines how information is displayed on screen.

Standard Items
Plate Check this box to display the plate, if any.
Contours Check this box to display the contours.
 Since contours are the main type of drawing element, this is typically left
on. Sometimes it can be convenient to turn contour display off to review
only the toolpaths.

Contour Loops Check this box to display contour loop indicators.

While converting a contour to a toolpath, the software will try to detect loops in
the contours. If loops are detected, and you choose not to proceed (in which
case the loops are automatically removed), the points at which the contour
crosses itself will be indicated with contour loop indicators.

Open Contour Check to display direction arrows on open contours.

Direction
Popup menu Check to enable a right click with the mouse to bring up a popup menu for the
on Right Click tool you are using.

Page 22 Getting Started

Toolpath Items
Toolpaths Check this box to display the toolpaths.
Direction Check this box to display direction arrows on toolpaths.
Entry/Exit Check this box to display the Entry/Exit positions for each toolpath.
Bridges Check this box to display the location of toolpath bridges.
Start Check this box to display a small circle with an X in the middle at the start point of
Point each toolpath. If you want to see Lead In/Lead Out toolpaths make sure the Start
Point is turned on also.
Toolpath The Width option determines how toolpaths are displayed on screen. There are two
Width options:
Lines The toolpaths are displayed as lines with directional arrows (Default).
By The toolpaths are displayed using the diameter of the tool used to create
Tool the toolpath.
 This option will give you a better idea of what the final piece will look
like after it has been machined. The Simulate 2D command located in
the Machining Menu will show the same thing as the By Tool option, in
addition to showing the cutting sequence.

Depth This option controls how the depth of the toolpaths affects the way they are displayed.
All All toolpaths at all depths are displayed (Default)
Depths
Surface The toolpaths at the surface is displayed.
Final The last (bottom) toolpath is displayed.
[Specific One of the specific depths assigned to the passes is selected for display.
depth]
Tools This option selects which toolpaths will be displayed based on the type of tool
associated with the toolpath.
All Tools Toolpaths for all tool types are displayed (Default).
[Specific Only the toolpaths which use the selected type of tool are displayed.
Type]

Relief Tab
Toolpath This parameter defines how closely 3D toolpaths follow their relief. This value might
Tolerance vary depending on the size and resolution of the reliefs. The smaller the tolerance the
more closely the toolpaths will follow the relief, but this will also create more segments
in the toolpaths and increase the size of the output files.

Getting Started Page 23

Start Points
This tab allows you to define a preference for where start points are automatically located on Routing
Offset toolpaths.

Long This will locate the start point on the longest edge of the contour. If Edge Midpoint is
Edge and checked, then the start point will be moved from the start of the long edge to its
Edge midpoint.
Midpoint
Direction This option allows you to define a direction that EnRoute will then use to locate the
start point. The direction is entered in the edit box to the right in degrees.
Magnetic This option allows you to enter a specific point, and then EnRoute will create the start
point for each object as close to that point as it can. This allows you to automatically
pull start points toward an area of the material.
Longest This option picks the longest segment within the contour and locates the start point
Segment either at the start of the midpoint of the segment depending on whether the Segment
Midpoint option is checked.

Dimensions Tab
The Dimensions Tab sets up the display parameters of the dimension tools. All dimensions in the
drawing will be displayed using these parameters.
Text Select the font for the dimension text.
This parameter sets the height of the text in the dimensions tool.

This parameter sets the distance that the extension lines start to draw from the start and
end points of the dimension.
This parameter determines the height of the arrow.

This parameter determines the width of the arrow.

This parameter sets the number of decimal positions for the measurement of a line
segment.

This parameter sets the number of decimal positions for the measurement of an angle.

This sets the position of the text above the arrow line.

This sets the position of the text in the center of the arrow line.

This sets the position of the text under the arrow line.

Page 24 Getting Started

Ordering Tab
The Ordering tab allows you to define default ordering preferences so that when toolpaths are
automatically ordered by EnRoute, the order will follow your preferences. The layout of this dialog is
essentially the same as the ordering dialog that is presented in other tools such as Output, 2D
Simulate, Ortho Simulate, and the Rendering tool. And, they are all related.
It is possible from each of those other ordering tools to reset the ordering to match these
preferences, and it is also possible to send the current ordering settings in a file to the ordering
preferences. For example, maybe you have defined your preferences so that Routing Offset
strategies come before Drill strategies. And then you find that when you prepare your jobs for output
you always change the Strategy Order so that the routing offsets go last. From within the output
dialog you can easily make those updated choices become your ordering preferences. Then the
next time you create a design that includes routing offsets and drills, the default ordering settings will
reflect the updated preferences that have the routing offset after the drills.

Getting Started Page 25

The following table provides a brief description of each of the parameters in the Ordering
Preferences dialog.

Priority Set the priority order for the order in which toolpaths sorted. In the priority settings
Order in the graphic above, the toolpaths will be sorted based on the tool order as the top
priority, followed by the Object Order, Strategy Order, etc... A more detailed
explanation of the ordering philosophy in EnRoute is located in Chapter 11 of this
manual.
Tool Order You can choose tools from EnRoute‟s tool library to add to the Tool Order list. You
might typically add tools that you use often, and then click and drag them into the
preferred order.
Strategy This list includes all of the strategy types available in EnRoute. By default they are
Order in a reasonable order – drills are first in the list and routing offsets are last. You
can click and drag these strategy types into your preferred order.
Object Order You can choose the default object ordering method, including shortest, rows,
columns, inside out, and outside in.
Small Parts If this is checked, objects with a surface area less than the small part size
First threshold defined in the Initialization tab will be put at the top of the object order list
regardless of the object ordering method.
Maintain If objects are grouped together, this checkbox allows them to be treated as one
Grouping object for object ordering.
Add Tool This button allows you to add a tool to the Tool Order list.
Delete Tool This button removes the current tool from the Tool Order list.
Clear Tools This button clears all the tools from the Tool Order list.
Reset Active This resets the currently active parameters (Priority, Tool, Strategy or Object) to
their default values.
Reset This resets all the ordering parameters to their default values.
Parameters

Exiting the Software

Menu: File
From the File menu, select the Exit command to close all layouts and exit the program.

Page 26 Getting Started

3. Toolbars and Command Icons
This section provides a summary of the major functions of EnRoute. As you will recognize, most of
the commonly used tools are readily available by clicking the screen buttons available in the toolbars.
The icons presented and described in this section are organized based on the toolbars in which they
reside.
The toolbars can easily be moved to the top, bottom, right or left side of the display. This allows you
to customize the interface to fit your preferences. The changes you make will be saved when you
exit so that the layout will come back just as you left it the next time you start the program.
Until you become familiar with each of the icons, you can view a short “hint” about each icon by
placing the cursor over the button and leaving it there for a second or two.
In addition to the screen icons, you can also reach all of the EnRoute functions by using the pull
down menus.

File Toolbar

New (Ctrl+N) - Use the New command to start a new drawing. EnRoute supports the
Multi Document Interface (MDI), which allows you to have more than one layout open at a
time.
Open (Ctrl+O) - Use the Open command to open an existing EnRoute file. When you
open a file it is placed in its own drawing window, not the current one.
Import a File - Use the Import command to load a file that has been saved in a compatible
format other than the native EnRoute format.
Save (Ctrl+S) - Use the Save command to save the current design file. If you are saving
a file for the first time, the Save File As dialog will be displayed.
Print – The Print command gives you the opportunity to print the current screen view or
drawing.
Calculator - This will activate the windows calculator tool.

Save Snapshot of Active View – This tool allows you to take a snapshop of the active
view and save it to a file.
Measure Lenghts- This tool opens a toolbar with access to several measurement tools.

Cut (Ctrl+X) – The Cut command allows you to remove items from the design file and
place them in the Windows Clipboard so they can be “pasted” either back in the original
file, or in a another design file.

Toolbars and Command Icons Page 27

 Copy (Ctrl+C) – The Copy command is similar to the cut command, except it places a
copy of the selection into the clipboard.
Paste (Ctrl+V) – The Paste command takes information that is stored in the Windows
Clipboard and places it in the currently active design file.
Delete – Use this tool to delete the selected objects.

Undo (Ctrl+Z) - Use the Undo command to reverse your most recent actions. The Undo
command may be chosen as many times as needed to undo previous editing operations
up to the first operation in the editing session. If you load a file and make a number of
editing changes to it, EnRoute will allow you to Undo all of the changes.

Redo (Shift+Ctrl+Z) Redo command to reverse any operation changed by the Undo
command. You can continue to select the Redo command until all of the Undo operations
have been reversed.

Zoom Toolbar

Zoom Window – Use the Zoom Window command to magnify a selected area. The Zoom
Window command is different than the Zoom Out and Zoom In commands in that you can
specify a particular area for the zoom to cover.
Zoom In (Ctrl+I) - Use the Zoom In command to zoom up or magnify the current window.

Zoom Out (Ctrl+K) - Use the Zoom Out command to zoom straight back.

Zoom to Plate (Ctrl+P) – Use the Zoom to Plate command to magnify to the extent of the
plate size.
Zoom Previous - This command will return you to the previous zoom display.

Zoom to Extents of Selection - Use the Zoom Selection command to display the
selected group in the current layout.
Zoom to Extents of all Objects– Use the Zoom to the Extents command to display all
design objects in the current file. This will include the plate if one is defined.

Page 28 Toolbars and Command Icons

Settings Toolbar

Define Layers (F7) – This icon activates a dialog that allows the user to
manage the layers that are used to store drawing elements. Within this dialog
you can specify the active layer.
Change Layers – Activates a dialog that allows you to change the layer to store
the current selection.
Toggle the layers toolbar – Opens or closes the layers toolbar.

Libraries Toolbar

Redefine the Current Plate – This activates the dialog to define the plate in the
current drawing. The Plate provides a good reference during the design process
and it also provides a means of making sure that toolpaths stay within the limits
of the material you are using.
Material Library (F4) – The Material Library provides a method for customizing
settings for your machine and specific activities. You may define speeds for
different types of materials (wood, metal, etc.) that are to be routed or
engraved. When the Define Plate command is used, there is the option to
select a material type to be associated to the plate. Speed settings can be set
for the materials you use most often so that EnRoute will apply these
parameters to new toolpath strategies jobs without having to re-specify them
each time.
Tool Library (F5) - The Tool Library command is used to define routing and
engraving tools used with the toolpath commands. The tool geometry
entered for each tool is used to generate toolpaths.
Driver Setup (F6) - This icon will bring up the parameters for the currently
active driver. Each driver parameter may be edited and then saved back to the
driver configuration file. All of the drivers that have been installed on the
computer are available to be selected as the active driver.

Toolbars and Command Icons Page 29

Output Toolbar

Generate Output - This is the main icon used to send toolpath output either to a
file or directly to the machine. In this dialog the user defines how the information
is to be sent, how the toolpaths are ordered as they are output, and which
toolpaths are included.
Automatic Toolpath - The EnRoute Wood version of EnRoute provides
Automatic Toolpath (ATP) capabilities that allow you to process parts contained
in external DXF geometry files.
Simulate 2D (F8) – This icon activates a mode in which the user can visualize
how the toolpaths will be sent to the machine. The toolpaths are drawn to the
screen in the same sequence that they will be sent to the machine as output.
Statistics regarding the number of tool changes and the number of tool lifts are
also presented in this mode. In addition, the user has the opportunity to modify
the order of the toolpaths and then immediately see the effect on the output
using the 2D simulation.
Simulate Ortho - This icon activates a mode similar to the 2D Simulation except
it is in the perspective view. The toolpaths are drawn to the screen in the same
sequence that they will be sent to the machine as output. Statistics regarding
the number of tool changes and the number of tool lifts are also presented in
this mode. In addition, the user has the opportunity to modify the order of the
toolpaths and then immediately see the effect on the output using the Simulate
Ortho mode.
3D Rendered View - This icon activates a 3D mode that allows you to view a
solid model of your material, and the results of the toolpaths cutting the
material. This mode is useful for seeing the effects of both 2D and 3D toolpaths.
Project Toolpaths - This tool provides a method for tipping toolpaths vertically.
It is useful for cutting non-horizontal surfaces, and is likely most useful for
routing offset and fills.

Set Toolpath Order – This tool is used to manually set the order of the objects
as they will be used to generate output. The user can define the order using
different methods for sorting the objects or define the specific order by selecting
the sequence with this tool.

Page 30 Toolbars and Command Icons

Object Edit Toolbar

Selection Tool – This is the main selection tool in EnRoute for selecting, rotating and
scaling objects.
Group (Ctrl+G) – This command is used to group two or more objects together so they
may be selected and manipulated as a unit. After the objects have been placed in a group,
they can be selected as a group by clicking on any member of the group. Also, they may
be released to return them to their original state as separate objects.
Ungroup (Ctrl+U) – This command is used to release objects from a group to their
original state as separate objects.
Move Tool – This tool allows the user to precisely move an object.

Rotate – This tool is used to either interactively or precisely rotate selected objects.

Scale – This tool is used to precisely scale objects. Again, by selecting a group of objects
and then clicking on the scale icon the user can enter precise size or scale information to
change the size of the selection.
Mirror Object - This tool is used to interactively mirror an object.

Alignment – This icon can be used to activate a toolbar that presents a number of
different options for aligning the objects in a selection. The first icon is used to align
objects to center both horizontally and vertically. The additional icons in this toolbar
provide other alignment options.
Weld –This icon is used to activate a toolbar that presents a number of options for welding
selected objects. The first icon is used to weld objects that are overlapping each other into
one single object. Additional options include: Weld Common and Weld Subtract, as well
as two interactive welding tools.
Nest - This tool allows you to arrange selected objects into a configuration that will allow
them to be cut out so they will efficiently utilize the material. Select the objects you want to
nest, and then click on the Nest icon. This will activate a dialog for specifying gap and
allowable rotation angles. Click OK, and the objects will be nested on the plate. This icon
is also used to activate a toolbar that contains two additional methods of nesting, Dynamic
Nesting and Multiple Nesting.

Toolbars and Command Icons Page 31

Toolpaths Toolbar

Edit Toolpath Plan – This icon activates the Plan dialog that allows you to edit
the Plan associated with the selected toolpath groups. The Plan represents the
strategies applied to a toolpath group.
Routing Offset – The Routing Offset command is used to offset, or
compensate, for the engraving or routing tool. This will make sure no matter
what size tool you use the parts will be the correct size. You can also use this
command to create inlayed objects. Click and hold to open the flyout menu.
Hatch Fill – The Hatch Fill command is used to generate a series of toolpaths
to remove an area or section of material
Island Fill – The Island Fill option is a series of inlines (lines and arcs) that are
generated until the selected contours are filled.
Drill - The drill functions provide tools for adding drill objects to the design. Drill
objects are a special type of toolpath group that define drill points that can either
be created on their own, or be created based on selected contours. Drill points
can be created in patterns such as arrays, around a circle, and along a path.
Multiple tools can be specified for any drill point.
Slot – The Slot command is used to create a single line that the router will cut.

Engrave – The Engrave command is used to generate a machine path on the

original contour to be engraved or to generate a 3D path without a fill.
Pyramid – This type of toolpath strategy is used to create a positive bevel on
the selected set of contours using a conic-shaped tool. It can also include a
roughing pass to ensure that the pyramid tool will be able to complete its cuts,
and an offset toolpath to cut the pieces out after the beveled tool has completed
its work. This method is popular for making lettering and artwork that is
commonly referred to as beveled, chiseled, sculpted, or prismatic.
Delete Toolpath – This command allows the user to delete toolpaths that have
been applied to selected objects.

Page 32 Toolbars and Command Icons

Contour Editing Toolbar

Edit Points - This tool provides access to a number of editing functions. You can move,
insert, and delete points, open and close contours, change segments to arcs, curves and
lines. After selecting the tool and clicking on a contour, right click to make these functions
available.
Extend/Trim - The Extend tool is used to extend an open contour either interactively, by a
specific distance, or to intersection with another contour segment. If you click and hold
this button, a flyout menu will open. From there you can access the Trim tool.
Fillet Corners – This tool provides a method to insert rounded corners, or fillets, at
selected corners in a contour.
Join Contours - This tool allows you to connect open contours at their endpoints either
into an open or closed contour.
Offset Contours - This tool opens a dialog that allows you to enter parameters to offset a
closed or an open contour.
Multicopy – This tool opens a dialog which allows you to produce multicopies of an object
in three different ways.
Vectorize Bitmap - This powerful tool is used to create a series of closed vector contours
from a bitmap image. In order to create toolpaths in EnRoute, it is necessary for the
artwork to be represented by vectors. This tool provides the means of converting scanned
images or other bitmap images into vectors so that they may be used to create toolpaths.
Cleanup Contours - When bitmap images are vectorized, the vectors often require some
degree of „cleaning up‟ in order for them to be appropriate to toolpath. This tool provides
an automated means of cleaning up contours, by reducing the number of curve segments
to create smooth contours that will then create better toolpaths.

Construction Toolbar

Draw Polyarc – This tool is used to create a series of connected line or arc
segments that can either be open or closed. Click and hold to activate a flyout
toolbar that contains a number of other line drawing tools.
Draw Rectangle – This tool will open the Precision Toolbar for the rectangle.
Rectangles can be precisely or interactively created.

Toolbars and Command Icons Page 33

 Draw Circle – This icon activates the Precision Toolbar for the circle. Several
tools are available to interactively or precisely create a circle.
Draw Ellipse – This tool will open the Precision Toolbar for the ellipse. Create
an ellipse interactively or precisely.
Draw Arc – This tool activates the Precision Toolbar that provides other arc
construction options.
Draw Polygon – This button activates a dialog for defining the parameters for
placing polygon shapes

Text – This tool opens a Precision Toolbar. Any True

Type® font that is installed on your computer is available to be
used. The toolbar allows for many options in placing and editing
the text to create the desired effects.

Create Dimensions – Click and hold to open a set of dimension tools to be used
to measure and record in the drawing.

3D Surfaces Toolbar

Create Relief - This icon opens a dialog that enables several options to create a relief for
the selected contours.
Edit Selected Relief – This icon opens a dialog that provides several relief editing tools
that allow the user to interactively edit a selected relief.
Textures – Click and hold this icon to open a flyout menu containing several different
textures that can be edited and applied to a relief.
Extrusions - This icon activates a toolbar that provides additional options in creating
reliefs. These tools use revolutions and extrusions to create meshed objects and modify
selected relief surfaces.
Chamfer - This icon activates a toolbar allowing the selection of different chamfering
tools. The Chamfer tools allow you to modify reliefs by applying profiles that can range
anywhere from a simple rounded edge all the way to an intricate profile that changes the
whole relief.
Apply Mesh - This icon activates a dialog designed for the application of 3D meshes to
reliefs. Meshes are made up of triangles of varying sizes that define their surface.
Apply Bitmap - This icon enables a dialog used to apply bitmap images as a method for
modifying relief surfaces. The application method defines how the bitmap will be applied
to the relief surface.
Merge Reliefs - This tool allows you to merge one or more reliefs with a base relief. This
allows you to create portions of a relief separately and then merge them together to
create the final surface.

Page 34 Toolbars and Command Icons

 Modify Relief – Click and hold this icon to activate a toolbar that provides tool options
that allow you to modify reliefs to fit the needs of your design.
Align Reliefs - This icon can be used to activate a toolbar that presents a number of
different options for aligning the reliefs in a selection. The first icon is used to align all
reliefs to the bottom of the plate. The additional icons in this toolbar provide other
alignment options.
Create Primitive Objects - The Primitives tool is used to create a range of basic 3D
mesh shapes. These shapes can be used to build more complex shapes, or they can be
used as design elements in your relief.
Rendered View - This icon activates a rendered view of the selected relief.

Delete Relief - Deletes the selected relief.

Snaps Toolbar

Snap to grid – Snaps to the nearest grid point. The grid spacing is configured on the Grid
page in Preferences.

Snap to guideline – Snaps to a nearby guideline when the cursor gets close. Also when
dragging an object, the perimeter of the object snaps to nearby guidelines.
Snap to intersection – Snaps to the intersection of two line segments.

Snap to endpoint – Snaps to the endpoints of arc, curve and sine segments.

Snap to nearby contour – Snaps to the nearest point on a contour when the cursor gets
close to it.
Snap to center of arc – Snaps to the center of an arc segment when the cursor is placed
near the arc.
Snap to midpoint – Snaps to the midpoint of a segment when the cursor gets close to it.

Snap to perpendicular point – When constructing line segments, after defining the first
point in the segment, the second endpoint will snap to a point on a contour so that the line
segment will be perpendicular to the contour.
Snap to tangent point – When constructing line segments, the second endpoint will snap
to a point on an arc so that the new line segment will be tangent to the arc.

Toolbars and Command Icons Page 35

Routing Offset Toolbar

Routing Offset – The Routing Offset command is used to offset, or compensate for, the
engraving or routing tool. This will make sure no matter what size tool you use; the parts
will be the correct size.
Routing Offset Open Contour - This command is similar to the standard routing offset tool
except that it is used for open contours instead of closed contours. This imposes some
limitations on the types of offsets that make sense with an open contour.

Drill Toolbar

Drill Point - The Drill Point command is used to create a single hole or pierce point.

Drill Circle - The Drill Circle command is used to create a pattern of drill points around the
radius of a circle.
Drill Array - The Drill Matrix command is used to create a series of drill points by rows and
columns to form a grid.
Drill Center of Objects -The Drill Centers command is used to place a drill point in the
center of the selected contours.
Drill Along Contour - The Drill Contours command is used to create a series of drill points
along a contour.
Drill Corners of Plate - The Drill Corners command is used to create a pattern of drill
points around a Plate. You must have defined a plate before you can use this command.

Alignment Toolbar

Align Bottom – Use this command to align the bottom of objects that have been selected.

Align Top – Use this command to align the top of objects that have been selected.

Align Centers Vertical - Use this command to align the vertical centers of selected objects.

Page 36 Toolbars and Command Icons

 Align Centers Horizontal – Use this command to align the horizontal centers of selected
objects.
Align Left – Use this command to align selected objects to the left side.

Align Right – Use this command to align selected objects to the right side.

Weld Toolbar

Weld Joined – This is the most commonly used method for welding objects.
It works by combining overlapping objects into one object by creating a new
object that is defined by the outer perimeter of the overlapping objects.
Weld Common – This tool is used to define a new object based on overlapping
contours. The new contour is defined by the perimeter of the overlapping
portion of the contours.
Weld Subtract – Weld Subtract subtracts from the object that was selected
first, using all subsequently selected objects.
Jigsaw Weld - This is a design tool used to create a shape in which both open
and closed contours may be used in the creation process. It is an interactive
tool. By moving the cursor into different areas on the screen, EnRoute looks for
closed shapes that can be formed by overlapping contours.
Cut by Line – The Cut by Line tool allows the user to “cut” an object with a line
drawn across it to make two separate objects.

Extrusions Toolbar

Revolve to create surface - The Revolve tool allows you to use one or more contours to
revolve around an axis to either modify a relief or to create a new mesh object.
Spin Contours - With the Spin tool the selected contours are spun around the Z-axis,
located at a center of rotation that is defined by the user.
Extrude Contours - The Extrude tool provides a means to extrude a profile along a path
to either modify a relief or create a mesh object.
Sweep Two Rails - The Sweep Two Rails tool provides another method of using profile
contours to either modify an existing relief or create a new mesh surface.

Toolbars and Command Icons Page 37

Chamfer Toolbar

Chamfer Relief - The Standard Chamfer works by first adding a height to a relief that is
equal to the height of the profile, and then removing material around the perimeter of the
relief in the shape of the profile.
Chamfer Centerline - The Chamfer Centerline tool creates a chamfered surface using a
profile where the profile size is modified so that it extends to the centerline of the shape.
Baroque Chamfer - This tool allows the user to simulate the effects of a traditional hand-
carved surface. It automatically determines convex and concave sections of the artwork
and then applies different profiles to these sections with smooth transitions between them.

Align Reliefs Toolbar

Align all reliefs to bottom of plate - Aligns each of the selected reliefs to the bottom
of the plate.
Align selected reliefs to bottom of plate - Aligns the selection to the bottom of the
plate. The relative position of the reliefs in the selection doesn‟t change.
Align all reliefs to top of plate - Aligns each of the selected reliefs to the top of the
plate.
Align selected relief to top of plate - Aligns the selection to the top of the plate. The
relative position of the reliefs in the selection doesn‟t change.
Align all reliefs to center of plate - Aligns each of the selected reliefs to the middle of
the plate.
Align selected reliefs to center of plate - Aligns the selection to the middle of the
plate. The relative position of the reliefs in the selection doesn‟t change.

Page 38 Toolbars and Command Icons

Modify Relief Toolbar

Smooth Relief - This tool allows you to be able to soften, or smooth, the relief either to
make it more attractive or to make it so that it will machine better.
Invert Relief - This is a simple way to convert a 'positive‟ relief to a „negative‟ relief.

Fit Relief to Plate - This tool will automatically position and scale a relief so that it fits
vertically within the defined plate in your active drawing.
Apply Draft angle to Relief - This function allows you to add a draft angle to your relief.

Create a Mesh surface from Relief - This tool allows for the creation of a mesh surface
from a relief.

Dimension Toolbar

Single Dimension – This tool allows you to determine the dimension between two
selected points.
Angle Dimension – This tool allows you to determine the angle of two selected points.

Radius Dimension – This tool allows you to determine the radius of a selected circle.

Diameter Dimension – This tool will determine the diameter of a selected contour.

Leader Dimension – This tool allows you to place a leader arrow in the selected
location of the drawing.

Toolbars and Command Icons Page 39

Relief Toolbar

Merge Reliefs – This tool is used to merge one relief to another.

Combine Selected Reliefs – This tool will combine two or more selected reliefs.

Extract a slice from a relief – This tool allows for a section of the relief to be extracted
from the relief.

Nest Toolbar

Nest– This tool is used to automatically nest the objects on the plate according to
selected parameters.
Dynamic Nest – This tool allows the user to specifically place the objects on the plate.

MultiNest – This tool will nest a specified number of objects according to the
parameters entered in the precision toolbar.

Scale Toolbar

Scale – This tool is use to interactively scale an object.

Distort – This tool lets you stretch an object disproportionately.

Page 40 Toolbars and Command Icons

Fill Toolbar

Island Fill – This tool is used to create Island Fill toolpaths.

Spiral Fill – This tool is used to create toolpaths in a spiral pattern.

Draw Lines Toolbar

Draw Line – This tool is used to draw a line between two specific points.

Draw Polyarc - The new Polyarc tool allows you to construct a series of lines and arcs
to form a new contour.

Draw Bezier Curve – This tool allows you to draw precisely curved lines.

Extend/Trim Toolbar

Extend Contour –This tool is used to extend an open contour either

interactively, by a specific distance, or to and intersection with another
contour segment.
Trim Contour – This tool allows you to shorten a contour either interactively,
by a specific distance, or based on intersections with boundary contours.

Edit Contours Toolbar

Edit Points – This tool allows you to manipulate line, curves and points in
contours.
Linearize Curve Section - This tool allows you to edit a contour to define
line segments between two points.

Toolbars and Command Icons Page 41

 Insert Corner – This tool allows you to interactively place a corner in an
existing contour.
Smooth Approximation Tool – This tool allows you to interactively edit a
contour to smooth the segment between two selected points.

Offset Toolbar

Offset Closed Contour – This tool allows you to define one or more offsets
to a selected closed contour.
Offset Open Contour – This tool allows you to create offsets for selected
open contours.

Text Toolbar

Create New Text Objects – This tool is used to interactively create text objects.

Edit Existing Text Objects – Use this tool to edit existing text objects.

Convert Text Objects to Curves – This tool converts the text objects to curves so
that you can then apply toolpaths.

Textures Toolbar

Basic Noise Texture – This texture creates a bumpy surface using just a power
parameter and the scale of the texture.

Brick Texture – This is a simple Bricks and Mortar texture that can be applied to reliefs.

Cellular Texture – Cellular Texture breaks up space into cells or regions.

Page 42 Toolbars and Command Icons

 Flagstone Texture – Flagstone texture simulates a mosaic of stone tiles. The stones
appear to be selected to fit together but have a random grain direction.

Flame Texture – Flames texture simulates the look of flames.

Hammered Texture – This texture can create many different looks of textures.

Hexes Texture – Hexes texture produces a hexagonal or honeycomb pattern.

Marble Texture – Marble texture produces a pattern of veins in the relief.

Mudpot Texture – The Mudpot texture basically looks like the surface of bubbling mud.

MultiCell Texture – The MultiCell texture is related to the cellular texture but with more
control parameters. Cellular texture breaks up space into cells or regions. The point
being evaluated falls into one cell. The texture calculates the distance to the center of
that cell and centers of adjoining cells. Combining these distances gives different effects.
MultiFract Texture – MultiFract texture can be generally described as a roughness
texture. Adjusting the parameters will change the appearance of the texture in a wide
variety of ways.
Terrain Texture – Terrain texture gives options to create the look of the landscape.

Veneer Texture – Veneer texture like the Wood texture simulates the look of wood rings
and grain in the relief. The veneer produces a series of slices through the wood and tiles
them next to each other.

Weave Texture – Weave texture produces a simple basket weave or textile pattern in
the relief.

Wood Texture – Wood texture simulates the look of wood rings and grain in the relief.
The appearance of different species of wood can be simulated by adjusting the various
parameters of the texture.

Toolbars and Command Icons Page 43

Other Command Icons
This section identifies icons from many of the tools in EnRoute. The main intent here is to provide a
listing of EnRoute icons in one place for your review. All of these functions are explained in more
detail, within the context of the EnRoute functions to which they belong.

Add relief – This option is used to create a raised relief.

Apply Mesh to Relief – This tool allows you to apply a mesh object to a relief.

Arc by center and two points – Use this command to define an arc by defining
its center and two endpoints. It is defined interactively; you can either leave it as
an open contour with just the arc, or define it as a closed contour by placing the
cursor either outside or inside the arc as it is constructed.
Arc by point and angle – Define an arc by entering coordinates for the center
and start, and then defining the angle turned by the arc.
Arc by three points – This is a handy interactive tool to define an arc by clicking
on the start point, then clicking on the end point, and then dragging to define an
intermediate point on the curve.
Arc copy – In the Multicopy function, select this parameter to copy around an
arc.
Array copy – Creates multiple copies of an object according to the selected
parameters.
Bevel Relief – This tool is chosen to create a beveled relief.

Bevel Relief Edit Tool – This tool allows editing of a relief using a beveled
shaped tool.
Blending Relief Edit Tool – This tool will blend the surface of the relief within
the parameters specified in the toolbar dialog.
Box – Box shaped mesh found in create primitive objects.

Circle by Center and Point – This tool allows you to enter the coordinates for
both the center and a point on the circle to define the circle.
Circle by Center and Radius – Use this tool to click on a circle center and then
drag to define its size. You can also define the circle by coordinates and
dimension.
Circle by corners – Click and drag to define the corners of a boundary box
around a circle, or define these corners by precision input.
Circle by three points – This is an interactive tool used to define a circle. Click
on the first point then click, hold and drag to define the circle.
Concave polygon – Choose this tool to draw a concave polygon, or star shape.

Page 44 Toolbars and Command Icons

 Cone – Cone shaped mesh found in create primitive objects.

Convex Polygon – Choose this tool to draw a convex polygon.

Corner chamfer – This tool will chamfer the corners of a rectangle. Specific
parameters can be entered to determine the radius and placement of the
rectangle.
Corner fillet – This tool allows you to place a fillet on the corner of a rectangle to
your desired parameters.
Corner reverse fillet – This tool puts a reverse fillet on the corners of a rectangle

Corner square – When this option is chosen, the corners of the rectangle is
square.
Cylinder – Cylinder shaped mesh found in create primitive objects.

Dimension Arrow Height - This parameter determines the height of the arrow.

Dimension Arrow Width– This parameter determines the width of the arrow.

Dimension Decimal position for arc– This parameter sets the number of
decimal positions to be displayed for the arc dimensions.

Dimension Decimal position for Line– This parameter sets the number of
decimal positions to be displayed for the line dimensions.

Dimension Extension line parameter- This parameter sets the distance that the
extension lines start to draw from the start and end points of the dimension.
Dimension parameter Height-This parameter sets the height of the text in the
dimensions tool.
Dimension Text Position above- This sets the position of the text above the
arrow line.
Dimension Text Position Center- This sets the position of the text in the center
of the arrow line.
Dimension Text Position Below- This sets the position of the text under the
arrow line.
Disc – Disc shaped mesh found in create primitive objects.

Dome Relief Edit Tool – This tool is used to edit a relief in a dome shape.

Edit Bridges – The edit bridges tool allows you to edit individual bridges, moving
them and changing their parameters.

Toolbars and Command Icons Page 45

 Edit entry exit – Each cut in a toolpath has its own entry and exit points. Use
this tool to edit the points or type of entry and exit.
Ellipse by dimensions – Enter the coordinates for the center of an ellipse and
then define its height and width along its two axes.
Ellipse from corner to corner – This tool is similar to the circle command of this
same type. Just interactively click and drag on the corners of a boundary
rectangle to define an ellipse.
Explode selected contours – This tool will separate a selected contour into
individual segments.
Faceted mesh to relief – After a mesh is created, it is then added to a relief. If
the faceted option is selected, then the object is applied to the relief surface using
its facets directly.
Flat relief – This tool is chosen to create a flat relief.

Flat Relief Edit Tool – This tool is used to edit a relief using a flat shape.

Horizontal Distance Multicopy – This tool defines the distance horizontally

between the objects when using the Multicopy function.
Horizontal Distance Multicopy - This tool defines the distance horizontally
between objects in Multicopy from the front end of an object to the front end of
the next object
Merge highest relief – This option is used to modify a relief. The new portion of
the relief only modifies the existing relief where it is higher than the existing relief.
Merge lowest relief – This option is similar to the Merge Highest option, except
that a relief is only modified where the new relief is lower than the existing relief.
Merge selection – The Merge Selection tool is used to join open contours
together based on a definable tolerance.
Mesh – Mesh objects are made up of triangles of varying sizes that define their
surface.
Mirror Horizontal – This tool reverses the selected contour so that it becomes its
mirror image horizontally.
Mirror Vertical – This tool reverses the selected contour so that it becomes its
mirror image vertically.
Move Absolute - Absolute move will move the selected object from one point to
another precisely or interactively.
Move Boundary- The Boundary Move tool allows you to move the tool based on
the points of the bounding box for that specific object.
Move Relative- The Relative move will move the select object precisely or
interactively relative to a defined start point and end point.

Page 46 Toolbars and Command Icons

 Move Text - Select this tool to move the location of the selected text up or down.
A positive value will move up; a negative value will move down.
Multiple Fillet – This tool is used to fillet multiple corners of a selected object.

Path copy – In the Multicopy function this will allow you to create multiple copies
along a path specified.
Plane – Plane shaped mesh found in Create Primitive Objects.

Project toolpaths to plane – Use this tool to change the height or angle of
existing toolpaths.
Rectangle by dimensions – Enter the parameters to define a corner of a
rectangle and then specify its size by height and width.
Rectangle corner to corner - Use this tool to define a rectangle by clicking on
one corner and dragging to define to the opposite corner. Hold the shift key
down to keep the rectangle a square.
Replace relief – This option is also used primarily to modify an existing relief.
The applied profile takes the place of the existing relief wherever the new profile
overlaps the existing profile.
Reverse Open Contours – This tool will reverse the direction of the selected
open contour.
Rounded relief – This tool is chosen to create a rounded relief.

Set start point – Use this option in the edit points tool to set the start point of a
contour.
Simulate done – Close the simulation.

Simulate Draw Next Segment – The start of the simulation.

Simulate next tool lift – This will play the simulation until the tool is lifted.

Simulate pause – This will stop the simulation.

Simulate to end of job – This will play the simulation to the end of the job.

Simulate to tool change –This will play the simulation until the tool is finished.

Simulate rewind – In the simulation tool, this is the function to rewind the
simulation to play it again.

Toolbars and Command Icons Page 47

 Single Fillet – This tool is used to interactively place a fillet into a select area of a
contour.

Slant Text - Select this option to change the slant of the characters. A positive
value will cause the letter to lean towards the right, while a negative value will
make the letter lean back or to the left.
Smooth mesh to relief – This option implements a means of smoothing out the
facets of the mesh to provide a smoother finished surface when applying the
mesh to the relief.
Smooth Relief Edit Tool – This tool has a smooth shape to use when editing the
existing relief.
Sphere – Sphere shaped mesh found in create primitive objects.

Subtract relief – This option is used to create a recessed relief.

Text Height- Select this tool to change the height of the text objects

Text position on contour - Select this tool to determine which side of a line or
curve the selected text is to be placed.
Text Spacing - Select this tool to change the spacing between the text objects.
A positive value will increase the spacing; a negative value will decrease the
spacing between characters.
Text Width- Select this tool to change the width of the selected text objects.

Texture Relief Edit Tool – This tool allows the user to edit a relief with a texture
tool.
Torus - Torus shaped mesh found in create primitive objects.

Vertical distance Multicopy – This tool defines the distance vertically between
objects when using the Multicopy tool.
Vertical distance Multicopy – This tool defines the distance vertically between
the objects in Multicopy from the front end of an object to the front end of the next
object.
Reset Parameters – This tool is used to reset the ordering parameters of the
toolpaths using the Preferences.
Save Parameters – This tool will save the current parameters to the preferences.

Measure Tool Angle – This tool will calculate the degree of the angle between
two selected points on a contour, or three selected points not on a contour.
Measure Tool Area – This tool will calculate the area of a closed contour. If you
select more than one contour, it will also add the total area of the selected

Page 48 Toolbars and Command Icons

 objects.
Measure Tool Segment - This tool will measure the distance between two
points. It will continue to add each selected segment to the total.

Toolbars and Command Icons Page 49

4. Working with Files

Creating New Files

Menu: File / New
Toolbar: File / New

Click New. The keyboard shortcut is Ctrl+ N.

EnRoute supports the Multi Document Interface (MDI), which allows you to have more than one
design open at a time.

 If you have the Prompt for Plate option turned ON (see “Setting Preferences”), you will be
asked to define the Plate each time you start a new design.

Defining a Plate
Menu: Machining / Define Plate
Toolbar: Libraries / Redefine the current plate

When a new design is created, the Define Plate dialog opens.

The Define Plate dialog allows you to specify the dimensions of the material on which you are
working, as well as the type of material.
The following options are available:

Working with Files Page 51

User Defined If this option is selected, you can enter the Origin, Width and Height of the material
to be used.
Fit Plate to If this option is selected, a plate will automatically be created with height and width
Design values based on the current design.
Fit Plate to If this option is selected, a plate will be created based on the currently selected
Selection contours.
Width The measurement of the plate along the X-axis.
Height The measurement of the plate along the Y-axis.
Thickness The measurement of the plate along the Z-axis.
X/Y Origin The X/Y Origin is the position of the lower left corner of the plate.
X/Y Margin If a margin is entered, a second, dashed rectangle is created on the inside of the
plate‟s edges. The margin is used to help create the layout. It can be very helpful for
masking out the locations of clamps.
Surface Surface at top of plate tells the program that you have set the surface at the top of
Option the material. If you choose surface at bottom of plate, this means that you will set
the surface at the top of the table (or bottom of the material).
Material Clicking on the Material list box will display the types of materials (wood, metal,
etc.) that are defined. Selecting the Material Library button will allow you to create a
new material type, and the routing speeds associated with that material.
OK Click OK to accept.
Cancel Click Cancel to close this dialog.
Save As Click Save As to save the current parameters as a template. The parameters can
then be reloaded from the library by selecting the template from the Template list.
Remove Click to remove the plate that is currently defined. You will be returned to the layout
window and the plate will be removed.
Material The Material Library may be accessed from this dialog. This allows you to define
Library new material, change information on previously defined material, and save new or
edited information set for specific materials. See “Editing the Material Library” for
details.

Creating a Basic Plate

1. Click the Define Plate icon.

2. Enter the Width (distance along the X axis).
3. Enter the Height (distance along the Y axis).
4. Enter the Thickness of the material.
5. Enter values for Margin and Origin if desired.
6. Choose a Material Type. (This is optional).
7. Check to surface at the top or bottom of plate.

Page 52 Working with Files

 8. Click OK to create the plate.

Using Templates
Templates are used to store frequently used settings. Selecting the template reloads the information
saved in the template.

Saving a Template
1. Enter the desired information in the Define Plate dialog box.
2. Click Save As.
3. Enter the name of this template and click OK.
4. This template will now be added to your plate template library.

Using a Template
1. Click on the Template list and the saved plate templates will be displayed.
2. Select the desired template.

Opening a Design
Menu: File / Open

1. Click Open or Ctrl +O.

2. Select the file format, folder and the file that will be opened.
3. Press Enter or click Open.

Saving a Design
Menu: File / Save

1. From the File menu, select Save or Save as.

2. If you have selected the Save as command or you are saving the document for the first time,
a dialog box is displayed. Enter the name and the location that will be used to save the
document.
3. Click Save.

 The file will be saved in the currently active drive and folder. Be sure that you know where the
file is being saved so that you will be able to locate it the next time you want to open it.

Working with Files Page 53

Closing a Design
Menu: File / Close

1. From the File menu, select Close.

2. If your file has changed since the last time it was saved, a dialog box is displayed asking if
you want to save the current file.
 Click Yes to save the file before closing it.
 Click No to close the file without saving the changes.
 Click Cancel to keep the file open.

Importing a Design
Menu: File / Import.

1. Click Import.
2. Select the file format, folder and the file that will be imported.
3. Press Enter or click Open.

 See the Preference command located in the Setup menu for options regarding the Import
command.

 Bitmap graphics must be converted into contours before they can be used to generate toolpaths.
See “Vectorizing Bitmaps” on for details.

Exporting a Design
Menu: File / Export

The software can export a design to a number of different 2D drawing formats.

 Only the 2D design will be exported. Toolpaths will not be exported, and the software cannot
export a 3D model of a finished piece.

1. Click Export.
2. Select the file format, folder and the file name.
3. Type the name of the file to be exported in the File Name box.
4. Select the directory and drive you want the file exported to.
5. Press Enter or click Save.

Page 54 Working with Files

Printing
Menu: File / Print
Use the Print command to print the active design.

1. Click Print. This will open the Print dialog.

2. Select the type of print option.

Design Select this option to send all the contours that exist in
the current layout to the printer.
Selection Select this option to send only the selected contours to
the printer.
Window Select this option to send the layout window to the
printer. Exactly what is displayed on screen is what is
sent to the printer.
Plate Select this option to pint only the plate.

3. Click OK.

Setup
Click the setup button to open the print setup dialog.

Calculator
Menu: File / Calculator

If you find the need for a calculator, EnRoute provides quick access to the Windows calculator with a

simple click on the calculator icon.

Working with Files Page 55

Snapshot
Menu: File / Snapshot

EnRoute has the ability to take a snapshot of the active view.

1. Click on the Snapshot icon.

2. Select the file type and location that you wish to save the file.
3. Click the Save button.
The file format types that are available are listed here:
 AI
 DXF
 Flexi 5.8
 HPGL
 CasMate
 Stereolithograph
 JPEG Image

Measure
Menu: File / Measure
The Measure tool allows you to easily calculate angles, segments and area of an object.

Segment Length - This tool will measure the distance between two points. It will
continue to add each selected segment to the total.
Angle Measure Tool - This tool will calculate the degree of the angle between two
selected points on a contour, or three selected points not on a contour.
Area Measure Tool - This tool will calculate the area of a closed contour. If you
select more than one contour, it will also add the total area of the selected objects.

Page 56 Working with Files

 1. Click on the Measure tool to activate the Precision Toolbar.
2. Select the icon for measurement type: Segment, Angle or Area.
3. Using the snap tools will help you to easily select specific points in order to get accurate
measurements.
4. The Precision Toolbar displays the information for the function that you are performing. In
addition, temporary dimensions are displayed showing the measurement.
5. Right click in order to reset the measurement value. If you click for measurements without
resetting, the new measurements will continue to be displayed. Right click any time to reset
and clear the displayed measurements.
6. Changing from a length measurement to an angle measurement also resets the display.

Working with Files Page 57

Page 58 Working with Files
5. Creating Contours
A selection of drawing tools is provided to allow you to create your design elements. Design
elements may be created interactively by clicking and dragging, or they may be created precisely by
entering desired values in the Precision Toolbars.

Line, Polyarc or Bezier Curve

Drawing a Line
Menu: Draw / Draw Line
Toolbar: Construction / Draw Polyarc / Draw Line

The Line tool draws a straight line segment connecting two points.

1. Click and hold Polyarc then select Draw line.

2. Click at the desired starting point then move the cursor to where you want the line to end and
then click again.

 Hold the SHIFT key down while drawing to force the tool to create only horizontal and vertical
lines.
You can also press the F2 key to enter each starting and ending point‟s coordinates into the
Precision Input Center. Enter each point‟s coordinates into the X, Y and Z fields and click OK.

Polyarc
Menu: Draw / Draw Line
Toolbar: Construction / Draw Polyarc / Draw Polyarc

The new Polyarc tool allows you to construct a series of lines and arcs to form a new contour.
Although it is always possible to construct lines and arcs as separate entities and then join them
together to form a contour, this tool allows you to accomplish both tasks together.
After activating the Polyarc command, the Precision Toolbar is activated, allowing you to choose
between line and arc mode. The following table defines the buttons in the Precision Toolbar that
present the available options for constructing lines and arcs.

Line - This toggles the segment creation mode to the line mode

Arc - This toggles the segment creation mode to the arc mode

Position - This allows you to define a position for either the start of a segment or the
end of the active segment.

Creating Contours Page 59

 Direction – This allows you to define a direction for either the line or arc you are
creating. If you are defining a line, the direction is the direction of the line. If you are
defining an arc, the direction is the direction of the tangent to the arc relative to the
previous segment. If it is the first segment, then the direction is relative to a line to
the right.
Arc Center – This is only available in arc mode and is the center of the arc you are
creating.
Radius – This is the length of the radius of the arc you are creating.

Sweep Angle – This is the sweep angle of the arc you are creating.

As you use the tool, you see that only the options that are possible based on where you are in the
command are available at any given time. If you are in line mode then the arc parameters are
disabled.
The idea with this tool is to construct segments, one at a time, and to use the method that fits the
information you have available. Construction of the segments can be done either interactively or by
entering values into the available edit boxes in the Precision Toolbar. This tool was designed to be
used exclusively in the top view because you are creating arcs, and EnRoute expects arcs to be
planar in the x-y plane.
Constructing a Line Segment – following are the simple steps required to create a line segment.

Activate the Line Mode

If this segment is the first segment in you Polyarc contour, then either snap/click to
the correct location in the drawing or define the correct x- and y-coordinates in the
toolbar in order to start the segment.
Then define the next position for the endpoint of the line.

The other option for the endpoint of the line is to switch to the direction mode and
then define an angle and distance in order to complete the line segment.
You are now ready for the next segment.

Constructing an Arc Segment – following are the steps required to create an arc segment. With an
arc segment, EnRoute is trying to get enough information to define the arc. As soon as enough
information has been defined then the arc is created. You can use many different combinations of
information – start point, direction, radius, center point, sweep angle, and end point – to define the
arc. The key is to remember that you are always trying to define enough parameters to allow the arc
to be finalized.

The following examples demonstrate how arcs can be constructed in different ways.

Page 60 Creating Contours

 Example 1

Activate the Arc Mode

If this segment is the first segment in you Polyarc contour, then either snap/click to
the correct location in the drawing or define the correct x- and y-coordinates in the
toolbar in order to start the segment.
Then define the next position for the endpoint of the arc. The endpoint allows the arc
to be constructed because the arc is assumed to be tangent to the previous
segment. If it‟s the first segment then the tangent is assumed to be 0 degrees. With
the endpoint and the tangent known, the rest of the arc parameters can be calculated
and the arc constructed.
You are now ready for the next segment.

Example 2

Activate the Arc Mode if necessary

If this segment is the first segment in you Polyarc contour, then either snap/click to
the correct location in the drawing or define the correct x- and y-coordinates in the
toolbar in order to start the segment.
Now switch to direction. You can now either define the direction by clicking on a
point or by defining the direction in the edit box.
The position mode is activated, so just click on a point or define its coordinates in
order to complete the arc.
You are now ready for the next segment.

Example 3

Activate the Arc Mode if necessary

If this segment is the first segment in you Polyarc contour, then either snap/click to
the correct location in the drawing or define the correct x- and y-coordinates in the
toolbar in order to start the segment.
Now switch to center point. You can now either define the center of the arc either by
clicking on a point or by defining the point in the edit boxes.
Now you just need to define either the endpoint of the arc or the sweep angle in
order to complete this segment. Choose the preferred mode and then either enter
Or the information in the toolbar or click on the appropriate point in the drawing. This
will complete the segment.

Creating Contours Page 61

 You are now ready for the next segment.

If you try these examples in your drawing, it demonstrates how arcs can be constructed very
precisely by providing just enough information to construct each segment. When you are
constructing precise parts that are based either on customer specifications, or on a drawing that you
have been provided, this tool allows you to work your way around the part using the information
available for each segment.

Bezier Curve
Menu: Draw / Draw Line
Toolbar: Construction / Draw Polyarc / Draw Bezier Curve

Bezier curves provide a way of drawing precisely curved lines on a computer. Each section of a
Bezier curve is defined by four points: its beginning and end points, and two handle points which
determine the shape of the curve.
Handle Point

End Point
End Point

Handle Point

Normally, a Bezier curve is composed of multiple segments. Each segment can be a curve or a
straight line.

1. Click and hold then click Draw Bezier curve.

2. To place the first point in the curve, do one of the following:
3. Click once without dragging to place the point. This will make the first segment a straight line.
4. Click to place the starting point and drag to create its handle. This will make the first segment
a curve.
5. For all subsequent points in the curve, click to place the point and drag to create its handle. If
you do not drag to create a handle, the next line segment will be a straight line.
6. Right-click to release the tool and end the curve.

Page 62 Creating Contours

 If one of your segments does not come out exactly right, keep going and finish the curve: you
can easily come back and edit the segments later. See “Editing Points on a Curve or Contour”
for details.
You cannot create a Bezier curve using the Precision Input Center. You must create the curves with
the mouse.
Example:
To draw a simple s-curve:

1. Click and hold then click Draw Bezier curve.

2. Click to create the upper right-hand starting point of the curve.

3. Click one grid unit to the left of the first point and drag one
additional point to the left. This sets you up for the creation of the
first curve.

4. Click one grid unit below the second point and drag one unit to the
right.

5. Click one grid unit below the third point and drag one unit to the left.

Creating Contours Page 63

 6. Click one grid unit to the left of the fourth point and right-click to
finish drawing the curve.

Rectangle
Drawing a Rectangle by Corners
Menu: Draw / Rectangle
Toolbar: Construction / Rectangle / Corner to Corner

1. Click the Rectangle Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar. Select the Draw from

Corner to Corner.
2. Click to place the first corner, and then drag the mouse to the location of the opposite corner
and click the mouse again to place the rectangle.
3. If desired, you can continue to create more rectangles. Repeat step 2 to place the rectangles.
4. Right-click to end the rectangle function.

 Hold down the SHIFT key to force the software to draw only squares.
You can also enter each corner‟s coordinates into the X and Y fields and click Apply.

 The Corner icons in the Precision Toolbar allow you to create a rectangle with radiused corners.
Select the style of corner you want and the size of the radius.

Rectangle by Dimensions
Menu: Draw / Rectangle
Toolbar: Construction / Rectangle / By Dimensions

To draw a rectangle by defining a starting point and the height and width of the rectangle:
1. Click the Rectangle Icon. This will bring up the Precision Toolbar. Select Draw by

Dimensions.
2. In the Precision Toolbar, click the reference grid button that corresponds to the corner, side
or center point that will be used to position the rectangle.
3. Enter the X, and Y coordinates for the positioning point.
4. Enter the Height and Width values.
5. To create a rectangle with radiused corners, select the style of corner you want and the size
of the radius.
Page 64 Creating Contours
 6. Click Apply. The rectangle will be placed in the workspace.
7. If desired, you can continue to draw more rectangles. Enter the new values for the rectangles
in the fields as before and click Apply to draw.
8. Right-click to end the rectangle function.

Circle
Drawing a Circle by Center and Radius:
Menu: Draw / Circle
Toolbar: Construction / Circle / By Center and Radius

1. Click the Circle Icon. From the Precision Toolbar select By Center and Radius.
2. Click to place the center point of the circle, then drag to define the length of the radius. Click
the mouse button to complete the circle.
3. If desired, you can continue to create more circles. Repeat step 2.
4. Right-click to end the circle function.
You can also create a circle by entering the data for the center point in the X and Y fields, and then
enter the Radius. Click Apply.

Drawing a Circle by Center and Point

Menu: Draw / Circle
Toolbar: Construction / Circle / By Center and Point

1. Click the Circle Icon. This will bring up the Precision Toolbar. Select Circle by Center and

point.
2. Click to place the center point of the circle, then drag to define the point on its radius. Click
the mouse again to complete the circle.
3. If desired, you can continue to create more circles. Repeat step 2.
4. Right-click to end the circle function.
5. You can also enter the data for the center and the point into the corresponding fields. Click
Apply.

Creating Contours Page 65

Drawing a Circle by Three Points
Menu: Draw / Circle
Toolbar: Construction / Circle / By Three Points

1. Click the Circle Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar. Select By Three Points.
2. Click to place the first point on the circle.
3. Click to place the center point on the circle, then drag to define the third point. Click the
mouse again to complete the circle.
4. If desired, you can continue to create more circles. Repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. Right-click to end the circle function.
You can also enter the date for the points into the corresponding X and Y fields. Click Apply.

Drawing a Circle by Corners

Menu: Draw / Circle
Toolbar: Construction / Circle / Circle by Corners

1. Click the Circle Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar. Select Circle by Corners.
2. Click to place the first corner, then drag to define the opposite corner. Click the mouse again
to complete the circle.
3. If desired, you can continue to create more circles. Repeat step 2.
4. Right-click to end the circle function.
You can also enter the X and Y coordinates for the corners and click Apply.

Drawing an Arc
Drawing an Arc by Center and Two Points
Menu: Draw / Arc
Toolbar: Construction / Arc / By Center and Two Points

1. Click the Arc Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar. Select Arc by Center and Two

Points.
2. Click to define the arc center.
3. Click to define the start point.
4. Click to define the arc endpoint.
5. If desired, you can continue to create more arcs using the same method as the first.
6. Right-click to end the arc function.
You can also enter the data into the X and Y fields for each point and click Apply.

Page 66 Creating Contours

Drawing an Arc by Center, Point and Angle
Menu: Draw / Arc
Toolbar: Construction / Arc / By Center, Point and Angle

1. Click the Arc Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar. Select Arc by Center, Point and

Angle.
2. Click to define the arc center.
3. Click to define the start point.
4. Click or drag to define the angle.
5. If desired, you can continue to create more arcs using the same method as the first.
6. Right-click to end the arc function.
You can also enter the data into the X and Y fields for the points and enter the degree of the angle
and click Apply.

Drawing an Arc by Three Points

Menu: Draw / Arc
Toolbar: Construction / Arc / By Three Points

1. Click the Arc Icon. The Precision Toolbar will open. Select By Three Points.
2. Click to define the start point.
3. Click to define the end point.
4. Click or drag to define a third point along the arc.
5. If desired, you can continue to create more arcs using the same method as the first.
6. Right-click to end the arc function.
You can also enter the data in the X and Y fields for the coordinating points. Click Apply.

Drawing an Ellipse
Drawing an Ellipse by Corners
Menu: Draw / Ellipse
Toolbar: Construction / Ellipse / Corner to Corner

To draw an ellipse by identifying opposite corners of a bounding rectangle:

1. Click the Ellipse Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar. Select Draw from Corner to

Corner.
2. Click to place the first corner, then drag to define the opposite corner. Click the mouse again
to complete the ellipse.
3. If desired, you can continue to create more ellipses. Repeat step 2.

Creating Contours Page 67

 4. Right-click to end the ellipse function.
You can also enter the data into the X and Y fields. Click Apply.

Drawing an Ellipse by Dimensions

Menu: Draw / Ellipse
Toolbar: Construction / Ellipse / Draw by Dimensions

To draw an ellipse by defining a center point and the height and width:

1. Click Ellipse Icon. From the Precision Toolbar select Draw by Dimensions.
2. Click the reference grid button that corresponds to the corner, side or center point that will be
used to position the ellipse.
3. Enter the X, Y and Z coordinates for the positioning point.
4. Enter the Height and Width values.
5. Click Apply. The ellipse will be placed in the workspace.
6. If desired, you can continue to draw more ellipses. Enter the new values for the ellipses in
the fields as before and click Apply to draw.
7. Right-click to end the ellipse function.

Drawing a Polygon
Menu: Draw / Polygon
Toolbar: Construction / Polygon / Convex or Concave

The polygon tool allows you to create multi-sided, closed contours such as pentagons and stars.

1. Click the Polygon Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar.
2. In the Precision Toolbar, select the type of contour you want to create: either a convex

polygon or a concave polygon.

3. Set the number of Points for your convex shape or concave shape.
4. When drawing a convex polygon, simply left click to represent the center of the polygon, drag
the mouse to the outside point and then click to end. At this point, you can now enter the
coordinates for the center point and one outside point as well as the number of corners for
the polygon. Any changes that you make to the coordinates are shown as a preview. Once
you click apply the polygon is placed in the workspace.

Page 68 Creating Contours

 External Radius

Internal Radius

5. If you are creating a concave polygon, set the Internal Radius for the circle that the inner
vertices intersect.
6. Click Apply to draw the polygon.
7. If desired, you can continue to draw more polygons. Enter the new values for the polygons in
the fields as before and click Apply to draw.
8. Right-click to end the polygon function or press Close.

Text
Menu: Draw / Text
Toolbar: Construction / Text

The Text tool allows the user to place text and then edit it to change parameters such as size, font
style and spacing. The user is also able to place text on a curve or an arc.

Text Precision Toolbar

Shown below is the first section of the toolbar.
Font Style Preview of the selected font

This is the second section of the Precision Toolbar.

Creating Contours Page 69

 Select this option to change the height of the selected text objects. The height of
the character is a nominal height not an exact height.
Select this option to change the slant of the characters. A positive value will cause
the letter to lean towards the right, while a negative value will make the letter lean
back or to the left.
Select this tool to change the width of the selected text objects.

Select this tool to change the spacing between the text objects. A positive value
will increase the spacing; a negative value will decrease the spacing between
characters.
Select this tool to move the location of the selected text up or down. A positive
value will move up; a negative value will move down.
Click on the preferred alignment of the text. Align Left, Align Center, or Align Right.

Select this tool to determine which side of a line or curve the selected text is to be
placed.

1. Click the Add Text Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar.
2. Click to place the cursor in the workspace. To place the text on an arc or curve, simply
click on the contour at the point you wish to start your text. The icon may show slanted to the
angle of the arc or curve. Continue with the following steps.
3. Select the text style. A preview of the text is shown the right of the text selection dialog. All
text fonts that are installed in your computer are available to you.
4. You may click the arrows in the height field to adjust the nominal height of the text objects.
The cursor will adjust in size to give you a preview of the size.
5. Type the text.
6. Press Close to exit the Text tool.

Editing Text Objects

1. Select the text objects to edit by left clicking and dragging the edit selection box around the
objects that you wish to edit. Objects can be selected individually or as a group.
2. Make changes to the objects using the tools available to edit the text. A description of the
tools is listed in the above section.

Page 70 Creating Contours

Edit Existing Text Object Tool
Menu: Draw / Text / Edit Existing Text
Toolbar: Construction / Text / Edit Existing Text

1. Click and hold the Text Icon. This will open the flyout menu. Click on the Edit

Existing Text Objects icon.

2. Click on the text to edit.

Green Point Blue Point Red Point

Green Point Click and drag the green point to move the starting point
for the line of text objects.
Blue Point Click and drag the blue points to adjust the spacing
between the letters.
Red Point Click and drag the Red point to equally adjust the
spacing of the text objects for the entire line of text.

This example shows that the Text was moved using the Green start point.

Creating Contours Page 71

Convert Text Objects to Curves
Menu: Draw / Text / Convert Text Objects to Curves
Toolbar: Construction / Text / Convert Text Objects to Curves

In order to toolpath the Text Objects, they must first be converted to curves.
1. Select the Text Objects.

2. Click and hold the Text Icon to activate the flyout menu. Click on the Convert Text

Objects to Curves Icon. The text objects show in a purple color. After the objects
have been converted they will show with the standard color for contours.

Text Object Converted to Curves

Dimensions
Menu: Draw / Dimension
Toolbar: Construction / Dimension

EnRoute contains a variety of dimension tools that you can use to display the measurements of lines
and angles. Using the available snap tools along with the dimension tools makes it easy to establish
the dimensions of an object.

Single Dimension – This tool allows you to determine the dimension between two
selected points.
Angle Dimension – This tool allows you to determine the angle of two selected
contours.
Radius Dimension – This tool allows you to determine the radius of a selected circle.

Diameter Dimension – This tool will determine the diameter of a selected contour.

Leader Dimension – This tool allows you to place a leader arrow in the selected
location of the drawing.

Page 72 Creating Contours

Single Dimension Tool
Menu: Draw / Dimension / Single Dimension
Toolbar: Construction / Dimension / Single Dimension

1. Click on the Single Dimension Icon.

2. Select the first point
3. Select the second point.
4. Drag the mouse to the position you want to place the dimension information.
5. Click to place the dimension.
6. You can then go on to create the next dimension or right click to exit the tool.

Angle Dimension Tool

Menu: Draw / Dimension / Angle Dimension
Toolbar: Construction / Dimension / Angle Dimension

1. Click on the Angle Dimension Icon.

2. Select the first contour.
3. Select the second contour.
4. Drag the mouse to the position you want to place the dimension information.
5. Click to place the dimension.
6. You can then go on to create the next dimension or right click to exit the tool.

Radius Dimension Tool

Menu: Draw / Dimension / Radius Dimension
Toolbar: Construction / Dimension / Radius Dimension

1. Click on the Radius Dimension Icon.

2. Click on the contour.
3. Drag the mouse to the position you want to place the dimension information.
4. Click to place the dimension.
5. You can then go on to create the next dimension or right click to exit the tool.

Creating Contours Page 73

Diameter Dimension Tool
Menu: Draw / Dimension / Diameter Dimension
Toolbar: Construction / Dimension / Diameter Dimension

1. Click on the Diameter Dimension Icon.

2. Click on the contour.
3. Drag the mouse to the position you want to place the dimension information.
4. Click to place the dimension.
5. You can then go on to create the next dimension or right click to exit the tool.

Leader Dimension Tool

Menu: Draw / Dimension / Leader Dimension
Toolbar: Construction / Dimension / Leader Dimension

1. Click on the Leader Dimension Icon.

2. Click on the contour.
3. Drag the mouse to the position you want to place the Leader lines.
4. Click to place the line. Using the Text tool you are able to place the text on this line if you
choose to.
5. You can then go on to create the next dimension or right click to exit the tool.

Page 74 Creating Contours

6. Contour Editing

Editing Points on a Contour

The Edit Points tool allows you to manipulate lines, curves and points in contours.
To edit a contour:

1. From the Draw menu select Edit Points.

2. Select the contour.

 Notice that as you place the cursor over a segment, the cursor indicates whether it is a line, arc
or curve.
Right-clicking on a segment with the mouse opens a shortcut menu listing commands that are
specific to the contour that you are working on

.
Pressing F2 will display the Precision Toolbar, which will allow you to precisely place each point.

Editing a Line Segment

1. From the Draw menu select Edit Points.
2. Select the contour.
3. Click and drag the contour points to move them.
4. To convert a line into an arc, click and drag on the line segment.
5. To convert a line into a curve, right-click on the line and select Convert to curve.

Contour Editing Page 75

Editing a Bezier Curve
1. From the Draw menu select Edit Points.
2. Select the contour.
3. Click and drag the contour points to move them.
4. Click and drag on the handles to change the shape.
5. To convert a curve into a line, right-click on the curve and select Convert to line.

Editing an Arc
1. From the Draw menu select Edit Points.
2. Select the contour.
3. Click and drag the contour points to move them.
4. To change the curve of an arc, click on a point on the arc and drag it in or out.
5. To convert an arc into a line, right-click on the arc and select Convert to line.
6. To convert an arc into a curve, right-click on the arc and select Convert to curve.

Linearize Curve Section

This tool allows you to edit a section of a contour. It will create a line between two points on the
contour, allowing you to eliminate unneeded points quickly.
1. Click and hold the Edit Points Icon. This will open the flyout menu, click on the Linearize

Curve Section Icon.

2. Click to place the first point on the contour.
3. Click to place the second point on the contour.
4. A pink line will appear to show the preview of the segment to be replaced.
5. Press the Enter key to accept the change.

Insert Corner
1. Click and hold the Edit Points Icon. This will open the flyout menu, click on the Insert

Corner icon.
2. Click to place the first point.
3. Click to place the second point. This will show a preview of the new corner in pink. You can
click on the second point and drag it to the desired location. The preview will reflect this
change.
4. Press the Enter key to accept the change.

Page 76 Contour Editing

Smooth Approximation
1. Click and hold the Edit Points Icon. This will open the flyout menu, click on the Smooth

Approximation Tool Icon.

2. Click on the contour to place the first point.
3. Click on the contour to place the second point. This will show a pink preview of the new
segment. At this point you can adjust the new points and use the handles to change the
shape of the new segment.
4. Once you get the new portion of the segment to look the way you want it, press the Enter
key to accept the change.

Extending Contours
Menu: Draw / Extend
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Extend

The Extend tool is used to extend an open contour either interactively, by a specific distance, or to
an intersection with another contour segment. The extension is always in a straight line from the end
of the contour. If the contour is an arc or curve, the extension is a straight line tangent to the end of
the curve or arc.

Extending a Contour Using the Mouse

Menu: Draw / Extend
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Extend / By Graphic

To extend an open contour using the mouse:

1. Click the Extend Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar. The Method – By
Graphic -is selected by default.
2. Click on the end of the contour you want to extend.

 As you move the cursor away from the end of the contour, a preview is provided to show the
amount that the contour will be extended.
3. Move the cursor to the new endpoint and click.
4. After a contour has been extended, you can add another extension to the end of the
extension.
5. Right-click to release the tool or click on the close button.
This option can work well with the Snap options to extend a contour to a specific point.

Contour Editing Page 77

Extending a Contour by a Precise Length
Menu: Draw / Extend
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Extend / Precise Length

1. Click the Extend Lines Icon ; this will open the Precision Toolbar.
2. In the Precision Toolbar select the By Length method and enter the length you want to
extend contours by in the length field.
3. Click on the end of a contour to extend it by the specified amount.

 As you move the cursor over the end of an open contour, a preview of the extension is
displayed.
4. After a contour has been extended, you can add another extension to the end of the
extension.
5. Right-click to release the tool or click on the close button.

Extending a Contour to Boundaries

Menu: Draw / Extend
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Extend / Boundaries

To extend a contour until it intersects with another contour:

1. Click the Extend Lines Icon . This will open the Precision Toolbar.
2. Select the By Boundaries method.
3. Click on the contours you would like to use as boundaries.
4. To select all contours as boundaries, click on the All boundaries button.
5. To clear all selected boundaries, click on the Clear boundaries button.
6. Click on the Extending button.
7. Click on the end of a contour to extend it to its intersection with the nearest boundary
contour.

Page 78 Contour Editing

 As you move the cursor over the end of an open contour, a preview of the extension is
displayed.
1. After a contour has been extended, you can add another extension to the end of the
extension. This extension will go out the other side of the boundary, and proceed to the next
intersection.
2. Right-click to release the tool or click on the close button.
If the Intersection box is checked, contours can be extended to the intersection with a line tangent to
the end of a boundary. If the contour and the boundary are parallel, or if the end of the contour points
away from the end of the boundary, no extension will be created. This can be helpful if you need to
extend two contours so that they meet at their intersection.

Any open contour in the design can be extended. Even if a contour is selected as a boundary
contour, it can still be extended to another boundary contour. This means that you can select all the
contours in your design as boundary contours, and then proceed to identify which contours to extend.

Trimming Contours
Menu: Draw / Trim
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Trim

The Trim tool allows you to shorten a contour either interactively, by a specific distance, or based on
intersections with boundary contours.

Trimming a Contour Using the Mouse

Menu: Draw / Trim
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Extend/Trim / By Graphic

1. Click and hold the Extend/Trim Line Icon then click the Trim Contours Icon.
This will open the Precision Toolbar.
2. Select the By Graphic method.

3. Click on the end of the contour you want to trim.

 As you move the cursor away from the end of the contour, a preview is provided to show the
amount that the contour will be trimmed.
4. Move the cursor to the new endpoint and click.

Contour Editing Page 79

 5. Repeat for as many contours as necessary.
6. Right-click to release the tool or click on the close button.

 This option works with the snap options to trim a contour to a specific point.

Trimming a Contour by a Precise Length

Menu: Draw / Trim
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Extend/Trim / By Length

1. Click and hold the Extend/Trim Line Icon then click the Trim Contours Icon. This
will open the Precision Toolbar.
2. Select By Length method and enter the length you want to trim contours by in the field.

 The length that is trimmed is determined by following the path of the contour from the end
point, not as a radius or some other method.
3. Click on the end of a contour to shorten it by the specified amount.

 As you move the cursor over the end of a contour, a preview is provided to show the
amount that the contour will be trimmed.
4. Repeat for as many contours as necessary.
5. Right-click to release the tool or click on the close button.

Trimming a Contour to Boundaries

Menu: Draw / Trim
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Extend/Trim / By Boundaries

To trim a contour at the points where it intersects with another contour:

1. Click and hold the Extend/Trim Lines Icon then click on the Trim Contours Icon.

2. In the Precision Toolbar, click on the By Boundaries method.

3. Click on the contours you would like to use as boundaries.
4. To select all contours as boundaries, click on the All boundaries button.
5. To clear all selected boundaries, click on the Clear boundaries button.
6. Click on the Trimming button.
Page 80 Contour Editing
 7. Move cursor over the contour to be trimmed. A preview will highlight the part of the contour
that will be trimmed. Left click on the mouse to activate the trim.

 As you move the cursor over the end of an open contour, a preview of the trimmed area is
displayed.
8. Repeat for as many contours as necessary.
9. Right-click to release the tool or click on the close button.

Filleting Contours
Menu: Draw / Fillet
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Fillet

The fillet tool inserts an arc of a defined radius at selected corners of one or more contours.

Fillet Precision Toolbar

Single Fillet The single fillet allows you to select one specific corner to fillet.
Multiple Fillet This allows you to choose to Fillet All corners, Outside corners or Inside corners
all at the same time with the same parameter.
Inside Corners

Contour Editing Page 81

Outside
Corners

All Corners

Radius This is the parameter for the size of the radius for the Fillet or Chamfer.
Chamfer Select this box if you would like to chamfer the corner instead of fillet.
Keep Original When this box is selected, the original will be kept and an open contour segment
will be placed where the fillet was previewed.

Single Fillet
Menu: Draw / Fillet
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Fillet / Single Fillet

1. Click the Fillet Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar.

2. Click the Single Fillet Icon.

3. Select the first segment of the contour.
4. Select the second segment of the contour.
5. Enter in the radius dimension. This will show a preview of the fillet.
6. Click Apply.

Page 82 Contour Editing

Multiple Fillet
Menu: Draw / Fillet
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Fillet / Multiple Fillet

1. Click the Fillet Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar.

2. Click the Multiple Fillet Icon.

3. Select the contour.
4. Choose one of the Corner parameters: All corners, Inside corners, or Outside corners.
5. Enter in the radius dimension. This will show a preview of the fillet.
6. Click Apply.

 Notice that where the fillets overlap, the software automatically makes them tangent with
each other.

Joining Contours
Menu: Draw / Join
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Join

The Join tool allows you to join open contours to create larger contours.

1. Click on the Join Icon.

2. Click on the end point of one of the contours you wish to connect.

 When you put the cursor over the end of a contour, the contour is highlighted.
3. Click on the end point of the second contour that you wish to connect.

 You will notice that EnRoute draws a red preview line between the two contours and
highlights the second contour.

The joined contours are now one large contour.

Contour Editing Page 83

Offset Contours
Menu: Draw / Offset Contours
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Offset Contours

This tool is used to create a contour that is offset from the selected contour.
1. Select the contour.

2. Click the Offset icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar.

3. Enter the number of Offset contours desired.

4. Enter the amount of the offset.
5. Select Outline or Inline.
6. Select Rounded or Square.
7. A preview of the Offset is shown on the screen.
8. Click Apply to accept.

Partial Offset Contours

Menu: Draw / Offset
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Offset Contours / Partial Offset

This tool is used to create a contour that is offset from the selected contour.
1. Select the contour.

2. Click and hold the Offset icon then click the Partial Offset Icon. This will open the
Precision Toolbar.

3. Select the square or the rounded offset icon.

4. Click on the segment or segments that you wish to offset. Hold the shift key to select more
than one segment at a time
5. Enter the amount of the offset.

Page 84 Contour Editing

 6. Click the mouse on the side of the segment that you want the offset to be placed.
7. Press Close to exit the tool.

Merging Selected Open Contours

Menu: Transform / Merge Selection

The Merge Selection tool is used to join open contours together based on a definable tolerance.

 This capability can be very useful if you are using contour information that has been generated
in a different software package. Many CAD programs are oriented toward drafting functions, and
don‟t place an emphasis on closed contours as is necessary in order to create toolpaths. After
importing a file into EnRoute, this tool provides a means of quickly joining separate contours into
closed shapes that are more compatible with toolpath creation.
To join two or more open contours:
1. Select the open contours.

2. From the Transform menu, select Merge selection.

3. Define the Merge Tolerance (the maximum distance endpoints can be separated by and still
be connected).
4. Click OK.

Contour Editing Page 85

Explode Selected Contours
Menu: Transform / Explode Selected Contours
This tool is used to separate a contour into individual segments.
To explode a contour:
1. Select the contour.

2. From the Transform menu, select Explode Selected Contours.

3. This will create individual segments for the contour.

Converting Contours to Arcs

Menu: Transform / Convert Curves to Arcs

The Convert Selection to Arcs tool transforms the contours in the selection, converting the lines and
Bezier curves into arcs.

 When a curve is converted to arcs, one curve may require several arcs, so the number of
segments may increase significantly.

To convert contours into arcs:

1. Select the contours.

2. From the Transform menu, select Convert Selection to Arcs.

Reverse Open Contours

Menu: Transform / Reverse open Contours
This tool reverses the direction of an open contour.
The direction of the contour is indicated by the direction of the arrow head on the contour. To display
this option, go to the Setup Menu, Preferences, View Setup and check the box for Open contour
direction.
To reverse the direction of the contour:
1. Select the contour.

2. From the Transform menu select Reverse open contour.

Page 86 Contour Editing

The example below shows that the arrow of the first line segment was pointed to the right. After it
was selected and reversed, the arrow is showing to direction to the left.

Creating Multiple Copies of a Contour

Array Copy
Menu: Draw / Multicopy
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Multicopy

The Array Copy tool produces multiple copies of the selected contour, ordered into a specified
number of rows and columns with a specified spacing.
For example, if you need to cut out several copies of the same contour, it is a simple task to create
those copies at the desired spacing on the sheet using this tool.

1. Click on the Multicopy Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar.

2. Select Array Copy.

3. In the Precision Toolbar, enter the number of rows and columns of copies desired, and the
space between the rows and columns. A preview of the copies will be shown in pink.

 If you have one or more contours that must be copied so they fill up your whole piece of
material. (For example a 4 x 8 sheet): Simply check the Fill Plate Box. The selected contours
will be copied to fill the entire plate. You do not need to fill in the number of horizontal or vertical
copies. The spacing between the contours is based on the spacing between the rows and
columns that have been defined.
4. Click Apply to place the copies.

Contour Editing Page 87

 This is an example of an array copy to fill the plate, with .10 horizontal spacing and .10 vertical
spacing.

Arc Copy
Menu: Draw / Multicopy
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Multicopy

The Arc Copy tool takes an existing contour or set of contours and creates a series of duplicates
spaced out along the curve of an arc. The arc of copies that is created is defined by the radius and
angle of the arc, the number of copies that are spaced along that angle, and the positioning point that
will be used to position the copies on the arc.

1. Click the Multicopy Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar.

2. Select Arc Copy.

3. Select the object to copy. A preview will show on the screen as you enter information into
each of the parameters in the Precision Toolbar once you have selected the object to copy.
4. Enter the Number of copies that will be spaced along the arc.
5. Enter the Radius of the arc.
6. Enter the Start Angle (in degrees). This represents the point at which the arc begins.
7. Enter the Swept Angle, which defines the portion of a circle (in degrees) that will be used by
the arc. If more than 360 degrees are entered, the arc will loop around.
8. Check Align to Path to rotate the copies along the curve of the arc.

Page 88 Contour Editing

 Aligned Not Aligned

9. Click the reference grid button that corresponds to the corner, side or center point that will be
used to position the contours along the arc.

These are the parameters used in the below example.

Object with Preview of Arc Copy Result of Arc Copy

positioning points

Contour Editing Page 89

The positioning point that is chosen can have a major effect on the appearance of the final
set of copies. The examples below are all copies of the same right triangle, and use
identical parameters apart from the positioning point selected.

Path Copy
Menu: Draw / Multicopy
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Multicopy

The Path Copy tool allows a shape to be copied along another contour by defining the number of
copies, spacing, and how the contours are to be aligned.

1. Click Multicopy. This will open the Precision Toolbar.

2. Select Path Copy.

3. Select the object to copy. Then select a contour for the path by clicking on it. A preview will
show on the screen as you enter information into each of the parameters in the Precision
Toolbar
4. Enter the Number of copies. The spacing will be adjusted accordingly.
5. Enter the Radius of the arc.
6. Enter the Offset Percentage. Use Offset if you want the original contour offset from the
starting point of the path contour. The percentage is based on the spacing.
7. Check Align to Path to rotate the copies to match the direction of the path.
8. Select one of the following copy placement options:

Page 90 Contour Editing

 Hold Enter the number of copies and the spacing will
Number be calculated to keep them evenly spaced.
Hold Enter the desired spacing and the program will
Spacing calculate how many copies will fit in the path.
All Corners Copies will be placed at both inside and outside
corners along the path.
Inside Copies will be placed only at inside corners on the
Corners path.
Outside Copies will be placed only at the outside corners
Corners on the path.
9. Click the reference grid button that corresponds to the corner, side or center point that will be
used to position the contours along the arc.
10. Click the reference grid button that corresponds to the corner, side or center point that will be
used to position the contours along the arc.
11. Click Apply.

 The example below shows how to create a gear shape by first drawing a circle and a rectangle,
and then copying the rectangle around the circle. The Weld Joined command is used to combine
the shapes.

Contour Editing Page 91

Vectorizing Bitmaps
Menu: Draw / Vectorize Bitmap
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Vectorize Bitmap

Since the software uses vector-based contours to create toolpaths, any bitmap artwork you may want
to use in your design must first be converted into a vector form. This technique is called vectorization.
The Vectorize Bitmap tool allows you to trace bitmap art and convert it into contours.

 Before vectorizing a bitmap, you should clean up the bitmap as much as possible using a bitmap
editor. Remove specking and unwanted detail. Make sure that contours you want to turn into
closed contours are completely closed in the bitmap. If possible, convert the image to a
grayscale or black and white image.
1. Import the bitmap into your design and select it.

 For information on importing a bitmap or other graphic, see “Importing a Design“.

2. Select Vectorize bitmap.

In the Vectorize dialog, select the Bezier, Enhanced corners, or Enhanced curves option.
 The Bezier option emphasizes using Bezier curves as it completes the vectorization
process.
 The Enhanced Corners option emphasizes creating a contour with distinct sharp corners. It
also provides a number of additional parameters that affect the vectorization process.
 The Enhanced Curves option emphasizes using arcs to provide a best fit of the vectors to
the original artwork.
3. Check the Auto cleanup box if you want the software to attempt to automatically simplify the
contours it creates. Set Tolerance to the size of the smallest features on the bitmap that you
want the software to keep. See “Cleaning Up Contours” for details.

Page 92 Contour Editing

Cleaning Up Contours
Menu: Draw / Cleanup
Toolbar: Contour Editing / Cleanup selected contours

The Cleanup tool automatically simplifies the selected contours so that they use fewer segments to
achieve the same effect. This makes it easier for the software to create toolpaths, and reduces the
chances for the toolpath creation process to fail because of some odd configuration in the geometry.

304 Segments 65 Segments

1. Select the contour.

2. Select Cleanup.
3. Set Tolerance to the size in inches of the smallest features you want the software to keep.
4. Higher Tolerance settings will cause the contour to be simplified more, but they will also
change the appearance of the contour more.
5. Click OK.

Contour Editing Page 93

Page 94 Contour Editing
7. Arranging Contours

Selecting Contours
To select a contour, click on its edge.
You can also select multiple contours using one of the following methods:
 Hold down the SHIFT key and click on the contours one after the other.
 Click and drag to draw a selection box around the contours.
 From the Edit menu, select Select All to select all contours in the current design.

Automatic Sorting for Open Curves, Containers and Holes

Whenever one or more contours are selected, the software automatically checks to see whether the
contours are open curves, containers or holes.
By default, all closed curves are classified as containers.
If a closed contour is completely contained within another closed contour, the outside contour is
identified as a container, and the inside contour is identified as a hole in that container. The contour
of the hole forms an inner edge to the container contour.
The following illustration shows two contours being selected, converted to a container and hole, and
being filled with a Hatch Fill toolpath.

By default, open curves are color-coded purple, containers are color-coded blue, and holes are color-
coded red.

Cutting, Copying and Pasting Contours

Menu: Edit / Cut or Paste
Toolbar: File / Cut or Paste

To cut and paste contours:

1. Select the contours to cut.

2. From the Edit menu choose Cut or press Ctrl+X.

3. Select the design where the contours are to be pasted.

4. From the Edit menu choose Paste or press Ctrl+V.

Arranging Contours Page 95

 When there is more than one design window open, use the Cut and Paste commands to remove
a group from one design and place it in another. You can continue to paste the cut selection until
something else is placed onto the Clipboard.

Copying and Pasting

Menu: Edit / Copy or Paste
Toolbar: File / Copy or Paste

1. Select the contours to copy.

2. From the Edit menu select Copy or press Ctrl+C.

3. If the copied image is to be pasted into a different design, select the design where the
contours are to be pasted.

4. From the Edit menu select Paste or press Ctrl+V.

 When pasting into the same design, the copied image will be placed in the same place as the
original. Move the original image to the new location before pasting.

 If you want to make a copy within the same design, press the CTRL key, click on the center
control box and drag a copy to a new location.

Pasting from Other Programs

See the Preference command located in the Setup menu for options regarding Merge Contours and
Automatic Cleanup.

Deleting Contours
Menu: Edit / Delete
Toolbar: File / Delete

1. Select the contours.

2. From the Edit menu, select Delete.

 You may also select the contours to be deleted and press the Delete key instead of selecting the
Delete command.

Page 96 Arranging Contours

Grouping and Ungrouping Contours
Menu: Transform / Group or Ungroup
Toolbar: Object Edit / Group or Ungroup

Grouping contours together allows you to select and manipulate a group of contours as a single
contour. After grouping contours together, you can also Ungroup them to return them to their original
state. This tool is used mainly as a convenience when you are working on intricate designs.
1. After creating a number of
contours, select them.

 Notice that the contours are

automatically sorted when
they are selected.

2. Click on the Group Icon.

 After selecting the contours you

want to group you can press
Ctrl+G to group them.
Now, when you change the size of the
group, or move it around, it will be
treated as a single object.
If you select any part of the group to
work with, you will be selecting the
entire group. You can use the control
points, or handles, to scale the entire
group as a unit.

 To separate the group into its

component contours, simply
select the group and click on the
Ungroup Icon, or press Ctrl+U.

Arranging Contours Page 97

Move Objects
Menu: Transform / Move
Toolbar: Object Edit / Move

The move tool allows for the precise placement of objects. The Precision Toolbar has several
parameters which will help to locate objects interactively or precisely.

Move Precision Toolbar

Absolute Move Absolute move will move the selected object from one point to another precisely
or interactively.
Relative Move The Relative move will move the select object precisely or interactively relative
to a defined start point and end point.
Boundary Move The Boundary Move tool allows you to move the tool based on the points of the
bounding box for that specific object.
Copy If you check this box, a copy will be made to be moved to the defined location.
Your original will stay intact.
Start Points The coordinates for the start point of the move.
End Points The coordinates for the end point of the move.
Reference Grid The reference grid refers to the bounding box points of a selected object.

Move Absolute
Menu: Transform / Move
Toolbar: Object Edit / Move
The move absolute tool allows you to interactively or precisely move an object. When used with the
snap features, this tool makes placing objects easy.

1. Click the Move Icon or Ctrl + F4. This will open the Precision Toolbar.
2. Select the object to be moved.

3. Select the Move Absolute Icon.

In the following example:

 The Snap to Endpoint tool is on.
 The copy box is checked.
4. Snap to the lower left endpoint of the E and left click on the

Page 98 Arranging Contours

 mouse.
5. Move the mouse to snap to the end point at the top of the
square. Left click to place the copy of the E.

6. Right click to release the tool allowing you to choose another object to move.
7. Right click again or click on the close button to exit the tool.

 You can also precisely define the position of the object by entering the coordinates in the End
parameters boxes.

Move Relative
Menu: Transform / Move
Toolbar: Object Edit / Move
The move relative tool allows you to interactively or precisely move an object relative to another
defined point. When used with the snap features, this tool makes placing objects easy.

1. Click the Move Icon or Ctrl +F4. This will open the Precision Toolbar.
2. Select the object to be moved.

3. Select the Move Relative Icon.

In the following example:

 The Snap to Endpoint tool is on.
 The copy box is checked.
 A line has been defined as the length of the move.
4. Snap to the left endpoint of the line and left click on the
mouse.
5. Move the mouse to snap to the end point at the right side of
the line. Left click to place the copy of the E. This will move
the object the exact length of the line.

Arranging Contours Page 99

 6. Right click to release the tool allowing you to choose another object to move.
7. Right click again or click on the close button to exit the tool.

 You can also precisely define the position of the object by entering the coordinates in the End
parameters boxes.

Boundary Move
Menu: Transform / Move
Toolbar: Object Edit / Move
The boundary move tool is a nice tool to use when placing a relief into the plate.

1. Click Move or Ctrl +F4. This will open the Precision Toolbar.
2. Select the object to be moved.

3. Select the Boundary Move Icon.

4. Change to the front view.

a) Click on the positioning point that you want to use as the reference to place the object.
By selecting the center top point you can see the current coordinates of that point of the
object selected.
b) Enter the new coordinates in the location fields. In this example, the Z parameter is
changed to 0. Click the tab key.

Page 100 Arranging Contours

 c) The object has been moved so that the center top positioning point is located at 0.
5. Click Apply to move the object.
6. Click on the Close button to exit the tool.

 You can also precisely define the position of the object by entering the coordinates in the End
parameters boxes.

Rotating Contours
Menu: Transform / Rotate
Toolbar: Object Edit / Rotate
The Rotate tool allows you to either interactively or precisely rotate the selected contours. When you
activate the Rotate tool, the Precision Toolbar will open allowing you to enter parameters to
precisely rotate the selected object.

Axis – Choose the axis in which you want to rotate the object.
Top view shows the Z axis
Front view shows the Y axis
Right view shows the X axis.
Center – Enter the coordinates to precisely locate the rotation point.
Angle – Enter the degree to which you would like to rotate the object.
Reference Grid – Click the reference grid button that corresponds to the corner, side or center point
that will be used to locate the rotation point.

To rotate an object:
1. Select the contour or contours to be rotated.

Arranging Contours Page 101

 2. Click Rotate or Ctrl +F3. The Precision Toolbar will open allowing you to click and
drag to define the rotation angle, or you may choose to precisely rotate the object by entering
the date in the parameters.

Handles

Center of
Rotation point

3. The default axis is the Z axis. If you choose to rotate in a different axis check the correct
parameter box.
4. Drag the center of rotation to the point around which you want the selection to rotate. You
can precisely locate the rotation point by entering the coordinates in the X, Y, and Z

parameters, or use the reference grid to select the location of the rotation point.
5. Left click and drag any of the handles located on the corners and sides of the selection box
to rotate the selection, or click on the contour and drag it to the desired position. Left click
again to place the object. You may also enter the angle in degrees in the angle parameter
box. Click Apply to place the object.
6. Right-click to release the object. At this point you may select another object to rotate or right
click again to exit the rotate tool.
7. Start rotating the object and then hold down the Shift key to force the rotation angle to
change in 15-degree increments.

Scaling Contours
Menu: Transform / Scale
Toolbar: Object Edit / Scale
This tool allows you to change the size of the selected contours.
1. Select the contours.

2. Click the Scale Icon or Ctrl +F2. This will open the Precision Toolbar.
3. Enter either the new dimensions for your selection, or the percentage by which you want
each axis scaled.
4. Click OK.

Page 102 Arranging Contours

 If the Proportional item is checked, any changes to the dimensions or scale factor will be
applied while keeping the original proportions of the contour the same.
Contours may also be scaled interactively by clicking and dragging on one of the external selection
handles.

 Hold down the Shift key to force the scaling to be done proportionately.

Distort Contours
Menu: Transform / Scale
Toolbar: Object Edit / Scale / Distort
The Distort tool allows you to stretch an object disproportionately.
1. Select the contour.

2. Click and hold the Scale Icon then click the Distort Tool.
3. Click on one of the external selection handles and drag the mouse to the desired position.
4. Press Enter to accept the change.
5. Right Click to end the tool.

External
Selection
Handle

Arranging Contours Page 103

Mirroring a Contour
Menu: Transform / Mirror
Toolbar: Object Edit / Mirror
This tool reverses the selected contour so that it becomes its mirror image. This can be done
interactively by defining the axis around which to create the mirror, or simply clicking on the
horizontal or vertical tools. You can choose to create a copy of the object as well.

Mirror Interactively

1. Click the Mirror Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar.

2. Select the object or objects that you wish to mirror.

3. Simply click to place the start point of the axis and click again to place the end point. The axis
can also be defined by entering the parameters for the start point and the end point of the
axis line. A preview of the mirrored object will show on the screen as you are working to
place your object.

Without checking the copy box the If you check the copy box, you will still have the
reversed 4 will be the end result. original object as well as a reversed copy.

Page 104 Arranging Contours

Mirror Horizontal
Menu: Transform / Mirror
Toolbar: Object Edit / Mirror
1. Click the Mirror Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar.
2. Select the object or objects that you wish to mirror.

3. Click the Mirror Horizontal Icon. A preview of the mirrored objects will show in pink.
4. Click Apply to accept.

Without checking the copy box the reversed 4 If you check the copy box, you will still have
will be the end result. the original object as well as a reversed copy.

Mirror Vertical
Menu: Transform / Mirror
Toolbar: Object Edit / Mirror
1. Click the Mirror Icon. This will open the Precision Toolbar.
2. Select the object or objects that you wish to mirror.

3. Click on the Mirror Vertical Icon. A preview of the mirrored objects will show in pink.
4. Click Apply to accept.

Without checking the copy box the reversed 4 If you check the copy box, you will still have the
will be the end result. original object as well as a reversed copy.

Arranging Contours Page 105

Aligning Contours
Menu: Transform / Align
Toolbar: Object Edit / Align
The Align tool allows you to align one or more contours or groups relative to each other.
1. Select the contours to be aligned.
2. Click and hold the Align Icon, then one of the following:

Alignment [to
horizontal &
vertical center]

Align to bottom

Align to top

Align to center
vertically

Align to center
horizontally

Align left

Page 106 Arranging Contours

 Align right

Welding Contours
Menu: Transform / Weld
Toolbar: Object Edit / Weld
All of the Weld tools work by combining multiple contours into one. Each tool yields different effects,
however, due to the way in which the volumes of the contours are combined.

Using the Weld Joined tool

Menu: Transform / Weld / Weld Joined
Toolbar: Object Edit / Weld / Weld Joined
The Weld Joined tool combines multiple contours into one contour. Overlapping areas are merged
together to form a contour that is the union of the volumes of all its parts.

To weld contours together using the Weld Joined tool:

1. Select the contours to be welded together.

2. Click Weld joined.

Arranging Contours Page 107

Weld Common
Menu: Transform / Weld / Weld Common
Toolbar: Object Edit / Weld / Weld Common
The Weld Common tool combines multiple overlapping contours into one contour that is the
intersection of the volumes of the contours.

To weld contours together using the Weld Common tool:

1. Select the contours to be combined.

2. Click and hold Weld then click Weld Common.

Weld Subtract
Menu: Transform / Weld / Weld Subtract
Toolbar: Object Edit / Weld / Weld Subtract
The Weld Subtract tool subtracts the volume of a number of contours from the volume of the first
contour selected. The result is the first contour, minus any areas which overlapped with the other
contours.

To weld contours together using the Weld Subtract tool:

1. Select the contour you want to subtract from.
2. Select the other contours to subtract from the first.

3. Click and hold Weld then Weld Subtract.

Page 108 Arranging Contours

Weld Jigsaw
Menu: Transform / Weld / Weld Jigsaw
Toolbar: Object Edit / Weld / Weld Jigsaw
The Weld Jigsaw tool allows you to create shapes based on the apparent intersections of contours in
your design.
After activating the Jigsaw tool, you can move the cursor over the contours in your design and the
software will outline closed shapes that it might create. Contours that are on different levels will act
as though they are on the same level.

When you find the closed shape you want, just click in the shape and that closed contour will be
created in place in the design. You can then drag to the shape away from the existing contours.

 Note in the example above that the Jigsaw tool works with any type of graphic in the design,
including both closed and open contours. This can be very useful when constructing closed
shapes for toolpathing. The traditional CAD method of construction would require constructing
lines and curves and then trimming them at intersection points, followed by joining them to
create a closed shape. That method still works, but the Jigsaw tool can often get to the same
result in fewer steps.

1. Click and hold Weld then Weld Jigsaw.

2. Move the cursor over your design to see the contours that can be created by the tool.
3. To create a contour from one of the highlighted outlines, click on the design and drag the
new contour away.
4. Right-click to release the Weld Jigsaw tool.

Arranging Contours Page 109

Using the Cut by Line Tool
Menu: Transform / Weld / Cut by Line
Toolbar: Object Edit / Weld / Cut by Line
The Cut by Line tool allows you to cut closed contours into multiple closed contours.

1. Click Weld then Cut by line.

2. Click and drag to create your cutting line.
3. Right-click to release the tool.
The Cut by Line tool operates differently when used on multiple contours that are selected. This is
because when you select a group of contours they are automatically grouped into containers and
holes. When you use the Cut by Line tool, this grouping is respected. The following images show two
contours that are cut, first without being selected, and second while selected. The first example
creates four separate contours, while the second example creates just two new contours.

Page 110 Arranging Contours

Nesting Contours
Menu: Transform / Nest
Toolbar: Object Edit / Nest
The Nesting tool allows for three different ways of nesting objects and has the ability to nest into non-
rectangular shapes and to save shapes that represent partial sheets that can be used for future
nests. EnRoute also provides the option to have a nesting report generated that provides information
about the efficiency of the nest.

Nest Objects Tool

Menu: Transform / Nest / Nest Objects
Toolbar: Object Edit / Nest / Nest Objects
The Nest Objects tool automatically nests the selected contours together on the plate so that they
use the minimum material while maintaining a defined offset from each other, and from the edge of
the plate.

1. Select the contours to be nested.

2. Click Nest.
3. Set the desired options:

Arranging Contours Page 111

 Angle This option limits the ways the software can rotate the contours in your
Step selection while nesting them.
 If you are working with wood or brushed metal, it may be necessary to
select no rotation, or limit the rotation to 0 or 180 degrees, in order to
keep the grain of the material aligned properly.

Reference Click on the button that represents the position of the plate that you want
Grid the nested items to be located.
Gap The minimum distance between each of the contours being nested. The gap
should be large enough that the toolpaths created from the contours won‟t
overlap each other.
Margin The minimum distance between the edge of the plate and the contours
being nested.
Multilayer If this box is checked, additional layers will be created to allow for the
nesting of all selected objects. All of the nested layers will be on and show
displayed at the same time immediately after the nest. Click on the arrows
in the layers toolbar to display each layer individually and to choose one
layer to be active.
Use holes If this option is selected, the software will place smaller contours within the
holes in larger contours.

4. Click OK.

Page 112 Arranging Contours

If you have grouped contours together, they will be nested as a group.

Dynamic Nest Precision Toolbar

Menu: Transform / Nest / Dynamic Nest
Toolbar: Object Edit / Nest/ Dynamic Nest

1. Click and hold Nest and then Dynamic Nest.

2. Press the F2 button to open the Precision Toolbar. Once you set these parameters they will
not change until you open the Precision Toolbar to change them.

Rotation Steps – The rotation steps refer to the highest number of positions you allow EnRoute to
try before placing the object.
Nest Resolution – The higher this number is the longer it will take to nest the object and the object
will show more clearly.
Part Offset – The minimum distance between each of the contours being nested.
Plate Margin - The minimum distance between the edge of the plate and the contours being nested.

Nesting Tool
Menu: Transform / Nest / Dynamic Nest
Toolbar: Object Edit / Nest/ Dynamic Nest
The Dynamic Nesting tool allows the user to drag objects onto the plate and have them
automatically rotate to fit within the constraints of other objects and the edge of the plate. Several
parameters allow you to adjust offsets and rotation steps.

1. Click and hold Nest and then Dynamic Nest.

2. Left click to select the object. It will turn pink.

Arranging Contours Page 113

 3. Left click to move the object into position. While you are dragging the object it will turn in
several directions as you locate the area best to nest this object.
4. Left click to place the object.
5. Right click to release the object. You can now select another object to nest in the same
manner or you can right click again to exit the tool.

Multiple Nest Precision Toolbar

Menu: Transform / Nest / Multiple Nest
Toolbar: Object Edit / Nest/ Multiple Nest

Number – The number of copies that you wish to create and then nest.
Angle – This is the angle in degrees that the objects are allowed to rotate when nesting.
Gap - The minimum distance between each of the contours being nested.
Margin - The minimum distance between the edge of the plate and the contours being nested.
Priority – Enter the number of the priority for each object to be nested to determine the order it is to
be nested.
Multilayer – If this box is checked, additional layers will be created to allow for the nesting of all
selected objects. All of the nested layers will turned on. It will show all of the layers displayed
immediately after nesting. Click on the arrows in the layers toolbar to display each layer individually
and to choose one layer to be active.
Use holes – If this option is selected, the software will place smaller contours within the holes in
larger contours.
Reference Grid - Click on the button that represents the position of the plate that you want the
nested items to be located.

Page 114 Arranging Contours

Multiple Nest Tool
The Nest Multiple Objects tool allows the user to specify the number of copies you want to nest of
selected objects. You can also tell the tool to fill a sheet with copies of a selected object.

1. Click and hold Nest and then Multiple Nest. . The Precision Toolbar will open.
2. Select the first object to make copies of and nest. It will turn magenta. Complete the
parameters for the nest.
3. Select the next object to nest. The first object will now turn blue indicating that you have
already nested this object. The object that you are working with will be the magenta color.

4. Continue to select objects and enter the parameters for each of these objects.
5. When you have finished entering the data for each of the objects that you wish to copy and
nest, Click Ok. The copies will be placed in the plate.
6. If you have chosen the Multilayer option, there may be more than one layer of nested
objects.

Arranging Contours Page 115

Page 116 Arranging Contours
8. Working with Toolpaths
The goal of the design process is the creation of toolpaths and the machining of finished pieces. This
chapter provides a detailed explanation of each of the different ways to create toolpaths.

Overview
Contours and Toolpaths
Toolpaths derive their shapes from the contours in your design. The contours may form the
boundaries of the toolpath, as with a fill, or the toolpath may trace inside, outside or along the path of
the contour.
While contours may contain Bezier curves, toolpaths are composed exclusively of arcs and straight
line segments, in order to be compatible with the movements of tools in the routers, engravers and
other and CNC devices which are used with the software. Any Bezier curves which may be present in
a contour are replaced by combinations of straight lines and arcs in the toolpath.

Toolpath Groups
When a toolpath is generated from a contour, both the toolpath and the original contour are grouped
together into a toolpath group. If additional toolpaths are created based on the same contour, they
will be added to the same toolpath group.
Each contour can belong to one and only one toolpath group. If you want to generate a toolpath
based on a contour by itself, and a different toolpath based on a group of contours which includes the
first contour, you will need to make two copies of the contour: one to use by itself, and one to use as
part of the group.

 When this is necessary, it is helpful to keep the individual contour and the group of contours on
separate layers in order to avoid confusion.

Strategy
When creating a toolpath, you must choose a strategy which determines the type of toolpath the
software will generate (fill, engraving, slot, etc.). Each strategy has its own set of parameters which
define virtually every aspect of the toolpaths that are created, such as tool type, depth, overlap,
direction and speeds.
Because the strategy completely determines the appearance and shape of the final toolpath, the
software always refers to the toolpath by the strategy that was chosen, not as a toolpath.

Plan
The plan is the set of all of the different strategies contained in any one toolpath group.

Cuts
Each toolpath strategy is made up of one or more cuts. For instance, a fill might have a Rough cut, a
Fine cut, and a Clean cut. Each cut uses one specific tool, as well as the parameters associated with
the type of cut it will be making.

Working with Toolpaths Page 117

Plan, Strategy and Cut Templates
At each step in the toolpath creation process, it is possible to define and save a library of templates
that can be used to automate the process.
 A cut template saves the parameters associated with a single cut.
 A strategy template saves the parameters associated with a strategy, including the parameters
of each of the cuts that make up the strategy.
 A plan template saves all of the parameters associated with all of the strategies for a given
toolpath group, as well as the parameters for each of the cuts in each of the strategies.
The information saved in the templates can then be easily selected and reapplied to a different
contour, recreating all the work that was done on the original toolpath group in one powerful step.
For example, a common activity is to create male and female routing offsets to be used to cut out
different materials so that one may be inlayed into another. Both sets of toolpaths can be created
based on one set of contours, and then selectively used to cut out the material. After determining the
best combination of parameters for both types of offsets, they can be saved as a plan template so
that these parameters may be recalled and reapplied at any time.

Creating Routing Offset Toolpaths

Menu: Toolpath / Routing Offset
Toolbar: Toolpath / Routing Offset

 The Routing Offset strategy can only be used with closed contours.
The Routing Offset strategy creates a toolpath that runs either inside or outside the selected closed
contour. The toolpath is offset from the contour by the radius of the cutting tool, so that it will trim right
up to the edge of the contour.

If the cutting tool cannot fit into a corner or tight curve of the contour, the toolpath will follow the
closest smooth curve possible.

To create a toolpath using the Routing Offset strategy:

Page 118 Working with Toolpaths
 1. Select the contour you want the toolpath to follow.

2. Click Routing Offset.

3. In the Routing Offset dialog, select the desired tool from the Available Tools list and click
Add Tool.

 The Sort tools by list determines the parameter that is used to sort the Available Tools list.
It can also filter the tools that are displayed so that only a certain type of tool is visible.

 The first tool in the list is always defined as the Rough tool, and it is typically used as the
main cutting tool. Any additional tools serve as Clean or Fine tools, primarily used as a final
pass to clean up cutting marks from the Rough tool, or to fit into areas that the Rough tool
couldn‟t.
4. In the tool listing that appears in the list of cuts at the top of the dialog, set the Depth of the
cut.

 It is possible to enter fractional values such as ½ in order to let the program calculate the
decimal equivalent. That way it isn‟t necessary to remember that the decimal equivalent of
3/16 is 0.1875.
5. Add additional cuts using other tools as necessary.
6. Set the Router Offset parameters:

External If checked, the toolpaths will follow the outside of the contour.
(male)

Internal If checked, the toolpaths will follow the inside of the contour.
(female)

Weld offsets If checked, overlapping offsets will be welded together to form a single toolpath
group. If cleared, overlapping offsets will be left the way they are.
Sharp When toolpaths are offset from square corners, they are naturally rounded.
corners This does not affect the „squareness‟ of the corner and it generally allows for
smoother movement of the machine. If this option is checked, the toolpath
Working with Toolpaths Page 119
 offsets form square corners. It is generally not recommended to choose this
option.
Inlay If checked, the toolpath defines either the socket for an inlaid piece of a
different material (if the toolpath is set to Internal), or the cut that will separate
the inlay itself from the plate (if the toolpath is set to External).
 Because a round bit is being used to cut out both pieces, both the male
and female toolpaths need to take into account the dimension of the tool.
This changes the shape of the toolpath, particularly in corners.
If this option is checked, the Inlay Gap parameter displays. This parameter
indicates the size of the gap that will exist between the inlay and its socket.
With Bridges Bridges are small tabs of material that are left connecting parts which would
otherwise be completely severed from the rest of the design. After the job has
finished cutting, the operator can then manually cut the bridges to remove the
part from the rest of the plate.
If this box is checked, bridges will be created.
If the With Bridges option is checked, other parameters are activated to allow
the user to enter the number, size and spacing of the bridges.
7. Click OK.

 Once you create the toolpath, the contour will become part of the toolpath group.

Bridges
Bridges are lifts in a routing offset toolpath that create a tab that maintains the connection between a
part that is being cut out and the material from which it is being cut. This tab helps increase the
stability of the part so that it doesn‟t move as it is being cut. The tabs can then be trimmed away
from the part. EnRoute provides several different types of bridges so that you can decide which
bridge shape works best for the material type and thickness you are cutting.
After choosing the With Bridges option in routing offset parameters dialog, you have several
parameters to define for the bridges, including length, height, type and number. The following table
describes the bridge parameters.

Type This provides the option to select the shape of the bridge. You will probably
find a shape that works best with the material you cut. The smooth shapes
have the advantage of allowing the machine to move smoothly through the
bridge.
Length This is the length of the bridge. Shorter bridges will work in strong material.
If you are cutting soft material you may need to increase the length of the
bridge.
Height This also lets you adjust the bridge size to fit the material.
By Number This option lets you choose the number of bridges in the offset.
By Distance This option lets you choose the spacing of the bridges.
Manual Rather than specifying the number or spacing of the bridges, you may want
to define the specific location of the bridges. Remember though, that even if
you specify the bridges by number or distance, you can easily edit the
location of the bridges after they are created.

Page 120 Working with Toolpaths

This shows the different types of bridges that are available in EnRoute.

Lift

Ramp

Smooth

Ramp Mesa

Working with Toolpaths Page 121

 Smooth Mesa

Deleting Cuts
To delete an unwanted cut from the list of cuts for the strategy, select the cut and click Delete tool.

Saving Strategy Settings as a Template

To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Strategy Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Strategy list.

Editing Cut Parameters

The Cut Parameters dialog allows you to fine-tune the cuts that make up each strategy by changing
the cutting parameters from the default values.
For example, if you are cutting a hard material such as aluminum, it likely will be necessary to define
a greater number of passes that will use a much smaller portion of the available cutting depth of the
tool on each pass.
To edit the parameters for a cut:
1. Select the cut in the cut list and click on the ellipses in the Edit column.
2. Edit the cut parameters.
3. Click OK.
The following figure shows the Cut Parameters dialog for the roughing tool in the Routing Offset
strategy.

Page 122 Working with Toolpaths

The cut parameters are organized into an explorer list. Click on or to expand or collapse an
entry in the list.
To the left of the opened/closed symbol is an indicator about the readiness of the parameter values
in that category. A green check mark indicates that the values are all „legal‟. A yellow symbol with a
green X indicates that the values may not be entirely complete, but that this won‟t stop the strategy
from being created successfully. A red symbol with an X indicates that one or more of the values in
that category make it impossible to successfully create the strategy. When the red symbol is
displayed, the OK button in the dialog box is also disabled.

Cut Parameter Definitions

Current To change the tool that is defined for this cut, select the new tool from the Current
Tool Tool list.
Cut Type This shows the cut type of the current cut being edited. In some strategies, the cut
type may be changed at this location.
In the Routing Offset strategy, the cut type is either Rough, for the first cut in the list,
or Clean for any subsequent cuts that are defined.
Depths
Surface This is the distance from the top of the plate to the top of the cut. A large
Depth portion of the time this will be left at the default value of 0.00. There are
times, however, when it may be appropriate for the Surface to be set
down from the top of the plate, possibly if this cut is to be performed after
another cut that has removed part of the material depth.

Working with Toolpaths Page 123

 Final This is the depth of the cut, measured from the Surface depth. If the
Depth Surface depth is set to 0.00 then the Final Depth is measured from the top
of the plate. If the Surface depth is greater than 0.00 then the Final Depth
will be measured starting from the Surface Depth. For example, a Surface
Depth of 0.50 and a Final Depth of 0.50 would produce an actual cut
depth of 1.00.
Passes
Number This shows the number of passes that will be created. EnRoute calculates
the minimum number of passes required based on the Final Depth and
the Max per Pass that is allowed for the selected tool. It is not possible to
define a number of passes less than the minimum, but it is quite common
to define the number of passes greater than the minimum in order to
reduce the amount of material that is removed with each pass.
Max This value is initially calculated based on the dimensions of the selected
Per tool. However, it is possible to reduce this value in order to control the
Pass depth of each pass.
Actual This value is calculated based on the number of passes and the Final Cut
Per depth. If a Final Pass is defined, the amount of the final pass is removed
Pass from the calculation of the Actual Per Pass value.
Final If the number of passes is greater than 1, it is possible to designate a
Pass Final Pass that will have a cut depth that is different from the other
passes. A common use for this is to cut mostly through the material with
the passes preceding the Final Pass, and reserve a small thickness that
will be cut with the final pass to separate the pieces being cut from the
substrate.
Final This is the depth of the Final Pass. It will obviously be a depth that is less
Pass than the Final Depth of the entire cut.
Depth
Widths
Width In addition to the cut depth, it is also possible to define a Width of Cut.
of Cut This is most commonly defined with a Clean Cut, but it may be defined
for either a Clean or Rough-cut. If a Clean cut is defined with a 0.00
width, it will essentially be located at the same offset from the contour as
the Rough cut. It would „clean‟ by making another pass next to the rough
pass to provide a smoother edge, or to possibly fit into areas that the
rough tool could not. If a width of cut is defined for the Clean cut, then the
Rough cut is offset away from the finished surface by the amount of the
width. The Rough cut would leave that width of material that would then
be removed by the Clean cut. The following toolpath images illustrate this
concept.

Page 124 Working with Toolpaths

 Number This is similar to the concept of Passes with cut depth, except it is the
of Steps diameter of the tool that controls the Number of Steps that is required
for a given Width of Cut. The Number of Steps is calculated
automatically based on the Max Step value, and the Width of Cut.
Max Step This is the maximum width of material that can be removed in one step.
It is based on the diameter of the tool being used. The software
automatically calculates this value to be 90 percent of the tool diameter.
The value can be adjusted so that it is smaller than this, but this is the
largest it is allowed to be.
Actual The Actual Step is calculated based on the Number of Steps and the
Step Width of Cut values.
Shoulder This is an option that provides a way to create a step around the
perimeter of the design. The purpose of this option is to allow users to
create a „lip‟ around the edge of the design that is most commonly used
with the Inlay option with Routing Offsets and Fills.
Any Clean Pass may be designated as a Shoulder, but it must have a
Width of Cut that is larger than 0.00 in order to be designated as a
Shoulder. When the Shoulder option is selected, all Clean Pass cuts
below it in the list will be positioned out from the Shoulder pass.
Feeds and This section of the Cut Parameters allows you to specify the feed rates that will be
Speeds used with this cut. If the tool you are using has feed rates saved for the material you
are using, these values will initially reflect the saved values. The units used in the
feed rates are initially set to match the values for speed in Preferences Unit section.
However, you can change the units to be different if there is a need.
 If your plate has a material selected, the feed rates for that material become the
default feed rates for new cuts. If the tool in your cut has feed rates assigned for
your material, these feed rates override the material‟s feed rates. If no material
has been assigned, then the initial feed rates are 0.00.

Feed This is the speed that the tool will move in the material when it is cutting.
Rate
Final If the cut is using the Final Pass option, this value represents the speed
Pass for this pass.
Feed
Plunge This is the speed that the tool will move down into the material.
Rate
Dwell After plunging into the material, a dwell value will cause the cutting tool to
pause for this length of time before feeding into the material.

Working with Toolpaths Page 125

 Spindle This is the speed that the spindle will turn while it is cutting.
Speed
Direction
Conventional This direction will move the tool „with‟ the direction that the tool is
turning. For a standard exterior cut on a contour, this would be in a
counter-clockwise direction.
Climb This is the opposite of conventional. The tool will move „against‟ the
direction that the tool is turning. For an exterior cut, this is in a
clockwise direction.
Entry/Exit When a tool begins and ends its cut, it is sometimes desirable to have it move into
Parameters and out of the cut away from the actual finished edge. The entry and exit provide the
means to do this. Each of these may be specified separately; you can have an entry
that is an arc, and an exit that is a line.
It is also possible to specify either an arc or line as being „3D‟. With an entry, this
means that the tool will start at the surface depth and progress down to the cut depth
over the length of the entry. The exit does the same thing only in reverse. It starts at
the end of the cut and progresses up to the surface over its length. With an arc, the
arc becomes a helical arc if it is set to 3D.

 If you specify an entry and/or exit as a line, and then enter an angle of 0.0
degrees, the entry/exit will follow the toolpath, even if the toolpath turns over the
length of the entry/exit. This can be useful if toolpaths are close together and you
want to make sure they don‟t interfere.

The diagram below depicts how the dimensions of the entry and exit are specified.

Radius

Length
Angle
Angle

Page 126 Working with Toolpaths

3D This option designates whether this cut will be a 3D pass or not. A 3D toolpath may
Toolpaths be created using a conic, engraving or tapered tool. The difference is that it uses the
beveled shape of the tool to create a beveled edge. It also will move up into corners
to get as far into the corners as the tip dimension of the tool will allow.
As you can imagine, a 3D Toolpath designation is only appropriate in certain
situations, and with certain tools. The software monitors the type of cut and the type
of tool that has been specified, and then controls when the 3D Toolpaths option may
be selected. Also, this option is not available at all licensing levels of the software. If
your version does not have the 3D Toolpaths option enabled, it is possible to enable
this function by upgrading the software license.
The 3D option is a very powerful option, allowing a very different type of cut from any
of the toolpaths that are strictly 2D. 3D toolpaths may be created for cleaning cuts
with Routing Offsets, Island Fills, and Hatch Fills. With the Engrave Strategy, the 3D
toolpath will likely serve as the primary option on many jobs.

The following figure provides an illustration of some of the 3D toolpaths that may be
created.

Saving Cut Settings as a Template

To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Cut Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Cut list.

 It is possible to load a cut template that was defined for one Strategy type into the Cut
Parameters dialog for a different strategy type. Since different strategies use different cut
parameters, it is possible that not all of the parameters for the new cut will be defined in the
template.

Working with Toolpaths Page 127

Creating Open Contour Offset Toolpaths
Menu: Toolpath / Offset Open Contours
Toolbar: Toolpath / Routing Offset/ Router Offset Open Contour
The Open Contour Offset is closely related to the Routing Offset strategy described in the previous
sections. The key difference is that the Routing Offset strategy is designed to be used with closed
contours, and Open Contour Offset is designed for open contours.
To create a toolpath using the Open Contour Offset strategy:
1. Select the contour you want the toolpath to follow.

2. Click and hold Routing Offset then Offset Open Contour.

3. In the Open Contour Offset dialog, select the desired tool from the Available Tools list and
click Add Tool.

 The Sort tools by list determines the parameter that is used to sort the Available Tools list.
It can also filter the tools that are displayed so that only a certain type of tool is visible.

 The first tool in the list is always defined as the Rough tool, and it is typically used as the
main cutting tool. Any additional tools serve as Clean tools, primarily used as a final pass to
clean up cutting marks from the Rough tool, or to fit into areas that the Rough tool couldn‟t.
4. In the tool listing that appears in the list of cuts at the top of the dialog, set the Depth of the
cut.

 It is possible to enter fractional values such as ½ in order to let the program calculate the
decimal equivalent. That way it isn‟t necessary to remember that the decimal equivalent of
3/16 is 0.1875.
5. Add additional cuts using other tools as necessary.
6. Set the Open Contour Offset parameters:

Side Rather than defining whether the offset is to be internal or external as with the
Routing Offset, it is necessary to define which side of the contour to place the
toolpath. Left and Right are determined as if you are facing in the direction of the
contour. If it is located in the middle, the toolpath is placed on top of the open
contour.
Left

Middle

Page 128 Working with Toolpaths

 Right

With One of the common uses of an Open Contour Offset is to cut out sections around
Relief the perimeter of a design. For example, you might use a standard routing offset to
cut out a simple rectangle, and then use an Open Contour Offset to cut out
additional shapes around the outside of the rectangle. In certain materials, and
especially wood, it is necessary for the tool to move into the material rather than
moving from inside the material out in order to minimize the risk of the material
„blowing out‟ as the tool leaves the material.
The With Relief option allows you to define a segment of the toolpath at its end to
move in rather than out so that you can ensure that the toolpath won‟t move the tool
out of the material as it is cutting.
The graphic below illustrates an open contour that uses Relief at the end. The left
end of the toolpath is the „end‟ with Relief. Notice the direction arrow pointing the
other way: this is part of the Relief section.

If the With Relief option is selected, the following additional parameters are
displayed.
Relief This is the length of the section at the end of the toolpath that will move
Length back in from the end.
Relief It is possible to overlap the two sections to ensure a clean cut.
Overlap
Cut End If this is selected, the Relief section of the toolpaths will be cut before
First the rest of the Open Contour Offset toolpaths.
7. Click OK.

 Once you create the toolpath, the contour will become part of the toolpath group.

Deleting Cuts
To delete an unwanted cut from the list of cuts for the strategy, select the cut and click Delete tool.

Working with Toolpaths Page 129

Saving Strategy Settings as a Template
To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Strategy Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Strategy list.

Editing Cut Parameters

The process for editing cut parameters for the Open Contour Offset strategy is nearly identical to that
for the Routing Offset strategy (see “Editing Cut Parameters”).
The two exceptions to this are:
 It is not possible to define the toolpaths as 3D toolpaths so the 3D Toolpath option is not
available.
 The direction of the toolpath is defined by the direction of the contour, so the Direction cut
parameter is not available.

 Note that you are able to define widths for each type of cut. This allows you to use open
contours to cut out areas that are wider than the tool you are using to perform the cut.

Creating Hatch Fill Toolpaths

Menu: Toolpath / Hatch Fill
Toolbar: Toolpath / Hatch Fill

 The Hatch Fill strategy can only be used with closed contours.
The Hatch Fill Strategy is used to create toolpaths to mill a surface down to a defined depth using
toolpaths that move back and forth across the area to be milled. This option is used most often to mill
out larger areas of material that typically don‟t have a lot of thin sections, but it can be used on any
artwork.

Types of Cuts
There are three types of cuts that can be defined in the Hatch Fill Strategy, the Fill Cut, Fine Cut, and
Clean Cut. Each of these is explained below.

Fill Cut
This is the tool that will perform the Hatch Fill. You will almost exclusively use an end mill tool to
perform the fill. In addition to the standard cut parameters that have been described previously, with
the Fill Cut it is necessary to define two additional key parameters – Overlap and Angle. See
“Editing Cut Parameters” for details.

Fine Cut
The Fine Cut is optional. If it is used, a tool that is smaller in diameter than the Fill tool is selected to
fit into sections of the design that the fill tool was not able to fit into. This will be corners and any
other thin areas that are too small for the Fill tool. The Fine Cut uses an Island Fill strategy to fill in
areas that require more than one width of the tool. For this reason, it is also necessary with the Fine
Cut to specify the amount of overlap between adjacent toolpaths.
Page 130 Working with Toolpaths
The following screen shot shows a Hatch fill with a Fine Cut used to fit into the areas where the fill
tool won‟t fit.

Working with Toolpaths Page 131

Clean Cut
The final toolpath option with the Hatch fill is the Clean Cut. This defines a tool that creates toolpaths
that are offset from the contours. The Clean Cut is used to improve the edge quality of the finished
cut, or to create a 3D toolpath around the perimeter of the design.
The following image shows a Hatch fill that includes a 3D Clean Cut. This combination of using a fill
pattern along with a 3D clean cut is a very common technique used in many engraving, woodworking
and sign-making applications. Many times there is a need to utilize a 3D engraving toolpath, but the
material doesn‟t permit the 3D toolpath to go to the „bottom‟ of the design. In this case, the fill can be
used to define the bottom of the design.

To create a toolpath using the Hatch Fill strategy:

1. Select the contour you want the toolpath to follow.

2. Click Hatch Fill.

3. In the Hatch Fill dialog, select the desired tool from the Available Tools list and click Add
Tool.

 The Sort tools by list determines the parameter that is used to sort the Available Tools list.
It can also filter the tools that are displayed so that only a certain type of tool is visible.

 The first tool in the list is always defined as the Rough tool, and it is typically used as the
main cutting tool. Any additional tools serve as Clean tools, primarily used as a final pass to
clean up cutting marks from the Rough tool, or to fit into areas that the Rough tool couldn‟t.
4. In the tool listing that appears in the list of cuts at the top of the dialog, set the Depth of the
cut.

 It is possible to enter fractional values such as ½ in order to let the program calculate the
decimal equivalent. That way it isn‟t necessary to remember that the decimal equivalent of
3/16 is 0.1875.
5. Add additional cuts using other tools as necessary.
6. Set the Hatch Fill parameters:

Page 132 Working with Toolpaths

 Inlay This defines whether this strategy is part of an inlay project. If this fill will be
used as the female part of an inlay project, it is necessary for the software to
modify the toolpaths to compensate for the dimensions of the tool. Also, you
will need to define the inlay gap, which is the spacing between the male and
female portions of the inlay. A gap is needed to allow the two parts of the
inlay to fit together. The screen image below shows two contours that have
been hatch filled. The contour on the right has also been defined as an inlay
to illustrate how the toolpaths are modified at the corners.

Without Inlay With Inlay

Optimization There are three different options regarding the way in which the hatch
toolpaths are ordered within the contour. In the machining industry there are
many different viewpoints regarding how „pocket milling‟ toolpaths should be
ordered in order to be most efficient. The software utilizes a method that is
intended to minimize tool lifts in the fill, but not necessarily to prevent tool lifts.
In many cases it is not practical to attempt to eliminate tool lifts without
breaking other rules that the software enforces. The software does not allow
any of the hatch toolpaths to pass over any part of the hatch area more than
one time. Also, it strictly enforces a back-and-forth pattern over the entire
hatch area. We feel that this results in a more aesthetically pleasing finish on
the hatch surface, and it is consistent with methods employed by other
machining packages.
A second important option for ordering hatch toolpaths is to make them
compatible with a specific type of engraving tool that utilizes a „Nose Cone‟
that maintains a constant depth of cut for the tool. This requires that the hatch
toolpaths progress from one side of the fill to the other, always maintaining an
edge of uncut material next to the nose cone.
Finally, the software provides the option of having the cleaning pass that is
associated with the hatch toolpath be cut before the hatch toolpaths. This can
be a desirable option when cutting certain types of material, such as certain
woods.
7. Click OK.

 Once you create the toolpath, the contour will become part of the toolpath group.

Deleting Cuts
To delete an unwanted cut from the list of cuts for the strategy, select the cut and click Delete tool.

Working with Toolpaths Page 133

Saving Strategy Settings as a Template
To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Strategy Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Strategy list.

Editing Cut Parameters

The process for editing cut parameters for the Hatch Fill strategy is nearly identical to that for the
Routing Offset strategy (see “Editing Cut Parameters” page 122).
The one key difference lies in the parameters for the Fill cut, where two additional parameters are
defined under Fill:
 Overlap – This parameter defines how much adjacent toolpaths will overlap each other in the fill.
The default value that is created when the Fill Cut is created is 50 percent. Legal values are 0 to
99 percent. When cutting soft materials you may typically reduce the overlap 10 or 20 percent.
However, when cutting denser materials, it may desirable to increase the overlap percentage to
70 percent or more. You will also notice that the overlap percentage has an effect on the finished
surface pattern, so you may at times use the overlap to create a desired effect.
 Hatch Angle – This angle determines the angle (measured from horizontal) that will be used to
create the Hatch Fill. Most of the time you will likely use either 0-degrees for horizontal or 90-
degrees for vertical toolpaths. Other angles can be used to create an effect, or to better utilize
the shape of the area to be milled.

Page 134 Working with Toolpaths

Creating Island Fill Toolpaths
Menu: Toolpath / Island Fill
Toolbar: Toolpath / Island Fill
The Island Fill strategy can only be used with closed contours.
The Island Fill Strategy is very similar to the Hatch Fill Strategy. The way that the two are defined is
virtually identical. The results, however, are quite different because of the pattern of the fill toolpaths
that are created.

Hatch Fill Island Fill

Island Fill vs. Hatch Fill

There are two main factors to be considered when choosing a fill strategy. First, select the strategy
that will most efficiently mill the area to be milled. Typically, if you have a large open area, a Hatch
Fill will be most efficient. On the other hand, if you have a design that is made up of long, thin
sections, an Island Fill will most likely work best.
The second reason for choosing one method over the other is based on whether the tooling pattern
that will be left in the milled area is important. As you work with these strategies, you will see that
each of them will create a different pattern, and there may be times when this pattern is important in
deciding which strategy is appropriate.
The best thing is to experiment with each and then decide for yourself which method works best in
any given situation.

Creating an Island Fill

To create a toolpath using the Island Fill strategy:
1. Select the contour you want the toolpath to follow.

2. Click Island Fill.

3. In the Island Fill dialog, select the desired tool from the Available Tools list and click Add
Tool.

 The Sort tools by list determines the parameter that is used to sort the Available Tools list.
It can also filter the tools that are displayed so that only a certain type of tool is visible.

 The first tool in the list is always defined as the Rough tool, and it is typically used as the
main cutting tool. Any additional tools serve as Clean tools, primarily used as a final pass to

Working with Toolpaths Page 135

 clean up cutting marks from the Rough tool, or to fit into areas that the Rough tool couldn‟t.
4. In the tool listing that appears in the list of cuts at the top of the dialog, set the Depth of the
cut.

 It is possible to enter fractional values such as ½ in order to let the program calculate the
decimal equivalent. That way it isn‟t necessary to remember that the decimal equivalent of
3/16 is 0.1875.
5. Add additional cuts using other tools as necessary.
6. Set the Island Fill parameters:

Inlay This defines whether this strategy is part of an inlay project. If this fill will be
used as the female part of an inlay project, it is necessary for the software to
modify the toolpaths to compensate for the dimensions of the tool. Also, you
will need to define the inlay gap, which is the spacing between the male and
female portions of the inlay. A gap is needed to allow the two parts of the inlay
to fit together. The screen image below shows two contours that have been
hatch filled. The contour on the right has also been defined as an inlay to
illustrate how the toolpaths are modified at the corners.

Without Inlay With Inlay

Optimization There are three different ways in which the fill toolpaths can be ordered within
the contour. In the machining industry there are many different viewpoints
regarding how „pocket milling‟ toolpaths should be ordered in order to be most
efficient. The software utilizes a method that is intended to minimize tool lifts
in the fill, but not necessarily to prevent tool lifts.
In many cases it is not practical to attempt to eliminate tool lifts without
breaking other rules that the software enforces. The software does not allow
any of the hatch toolpaths to pass over any part of the hatch area more than
one time. Also, it strictly enforces a uniform pattern over the entire hatch area.
We feel that this results in a more aesthetically pleasing finish on the hatch
surface, and it is consistent with methods employed by other machining
packages.
A second important option for ordering hatch toolpaths is to make them
compatible with a specific type of engraving tool that utilizes a „Nose Cone‟
that maintains a constant depth of cut for the tool. This requires that the hatch
toolpaths progress from one side of the fill to the other, always maintaining an
edge of uncut material next to the nose cone.
Finally, the software provides the option of having the cleaning pass that is

Page 136 Working with Toolpaths

 associated with the hatch toolpath be cut before the hatch toolpaths. This can
be a desirable option when cutting certain types of material, such as certain
woods.
7. Click OK.

 Once you create the toolpath, the contour will become part of the toolpath group.

Deleting Cuts
To delete an unwanted cut from the list of cuts for the strategy, select the cut and click Delete tool.

Saving Strategy Settings as a Template

To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Strategy Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Strategy list.

Editing Cut Parameters

The process for editing cut parameters for the Hatch Fill strategy is nearly identical to that for the
Routing Offset strategy (see “Editing Cut Parameters”).
One of the options available in the cut parameters for the fill tool in the Island Fill strategy is whether
to use Corner Tags. Corner tags are used to ensure that the specified overlap value is enforced
throughout the fill. This can be very important when you use an overlap of less than 50 percent,
because it ensures that the entire fill area gets milled. The following graphic illustrates a fill toolpath
with and without corner tags.

With corner tags Without corner tags

Working with Toolpaths Page 137

Spiral Fill Toolpaths
Menu: Toolpath / Hatch Fill
Toolbar: Toolpath / Hatch Fill
The Spiral Fill strategy is essentially the same as the Island fill, except that it creates a spiral pattern
for filling the selected contours. This can be very useful for certain design elements, but it is typically
only useful for objects that are round or near round. On round contours it allows the toolpath to be
created as a single toolpath. This eliminates the need for the tool to step in after every trip around.
The advantage is that this is more efficient, and it can also improve the aesthetics of the tooling
marks that are left on the milled surface.
On objects that are not round, the toolpath must stop where it intersects the edge of the part, which
requires the tool to lift up and then move to the next portion of the toolpath. This could require many
more tool lifts than would be necessary using either a standard hatch or island fill.

Page 138 Working with Toolpaths

Drill Tools
Menu: Toolpath / Drill
Toolbar: Toolpath / Drill

Drill points are similar to toolpaths, but they are not the same. Many CNC machines are able to
respond differently to drill commands than they do to standard toolpath commands. For this reason,
the software creates drills as a different type of object so that when this information is sent to the
machine, the driver is capable of determining how much drill information a specific machine requires,
and how much should be controlled by the machine. For the most part you don‟t have to think about
drills at this level, but it is important to know that they differ from toolpaths.
There are six different strategies used to create drill points. Each of these strategies is identical in the
way that they create the drill points, and in how Drill Cut Parameters are defined. They differ in how
they arrange the drill points.

Creating Drill Points

Menu: Toolpath / Drill / Drill Point
Toolbar: Toolpath / Drill / Drill Point
The Drill Point strategy creates a single drill point at the location specified.
To create a drill point:

1. Click Drill then Drill point.

2. In the Drill Point dialog, select the desired tool from the Available Tools list and click Add
Tool.

 The Sort tools by list determines the parameter that is used to sort the Available Tools list.
It can also filter the tools that are displayed so that only a certain type of tool is visible.
3. In the tool listing that appears in the list of cuts at the top of the dialog, set the Depth of the
drill hole.

 It is possible to enter fractional values such as ½ in order to let the program calculate the
decimal equivalent. That way it isn‟t necessary to remember that the decimal equivalent of
3/16 is 0.1875.
4. Enter the Drill Point parameters:

Working with Toolpaths Page 139

 X Coordinate These are the X and Y coordinates for the drill point.
and Y
Coordinate
By Graphic If this box is checked, the X and Y coordinates will be selected with the
mouse.
5. Add additional drill cuts using other tools as necessary. All cuts will share the same drill point
coordinates.
6. Click OK.
7. If you checked the By Graphic box, click with the mouse to place drill points on your design.
Right-click to release the tool. If the By Graphic box was cleared, a single drill point will be
created at the specified coordinates.

Saving Strategy Settings as a Template

To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Strategy Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Strategy list.

Creating Drill Circles

Menu: Toolpath / Drill / Drill Circles
Toolbar: Toolpath / Drill / Drill Circles
The Drill Circle strategy creates a circular pattern of drill points, centered at the location specified.
To create a drill circle:

1. Click Drill then Drill circle.

2. In the Drill Point dialog, select the desired tool from the Available Tools list and click Add
Tool.

 The Sort tools by list determines the parameter that is used to sort the Available Tools list.
It can also filter the tools that are displayed so that only a certain type of tool is visible.
3. In the tool listing that appears in the list of cuts at the top of the dialog, set the Depth of the
drill holes.

 It is possible to enter fractional values such as ½ in order to let the program calculate the
decimal equivalent. That way it isn‟t necessary to remember that the decimal equivalent of
3/16 is 0.1875.
4. Enter the Drill Circle parameters:

Circle Diameter This is the diameter of the circle around which the drill points will be
placed. This dimension must be greater than zero to be legal.

Page 140 Working with Toolpaths

 Angle You may want to rotate the drill points on the circle to place them
correctly. When the angle is zero the first drill point will be placed on the
circle directly to the right of center. You may enter a value between 0 and
360 for this value.
Number of Holes This specifies the number of drills to be placed. A value of 1 or greater
should be entered.
X Coordinate and These are the X and Y coordinates for the center of the circle of drill
Y Coordinate points you are defining.
By Graphic If this box is checked, the X and Y coordinates will be selected with the
mouse.

5. Add additional drill cuts using other tools as necessary. All cuts will share the same drill point
coordinates.
6. Click OK.
7. If you checked the By Graphic box, click with the mouse to place drill circles on your design.
Right-click to release the tool. If the By Graphic box was cleared, a single drill circle will be
created at the specified coordinates.

Saving Strategy Settings as a Template

To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Strategy Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Strategy list.

Creating Drill Arrays

Menu: Toolpath / Drill / Drill Array
Toolbar: Toolpath / Drill / Drill Array
The Drill Array strategy creates a „matrix‟ of drill points with a set number of rows and columns, and a
specified amount of spacing between them.

3. Click Drill then Drill Array.

4. In the Drill Array dialog, select the desired tool from the Available Tools list and click Add
Tool.

 The Sort tools by list determines the parameter that is used to sort the Available Tools list.
It can also filter the tools that are displayed so that only a certain type of tool is visible.
5. In the tool listing that appears in the list of cuts at the top of the dialog, set the Depth of the
drill holes.

 It is possible to enter fractional values such as ½ in order to let the program calculate the
decimal equivalent. That way it isn‟t necessary to remember that the decimal equivalent of
3/16 is 0.1875.

Working with Toolpaths Page 141

 6. Enter the Drill Array parameters:

Columns The number of vertical drill columns

Rows The number of horizontal drill rows
Spacing The options that define the spacing of the drill points in the array.
 All spacing is applied between the center drill points of the columns and
rows, not between the outside edges of the drill cuts.

Width by If selected, enter the overall width of the array. The drill points
overall width will be evenly spaced horizontally within this width.
Width by If selected, enter the amount of horizontal space between the
horizontal columns of drill points.
spacing
Height by If selected, enter the overall height of the array. The drill points
overall height will be evenly spaced vertically within this height.
Height by If selected, enter the amount of vertical space between the
vertical rows of drill points.
spacing
X Coordinate These are the X and Y coordinates for the center of the array of drill points you
and Y are defining.
Coordinate
By Graphic If this box is checked, the X and Y coordinates will be selected with the mouse.

7. Add additional drill cuts using other tools as necessary. All cuts will share the same drill point
coordinates.
8. Click OK.
9. If you checked the By Graphic box, click with the mouse to place drill arrays on your design.
Right-click to release the tool. If the By Graphic box was cleared, a single drill circle will be
created at the specified coordinates.

Saving Strategy Settings as a Template

To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Strategy Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Strategy list.

Page 142 Working with Toolpaths

Creating Drill Points in the Centers of Contours
Menu: Toolpath / Drill / Drill Points in Center
Toolbar: Toolpath / Drill / Drill Points in Center

 The Drill Centers strategy can only be used with closed contours.
The Drill Centers strategy creates drill points at the centers of each of the selected contours. You can
specify to select only circles and a range of sizes to use, if desired.
1. Select the contours you want to create drill points in the center of.

2. Click Drill then Drill centers.

3. In the Drill Centers dialog, select the desired tool from the Available Tools list and click Add
Tool.

 The Sort tools by list determines the parameter that is used to sort the Available Tools list.
It can also filter the tools that are displayed so that only a certain type of tool is visible.
4. In the tool listing that appears in the list of cuts at the top of the dialog, set the Depth of the
drill hole.

 It is possible to enter fractional values such as ½ in order to let the program calculate the
decimal equivalent. That way it isn‟t necessary to remember that the decimal equivalent of
3/16 is 0.1875.
5. Select the Drill Centers parameters:

All contours If selected, holes will be drilled in the centers of all the selected
contours.
Circles only If selected, holes will only be drilled in the centers of the selected
circles. Selecting this option displays the following additional options.
All circles If selected, holes will be drilled in the centers of all
selected circles.
By diameter If selected, holes will be drilled in the centers of all
selected circles whose diameters are within the
Tolerance of the Check Diameter specified.

6. Add additional drill cuts using other tools as necessary. All cuts will share the same drill point
coordinates.
7. Click OK.

Saving Strategy Settings as a Template

To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Strategy Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Strategy list.

Working with Toolpaths Page 143

Creating Drill Points Along a Contour
Menu: Toolpath / Drill / Drill Contour
Toolbar: Toolpath / Drill / Drill Contour
The Drill Contours strategy creates drill points along selected contours, based on the number and
spacing specified.
1. Select the contours you want to create drill points in the center of.

2. Click Drill then Drill contours.

3. In the Drill Contours dialog, select the desired tool from the Available Tools list and click
Add Tool.

 The Sort tools by list determines the parameter that is used to sort the Available Tools list.
It can also filter the tools that are displayed so that only a certain type of tool is visible.
4. In the tool listing that appears in the list of cuts at the top of the dialog, set the Depth of the
drill hole.

 It is possible to enter fractional values such as ½ in order to let the program calculate the
decimal equivalent. That way it isn‟t necessary to remember that the decimal equivalent of
3/16 is 0.1875.
5. Select the Drill Contours parameters:

Spacing Select the way the drill points will be placed along the contours you have
Type selected:
Hold A specified number of drill points will be spaced evenly along the
Number length of the contours. The number is specified by the Number of
Holes parameter.
Hold Drill points will be spaced along the length of the contours at a
Spacing distance specified by the Spacing parameter.
Corners Drill points will be created at all corners in the contours.
 Circles and ellipses have no corners, and will have no drill
points created for them.

Inside Drill points will be created at all inside corners in the contours.
Corners
 Circles and ellipses have no corners, and will have no drill
points created for them.

Outside Drill points will be created at all outside corners in the contours.
Corners
 Circles and ellipses have no corners, and will have no drill
points created for them.

Number of The number of holes used with the Hold Number spacing type.
Holes
Spacing The spacing between drill points used with the Hold Spacing spacing type.

Page 144 Working with Toolpaths

 6. Add additional drill cuts using other tools as necessary. All cuts will share the same drill point
coordinates.
7. Click OK.

Saving Strategy Settings as a Template

To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Strategy Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Strategy list.

Creating Drill Points at the Corners of the Plate

Menu: Toolpath / Drill / Drill Corners
Toolbar: Toolpath / Drill / Drill Corners

 The Drill Corners strategy is available only if a plate has been defined.
The Drill Corners strategy creates drill points in the corners of the plate, with the ability for additional
drills in between each corner.

1. Click Drill then Drill Corners.

2. In the Drill Corners dialog, select the desired tool from the Available Tools list and click Add
Tool.

 The Sort tools by list determines the parameter that is used to sort the Available Tools list.
It can also filter the tools that are displayed so that only a certain type of tool is visible.
3. In the tool listing that appears in the list of cuts at the top of the dialog, set the Depth of the
drill hole.

 It is possible to enter fractional values such as ½ in order to let the program calculate the
decimal equivalent. That way it isn‟t necessary to remember that the decimal equivalent of
3/16 is 0.1875.
4. Enter the Drill Corners parameters:

Inset X The horizontal inset from the corners of the plate. If it is left at 0.00 the drill
points will be centered on the corners of the plate.
Inset Y The vertical inset from the corners of the plate.
Add Copies X Enter a number here to create additional drill points spaced evenly between
the corner drills in the horizontal axis.
Add Copies Y Enter a number here to create additional drill points spaced evenly between
the corner drills in the vertical axis.

5. Add additional drill cuts using other tools as necessary. All cuts will share the same drill point
coordinates.
6. Click OK.

Working with Toolpaths Page 145

 7. If you checked the By Graphic box, click with the mouse to place drill points on your design.
Right-click to release the tool. If the By Graphic box was cleared, a single drill point will be
created at the specified coordinates.

Saving Strategy Settings as a Template

To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Strategy Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Strategy list.

Editing Drill Cut Parameters

The drill cut parameters are very similar to the cut parameters in the other strategies, with a couple of
key differences. They are all the same within the different Drill Strategies. The following sections
identify the unique cut parameters for the drill.
Diameter by tool vs. Exact diameter – If the „Diameter by tool‟ option is selected, the drill will truly
be a drill point, meaning that the size of the hole is based entirely on the diameter of the tool at a
given depth.
If the „Exact diameter‟ option is selected, the user can define a diameter that is larger than the tool‟s
diameter, and the drill point will be created as a circle. The circle will be sized to make the drill hole
the diameter specified for the selected tool at the depth defined.
It is important to point out that EnRoute takes into account the shape of the tool in determining the
diameter of the tool at a given depth. If you are using a conic tool to create the drill, and specify an
exact dimension at a depth that is less than the height of the bevel, EnRoute will automatically take
into account the real diameter of the tool at the depth specified.
The following screen image illustrates a number of drills that show drills defined both „by tool‟ and „by
diameter‟.

Page 146 Working with Toolpaths

Countersink – If a tool is selected that is capable of
engraving (conic, engrave, tapered) then if the „Diameter by
tool‟ option is selected, another option is made available.
Countersink lets you specify the diameter of a hole you
would like to make that takes into account the bevel on the
tool. EnRoute will then automatically calculate how deep
the tool should go in order to create a countersink hole with
an outer diameter as specified. This is an option designed
to aid in designing drill holes that will accommodate screws
of a certain size in the finished piece.

Depths, Passes, Feeds and Speeds – These parameters are pretty much just the same in the drills
as they are in all of the other strategies. Review the detailed descriptions provided in the Routing
Offset Strategy section for more information.

Working with Toolpaths Page 147

Creating Slot Toolpaths
Menu: Toolpath / Slots
Toolbar: Toolpath / Slots
A slot is a special tool that allows you to define a tool to cut along a line, making a slot that is the
width of the tool diameter. Like drills, slots can include more than one tool, and more than one depth.

1. Click Slots.
2. In the Slot dialog, select the desired tool from the Available Tools list and click Add Tool.

 The Sort tools by list determines the parameter that is used to sort the Available Tools list.
It can also filter the tools that are displayed so that only a certain type of tool is visible.
3. In the tool listing that appears in the list of cuts at the top of the dialog, set the Depth of the
drill hole.

 It is possible to enter fractional values such as ½ in order to let the program calculate the
decimal equivalent. That way it isn‟t necessary to remember that the decimal equivalent of
3/16 is 0.1875.
4. Enter the Drill Corners parameters:

Start X and Y The X and Y coordinates of the starting point of the slot.
Coordinates
End X and Y The X and Y coordinates of the endpoint of the slot. These must be different
Coordinates than the coordinates of the starting point.
By graphic If this box is checked, the coordinates of the starting and end points will be
selected with the mouse.
Back and If checked, the tool will move from the start point to the end point and return to
forth the starting point before being lifted from the plate.

5. Add additional drill cuts using other tools as necessary. All cuts will share the same drill point
coordinates.
6. Click OK.
7. If you checked the By Graphic box, click with the mouse to place the starting and end points
on your design. Right-click to release the tool. If the By Graphic box was cleared, the slot will
be created between the specified coordinates.

Page 148 Working with Toolpaths

Saving Strategy Settings as a Template
To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Strategy Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Strategy list.

Creating an Engrave Toolpath

Menu: Toolpath / Engrave
Toolbar: Toolpath / Engrave
Engraving is a traditional machining function that has many applications. In one sense it is the most
straightforward type of toolpath creation, and in another sense it is the most complex.
Two-dimensional engraving is essentially just the creation of toolpaths that follow the contours of the
contours at a specified depth. 3D toolpaths offer better results: they are able to cut out sharp corners
better when using conic tools, for instance. However, 3D toolpaths using conic tools require a
tremendous number of computations in order to accurately and reliably create the desired effect.
For the user it is a simple matter of deciding if the toolpaths should be 2D or 3D. The software then
performs the required computations to create the appropriate type of toolpaths.

 If you are defining a deep engrave strategy it is often better to use a fill strategy with a 3D Clean
pass so that if the engrave toolpath doesn‟t go all the way to the bottom, the fill tool can finish
milling the bottom surface.
1. Select the contour you want the toolpath to follow.

2. Click Engrave.
3. In the Routing Offset dialog, select the desired tool from the Available Tools list and click
Add Tool.

 The Sort tools by list determines the parameter that is used to sort the Available Tools list.
It can also filter the tools that are displayed so that only a certain type of tool is visible.

 Only those tools that are capable of engraving, including conic, engrave and tapered tools,
may be defined as engrave cuts.

 The first tool in the list is always defined as the Engrave tool, and it is typically used as the
main cutting tool. Any additional tools serve as Rough tools, primarily used to remove
excess material. The typical scenario in the case of a deep engraving toolpath is to define a
Rough cut that uses an end mill tool.
4. In the tool listing that appears in the list of cuts at the top of the dialog, set the Depth of the
cut.

 It is possible to enter fractional values such as ½ in order to let the program calculate the
decimal equivalent. That way it isn‟t necessary to remember that the decimal equivalent of
3/16 is 0.1875.

Working with Toolpaths Page 149

 5. Add additional cuts using other tools as necessary.
6. Set the Engrave parameters:

3D Engrave Check to create the engrave cut as a 3D engrave toolpath. If cleared, the cut
toolpath will be a 2D toolpath.
 Remember that only tools capable of 3D engraving, including conic,
engrave and tapered tools, may be defined as 3D engrave toolpaths.

External or If the 3D option is selected for the engrave toolpath, it is necessary to define
Internal whether the toolpaths should pass to the inside or the outside of the contours in
the selection. Most typically, the engraving toolpaths will be defined on the
inside of the contours. The following images show 3D toolpaths created on the
inside and outside of a contour:

Internal External
 Because external 3D toolpaths require all objects in the selection to be
combined into one toolpath group, they are not compatible with other types
of toolpaths in a contour. If existing toolpath groups are included in the
selection, their toolpaths will be deleted when these toolpaths are created.

7. Click OK.

 Once you create the toolpath, the contour will become part of the toolpath group.

Saving Strategy Settings as a Template

To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Strategy Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Strategy list.
Engrave Cut Parameters
The engrave cut parameters include the standard categories of Depths, Passes, Feeds and Speeds,
and Direction. The first cut tool is automatically defined as the Engrave tool, and if a second tool is
defined, it is classified as the Rough tool. Toolpaths for the Rough tool are only created if required by
the Engrave cut.

Page 150 Working with Toolpaths

Creating Pyramid Toolpaths
Menu: Toolpath / Pyramid
Toolbar: Toolpath / Pyramid
The Pyramid Strategy allows you to create a beveled type of artwork that is also commonly referred
to as chiseled or sculpted artwork. The Pyramid Cut utilizes a beveled tool, most commonly a conic
tool, to create the beveled effect. This cut is unique in that it is necessary for the software to calculate
the depth of cut based on the selected tool, and the selected contours. The cut depth is based on the
widest „stroke‟ in the design. The software then places toolpaths at the proper depth based on the
maximum cut depth it calculates.
The finished result from this strategy can be very striking, and it can be effectively utilized on very
small pieces all the way up to designs that are several feet tall and wide.

 Remember to check the Pyramid parameter for „Move to bottom of plate‟ in order for the Return
Height to be created correctly.
1. Select the contour you want the toolpath to follow.

2. Click Pyramid.
3. In the Pyramid dialog, select the desired tool for the pyramid cut from the Available Tools list
and click Add Tool.

 Only those tools that are capable of engraving, including conic, engrave and tapered tools may be
defined as pyramid cuts.

 The Sort tools by list determines the parameter that is used to sort the Available Tools list. It can also
filter the tools that are displayed so that only a certain type of tool is visible.
4. In the tool listing that appears in the list of cuts at the top of the dialog, set the Depth of the
cut.

 It is possible to enter fractional values such as ½ in order to let the program calculate the
decimal equivalent. That way it isn‟t necessary to remember that the decimal equivalent of
3/16 is 0.1875.
5. Add additional cuts using other tools as necessary.

 The first tool in the list is always defined as the Pyramid tool, and it is typically used as the
main cutting tool.

Working with Toolpaths Page 151

  The second tool is defined as the Rough tool, and is primarily used to remove excess
material. The Rough tool is typically a medium-sized end mill tool.

 The third tool is defined as the Offset tool, and is used to cut around the outside of the
Pyramid cut, either to create a relief, or to cut the pyramid away from the surrounding plate.
6. Set the Pyramid parameters:

Return The height of any vertical „edge‟ that is to be created below the beveled portion
Height of the contour. In order for the return height to be meaningful, it is necessary to
move the toolpath down to the bottom of the material so that the return will be
created when the pieces are cut out.
Surface Depth
Plate
Cut Depth Thickness

Return Height

Move to If checked, the bottom edge of the return height (if any) will be aligned with the
bottom of bottom of the plate.
plate If this option is cleared, the toolpaths will be placed such that the top of the
bevel will be at the surface of the material.

7. Click OK.

 Once you create the toolpath, the contour will be part of the toolpath group.

Saving Strategy Settings as a Template

To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Strategy Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Strategy list.

Page 152 Working with Toolpaths

Pyramid Cut Parameters
The cut parameters in this strategy are much the same as the other strategies. The key difference is
that for the most part the software will automatically define the depths of the cuts for you based on
the selections you make at the strategy level. It is possible to override the Surface Depth for the cuts,
although this is not typically recommended.
You may at times want to increase the number of passes for a given cut in order to take into account
material densities. By default, EnRoute will utilize 90 percent of the tool‟s cutting depth on the
Pyramid cut. For soft material this is likely appropriate, but for denser material such as wood, you will
likely want to decrease the pass depths by increasing the number of passes.

Editing Toolpaths
Menu: Toolpath / Edit Toolpaths

After toolpaths are created, the software maintains all of the information about how the toolpaths
were created. You can edit the toolpaths at any time and change the cuts and parameters that define
the toolpath. When you are finished, the software regenerates the toolpath using the new settings.
To edit a toolpath:
1. Select the toolpath.
2. From the Toolpath menu, select Edit toolpaths.
3. If the toolpath group contains more than one strategy, you will be prompted to choose which
strategy to edit. Select the strategy you want to edit and click OK.

4. In the dialog for the strategy, make the desired changes to the settings and click OK.

Working with Toolpaths Page 153

Editing the Toolpath Plan
The plan is the set of all strategies contained in a toolpath group. Editing it allows you to edit the
individual strategies, delete them, add new strategies, and save the entire plan as a template.

Accessing the Plan

To access the plan:
1. Select the toolpath.
2. From the Toolpath menu, select Edit toolpaths.
3. If necessary, select a strategy and click OK.
4. In the strategy dialog, click Edit Plan.

Editing Strategies
To edit a strategy:
1. Select the strategy in the strategy list and click on the ellipses in the Edit column.
2. Edit the strategy in the strategy dialog.
3. Click OK.

Adding Strategies
To add a strategy to the plan:
1. Click on the appropriate button under Add Strategy.
2. Create the strategy using the strategy dialog.
3. Click OK.

Removing Strategies
To delete a strategy from the plan:
1. Select the strategy in the strategy list.
2. Click Remove.

Page 154 Working with Toolpaths

Clearing All Strategies
To delete all the strategies from the plan, click Clear.

Saving Plan Settings as a Template

To save the current settings as a template:
1. Click the Save as button.
2. Type a name for the template and click OK.

Loading Plan Settings from a Template

To load the settings previously saved as a template, select the template from the Plan list.

Editing Entry/Exit Points

Each cut in a toolpath has its own entry and exit points. These are the points at which the tool will
enter and exit the plate material as it makes the cut. Often the entry and exit points are at the same
point.
By default, the entry and exit points are drill points, indicating that the tool will drill straight down into
the material at the start point and lift straight out at the end point. The entry and exit points may also
be arcs or lines, however, in which case the cutting tool will move laterally into the material on the
line or arc specified and then begin cutting along the toolpath. If a 3D line or arc is specified, the tool
will move down into the material on a diagonal line as viewed from the side.

Points Arcs Lines

 Not all toolpath start points may be moved, and not all start points are eligible to include
Entry/Exit toolpaths. Generally this type of editing is most applicable to Routing Offset toolpaths.

Moving Entry/Exit Points

Menu: Toolpath / Edit Entry/Exit

To move an entry/exit point:

1. Select the toolpaths you want to edit.
2. From the Toolpath menu, select Edit Entry/Exit.
3. Click on the entry/exit point and drag it to its new location along the toolpath.

 Moving entry/exit points on a toolpath can use the snap settings to more precisely locate the
desired point.

Working with Toolpaths Page 155

Moving Entry/Exit Points for Individual Cutting Passes
By default, each of the cutting passes for a given cut will have identical entry/exit points. When you
move the entry exit points for one, you move them for all of the cutting passes.
To move the entry/exit points for a single cutting pass:
1. Press F10.
2. In the View Setup tab of the Setup Preferences dialog, set Depth to the cutting depth of the
pass you want to edit.
3. Click OK.

 Only the single cutting pass at this depth is displayed/editable.

4. Select the toolpath you want to edit.
5. From the Toolpath menu, select Edit Entry/Exit.
6. Click on the entry/exit point and drag it to its new location along the toolpath.
7. Press F10.
8. In the View Setup tab of the Setup Preferences dialog, set Depth back to All depths.
9. Click OK.

Editing Entry/Exit Cut Parameters

Menu: Toolpath / Edit Entry/Exit

In order to change the type of entry/exit point in use, or to make them 3D, it is necessary to edit the
entry/exit parameters for a cut.
The entry/exit parameters can be edited along with the other cut parameters for the cut, or they can
be edited separately.
For details on editing all cut parameters, see “Editing Cut Parameters”.
To edit only the entry/edit points for a toolpath:
1. Select the toolpaths you want to edit.
2. From the Toolpath menu, select Edit Entry/Exit.
3. Click on the entry/edit point you want to edit.
4. Right-click and select Edit Entry/Exit from the shortcut menu.

Page 156 Working with Toolpaths

 5. In the Edit Entry/Exit dialog that displays, edit the entry/exit parameters for the strategy.
6. Check Apply to all Entry/Exit points in selection to apply the changes to all the entry/exit
points in the selected toolpaths.
7. Click OK.

Editing Bridges
The Edit Bridges tool allows you to edit individual bridges, moving them and changing their
parameters. It is also possible to insert and delete bridges, and globally change the parameters of all
the bridges in the selection.
Bridges are small tabs of material that are left connecting parts which would otherwise be completely
severed from the rest of the design. After the job has finished cutting, the operator can then manually
cut the bridges to remove the part from the rest of the plate.

Bridges are displayed as square brackets that ride the line of the toolpath. The area in between the
brackets will form the bridge.

Working with Toolpaths Page 157

Moving Bridges
To move the endpoints of a bridge:
1. Select the toolpath you want to edit.
2. From the Toolpath menu, select Edit Bridges.
3. Click and drag the endpoints of the bridges to the desired locations.

 Bridges cannot be moved on top of the entry/exit points or other bridges.

4. Right-click and select Exit this tool to release the tool.

Editing Bridge Parameters

To edit the parameters of a bridge:
1. Select the toolpaths you want to edit.
2. From the Toolpath menu, select Edit Bridges.
3. Right-click and select Edit Bridge from the shortcut menu.

4. Set the Length and Height of the bridges to the desired values.
5. Check Apply to all bridges in selection to apply the changes to all the bridges in the
selected toolpaths.
6. Click OK.
7. Right-click and select Exit this tool to release the tool.

Inserting Bridges
To insert a bridge:
1. Select the toolpaths you want to edit.
2. From the Toolpath menu, select Edit Bridges.
3. Right-click and select Insert Bridges from the shortcut menu.
4. Click on the toolpaths to insert bridges using the current bridge parameters.
5. Right-click and select Exit this tool to exit the Insert Bridges tool.
6. Right-click and select Exit this tool to exit the Edit Bridges tool.

Page 158 Working with Toolpaths

Deleting Bridges
To delete a bridge:
1. Select the toolpaths you want to edit.
2. From the Toolpath menu, select Edit Bridges.
3. Right-click on a bridge and select Delete Bridge from the shortcut menu.
4. Right-click and select Exit this tool to exit the tool.

Deleting Toolpaths
Menu: Toolpath / Delete Toolpaths
Toolbar: Toolpath / Delete Toolpaths
The Delete Toolpaths tool allows you to delete all the toolpaths in a toolpath group. The original
contours in the toolpath group will remain.
To delete a toolpath:
1. Select the toolpaths you want to delete.

2. Click Delete toolpaths.

Working with Toolpaths Page 159

Page 160 Working with Toolpaths
9. Previewing Output

Simulating Output in 2D
Menu: Machining / Simulate 2D
Toolbar: Output / Simulate 2D
The Simulate 2D tool allows you to preview the output of your toolpaths in the order they will be sent
to the machine. This allows you to review the output before cutting it to make sure that the toolpaths
and their order are correct.

To simulate output of your design in 2D:

1. Click Simulate 2D.

Previewing Output Page 161

 2. In the Simulate 2D dialog, use the controls provided to play the simulation. The controls are
similar to those on a CD player or tape recorder:

 Hit the up and down arrow keys to speed up and slow down the simulation.
Rewind This button will rewind the simulation
to the beginning.
Draw next This will advance the simulation until
segment the next segment has been output.
Play This will start the simulation and allow
it to play until the end.
Next Lift This will advance the simulation to the
next tool lift.
Next Tool This will advance the simulation to the
next tool change.
Done This will end the simulation and close
the Simulate 2D dialog.
Order This button displays a Toolpath
Ordering dialog that is identical to the
one in the Output dialog.
Changes in Priority Ordering, Tool,
Strategy and Sort Method may all be
accomplished directly in the 2D
Simulation tool so that the effect of
any change may be viewed.

 After any ordering changes are made, be sure to click on the „Update Order‟ button so that
the changes are reflected in the output and simulation.
3. Click Done to end the simulation.

Page 162 Previewing Output

Simulating Output Using an Orthographic View
Menu: Machining / Simulate Ortho
Toolbar: Machining / Simulate Ortho
The Simulate Ortho tool displays an animated orthographic view
of the path each tool will take and the order in which it will cut. If
you see that you have made an error in the toolpath or the order
of the cut, you have the opportunity to make corrections.

To simulate output of your design using an orthographic view:

1. Click Simulate Ortho.

2. In the Simulate Ortho dialog, use the controls provided to play the simulation. The controls
are similar to those on a CD player or tape recorder:

 Hit the up and down arrow keys to speed up and slow down the simulation.
Rewind This button will rewind the simulation to the beginning.

Draw next This will advance the simulation until the next segment has been
segment output.
Pause This will stop the simulation.

Next Lift This will advance the simulation to the next tool lift.

Next Tool This will advance the simulation to the next tool change.

Done This will end the simulation and close the Simulate 2D dialog.

Order This button displays a Toolpath Ordering dialog that is identical to

the one in the Output dialog.
Changes in Priority Ordering, Tool, Strategy and Sort Method
may all be accomplished directly in the 2D Simulation tool so that
the effect of any change may be viewed.

Previewing Output Page 163

 After any ordering changes are made, be sure to click on the „Update Order‟ button so that the
changes are reflected in the output and simulation.
3. Click Done to end the simulation.

Create Rendered View of Toolpaths

Menu: Machining / Simulate 3D
Toolbar: Machining / Simulate 3D
This tool displays a
rendered solid model
view of the results of
the toolpaths cutting
the material. It
accurately renders all
of the different tool
shapes, so you can
see the results of both
2D and 3D toolpaths.

To simulate output of your design using a rendered view:

1. Click Create Rendered Simulation of Toolpaths. This will open the Simulate Options
Dialog.
2. Enter the desire parameters below and then click OK.

 Resolution – Image resolution refers to the spacing of pixels in the image and is measured in
pixels per inch. The higher the resolution, the more pixels in the image. Higher resolutions allow
for more detail but will take longer to display.
Page 164 Previewing Output
 Material Color – The material color is the color of the relief. You can change this color by clicking
on the material color icon and choosing the color from the color chart.
 Cut Color – The cut color has three choices:
 Use tool color – The simulation will show using the colors assigned to each tool type
in the preferences section.
 Use Selected color – The selected color is shown to the right. This color can be
changed by clicking on the icon and selecting a new color from the chart.
 Use Material color – Select this parameter if you would like the simulation to be
shown using the material color
 Use selected contours as mask – Check this to use the selected contours as a mask for the area
that you want to simulate.
 Save simulation as relief – The simulation will be saved as a relief. The relief will be placed in the
plate.
 Simulation tolerance – The tolerance controls how closely the simulation will display to the relief
toolpaths.

3. In the Create Rendered Simulation dialog, use the controls provided to play the simulation.

 Hit the up and down arrow keys to speed up and slow down the simulation.
Rewind This button will rewind the simulation to the beginning.

Draw next This will advance the simulation until the next segment has
segment been output.
Pause This will start the simulation and allow it to play until the end.

Next Lift This will advance the simulation to the next tool lift.

Next Tool This will advance the simulation to the next tool change.

Done This will end the simulation and close the Simulate 2D dialog.

Order This button displays a Toolpath Ordering dialog that is identical

to the one in the Output dialog.
Changes in Priority Ordering, Tool, Strategy and Sort Method
may all be accomplished directly in the 2D Simulation tool so

Previewing Output Page 165

 that the effect of any change may be viewed.

 After any ordering changes are made, be sure to click on the „Update Order‟ button so that the
changes are reflected in the output and simulation.
4. Click Done to end the simulation.

 Be sure to activate the Rendered View icon .

Page 166 Previewing Output

 Image with rendered view activated.

Image without rendered view activated.

Previewing Output Page 167

Page 168 Previewing Output
10.Configuring the Software

Configuring Machine Drivers

Menu: Setup / Machine Setup
Toolbar: Libraries / Driver Setup
The Machine Drivers dialog is used to select the appropriate driver for your machine, and to
configure it, if necessary, to adjust specific parameters. The drivers will typically be located in a folder
called NDrivers, located in your program folder. The driver configuration files have a CNF extension,
along with a driver file with the same name, with either a PST or DLL extension. Any changes you
make to the driver configuration parameters are saved in the CNF file.

 After a driver for your machine is configured, it is not typically necessary to make changes to the
driver configuration unless something changes. The exception to this may be changes to the
tools loaded in your machine‟s tool changer if it is configured with one.
To set up a machine:

1. Click Driver Setup.

2. Select the driver for the machine from the Current Driver list.

 The Current Driver list displays the drivers which have been selected as active. If the driver
for your machine is not in the list, see “Selecting Active Drivers” for instructions on adding
the driver to the list.
3. Edit the driver parameters.
Configuring the Software Page 169
 Driver Description
Name The name of the driver file being edited.
Model The model name of the driver being edited.
Description The description provides a brief description of the driver, such as what
type of driver it is, or specifically what model of machine it has been
created for.
Driver Parameters
Width This provides the width dimension for the machine (typically the X-axis
of the machine.
Height This provides the height dimension for the machine (typically the Y-axis
of the machine).
Z Lift This gives the maximum Z-axis dimension, or thickness, of the machine.
Home Position This section defines what type of home definition is being provided,
including User Defined, Plate, Design, and Selection. It is most
typically defined as User Defined, which provides a specific location that
is not dependant on elements of the design. The coordinates of the
Home Position can also be defined, along with where that corresponds
to a location on the machine. After being originally specified in the driver,
these values are not typically changed.
Tool Changer The Tool Changer section specifies whether your machine has a tool
changer available, how many tools are present, and which specific tools
are available in the turret.
See “Configuring a Tool Changer” for details on setting up a tool
changer.
Drill Bank The Drill Bank section specifies whether your machine includes a Drill
Bank. A drill bank is a separate head that provides an array of drill tools
to drill a set of holes using a pre-configured spacing. A typical
application for a drill bank is to bore holes for shelf mounts as part of the
manufacture of cabinet parts.
See “Configuring a Drill Bank” for details on setting up a drill bank.

Driver Speeds This category contains a definition of the maximum and minimum
speeds that are possible with the current machine. They are based on
the physical capabilities of the machine, as well as practical values. This
will help ensure that you don‟t attempt to define speed values that are
not possible, or might damage the machine.
The units used in this category are based on the units that are specified
for the machine. Units are specified by machine manufacturers based on
the values that are used by their controllers, so it is not recommended to
change the speeds unless you know for sure that the change is
appropriate.
Spindle Speed This provides a default spindle speed that is used if no spindle speed is
provided in the output file.

Page 170 Configuring the Software

 Feed These are the feed rates that the machine moves in the X and Y-axes.
There are values specified for both „Within the material‟ and „Above the
material‟. The first refers to cut speeds while the tool is actually cutting
material, and the second refers to feed rates as the tool is moving
between toolpaths after it has lifted out of the material.
Plunge These are the speeds that the machine moves in the Z-axis, either as it
is moving down into the cut, or moving up out of the cut.
Dwell It is sometimes desirable for the tool to remain in one position for a short
period of time after it has plunged to a depth. This allows the tool to
remove chips properly before it begins its cut.
Driver Units These are the units that are expected by the machine controller for any
values it receives. As described above, these values are most often
defined by the machine manufacturer and should not be changed by
users unless you know for sure that the change is appropriate.
The values are specified for Length, Speed and Time. If you make
changes to these values and then decide that the changes are not
correct, you can click on the „Use defaults‟ check box to return the
values to their original values.
Communication The communication parameters are used when the software is used to
Parameters send output directly to a machine. These values are configured to match
the parameters specified for communicating with the machine.
These parameters specify how information regarding distance and
angles is converted into machine movements.
 Please note that many machine controllers are not designed to
receive files directly from the software. If you are not sure how to
communicate directly with your machine, check with the
manufacturer to find out what communication parameters are
appropriate, and whether it is possible to send files using this
method.

 Do Not Change these values unless you know for sure that the
changes are correct. If the values are specified incorrectly it will
make it so that output will be misinterpreted so that distances and
speeds will not be correct.

4. Click OK.

Configuring the Software Page 171

Selecting Active Drivers
The list of active drivers in the Current Driver list should list all of the machines commonly used with
the software at your location.

Adding an Active Driver

To add a machine to the list of active drivers:
1. Click on the Active Drivers button at the bottom of the Machine Setup dialog.

2. In the Active Drivers dialog, select the manufacturer of the machine from the Manufacturers
list.
3. Click on the arrow on the right end of the manufacturer listing to open a list of their available
machine drivers.
4. Select the machine you want to add to the active drivers list from the list of machines.
5. Click OK.

Removing an Active Driver

To remove a driver from the list of active drivers:
1. Click on the Active Drivers button at the bottom of the Machine Setup dialog.
2. Select the driver in the Active Drivers list.
3. Click the Remove button.
4. Click OK.
Removing a driver from the Active Drivers list does not delete it from the Manufacturers list.

Page 172 Configuring the Software

Configuring a Tool Changer
To set up a tool changer:
1. Click the Auto tool changer check box in the machine parameters list of the Machine Setup
dialog.

 The Number of Tools and Edit Tools parameters appear after the Auto Tool changer box is
checked.
2. Under Edit Tools, click on the Click to Edit text to open the Tool Changer Definition window:

3. To add a tool to the list of tools in the turret:

4. Select the tool that is in the position you want the new tool to occupy.
5. Click Add Tool. The new tool is added to the list in the selected location, and the existing
tools are moved down to make room for it.
6. Using the pull-down list for the new tool, select the type of tool that is loaded in that position
in the turret.
7. To edit a tool, select a new type of tool from the pull-down list.
8. To move a tool, click twice on the gray row indicator to the left of the tool listing, and then
drag it to the new position in the list. The numbering of the tools will be adjusted to reflect the
new position.
9. To remove a tool from the list, select that tool and click Remove Tool.
10. To remove all of the tools from the list, click Empty Turret.
11. When you have completed editing the Tool Changer Definition dialog, click OK to save the
changes, or Cancel to discard your changes and go back to the Machine Drivers dialog.

 Any changes you made to the number of tools in the turret will be reflected in the Number of
tools parameter.

Configuring the Software Page 173

Configuring a Drill Bank
To configure a drill bank:
1. Check the Has drill bank parameter in the machine parameters list in the Machine Setup
dialog.
2. Click on Click to Edit to open the Define Drill Bank dialog.

3. Set Number to the number of drill tools that are present on your machine.
4. For each drill tool in your drill bank:
5. Select the type of Drill Tool that is loaded into that position from the pull-down list provided.

 If a tool that is loaded into your machine is not present in the pull-down list, it will need
to be entered into the Tool Library before you can set up the machine properly. See
“Editing the Tool Library”, p. 176 for details.
6. Define the X, Y, and Z location of the tool.

 This location is based on the configuration of the machine you are using. It may be
necessary to obtain this information from the manufacturer of your machine. This
configuration is used to create the final output, so it is very important that the
orientation and position of the tools is defined correctly.

Page 174 Configuring the Software

 7. After completing the configuration of the drill bank, click on OK to close this dialog. When you
click on OK to exit the Machine Drivers dialog, the drill bank configuration you defined will be
saved in the driver configuration file.
After you define the layout of your drill bank, you can disable the drill bank in the driver without
deleting the layout. Then when you enable the drill bank again, the parameters you defined before
will still be present.

 It is important to verify that the driver you are using is capable of using a drill bank. Not all the
drivers have been modified to enable them to issue the correct output commands. If you are
unsure, please check first with the manufacturer of your machine and then with SA International
technical support if necessary to find out whether your driver is capable of using drill banks.

Editing the Material Library

Menu: Setup / Material Library
Toolbar: Libraries / Material Library
The Material Library command is used to define the cut speeds for the different types of materials
(wood, metal, etc.) that you are routing or engraving. When you use the Define Plate command you
can select a Material Type to be associated with the plate. The software will then update the plate
information to include the cutting speeds associated with the material you select. Material definitions
are written to the MaterialLibrary.ini file located in the folder where the software was installed.

 Some machines and/or drivers may not support the speeds defined in the Material Library. The
driver for the machine will override speeds that are defined to be too fast for the machine.

Adding a Material to the Library

Menu: Setup / Material Library
Toolbar: Libraries / Material Library

1. Click Material Library.

2. Click New.
3. Enter the parameters for the new material.

Configuring the Software Page 175

 Name The name of the material.
Direction Select the direction in which the tool will cut across the plate.
Conventional Left to right milling.
Climb Right to left milling.
Feed The speed at which the cutting tool moves through the material
(machining or cutting speed).
Plunge The speed at which the tool moves down into the material.
Dwell The amount of time to wait once the cutting tool has moved down into the
material. This is used to make sure the tool is all the way into the material
before it starts routing or engraving. It is also useful if there is a concern
about chip removal.
Spindle The speed at which the tool will spin.
4. Click Save.

Deleting a Material from the Library

Menu: Setup / Material Library
Toolbar: Libraries / Material Library

1. Click Material Library.

2. Select the material from the Name list.
3. Click Delete.

 If you change your mind after deleting a material, click on the Reload button to reload the
Material Library from the file. The material is not permanently deleted until the Material
Library has been saved.
4. Click Save.

Editing the Tool Library

Menu: Setup / Tool Library
Toolbar: Libraries / Tool Library
The Tool Library stores the list of all cutting tools which have been defined for the software. New
tools can be added to the tool library if needed.

Adding a New Tool to the Tool Library

1. Click Tool library.

Page 176 Configuring the Software

 2. Click on the New button.
3. Enter a Tool Name for the new tool.
4. Select the Tool Type that best fits the tool being added.
5. Click OK.
6. Select the newly created tool from the list in the tool library dialog.
7. Edit the parameters of the new tool in the fields at the bottom of the tool library dialog.
8. Save the changes in the tool library (see “Saving the Tool Library” below).

 If you are creating tool definitions for tongue and groove joining tools, create them as end mill
tools. Give the tongue bit a diameter equal to the outer diameter of the bit, and the groove bit a
diameter equal to its inner diameter.

Deleting a Tool from the Tool Library

Menu: Setup / Tool Library
Toolbar: Libraries / Tool Library

1. Click Tool library.

2. Select the tool you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK.

Configuring the Software Page 177

Saving the Tool Library
Saving the Default Tool Library
To save the default tool library including any changes:
5. Click Save.

6. Check the Save as default tool library box.

7. Click Save.

Saving a Custom Tool Library

A custom tool library may be designed to fit an individual user or a specific job.
1. Open the Tool library.
2. Edit the library so that it contains the tools to be included in this library.
3. Click Save.
4. Enter the name of the new library to be created.
5. Make sure the Save as default tool library box is cleared.
6. Click Save.

Opening a Tool Library

Tool libraries are stored by name in the folder the software was installed into. They may be loaded at
any time.

1. Click Tool library.

2. Click Open.

Page 178 Configuring the Software

 3. Place a check mark in the box of the tool library you wish to open.
4. Select one of the following options:
 Select Open as a New Library box is selected; the tools in the selected library will replace
the current entries in the tool library.
 If the Add to current Library box is selected, the tools in the selected library will be added
to the current entries in the tool library.
5. Click Open.

 The default tool library is saved in a file called „Toollibrary.ini‟. This library is automatically
opened when EnRoute loads. If you want specific tools to load every time, then save these tools
as entries in the default tool library.

Configuring the Software Page 179

Page 180
11.Output to Machine

Setting the Toolpath Order

Menu: Machining / Order
Toolbar: Machining / Order
The Toolpath Ordering dialog allows you to review and edit the order assigned to the toolpath groups
in your project. The toolpath order influences the order in which cuts will be made when the project is
output.

Ordering Toolpath Groups Manually

To manually adjust the order of the toolpath groups:

1. Click Order.
2. Use the horizontal blue arrow buttons to select the toolpaths.

 The selected toolpath is indicated with a bold red number.

3. Use the vertical green arrow buttons to change the cut number of the selected toolpath.
4. When finished, click OK.

 Clicking the horizontal and vertical arrow keys on your keyboard produces the same results as
clicking on the blue & green arrow buttons.

Ordering Toolpaths Using the Mouse

To order the toolpath groups manually using the mouse:

1. Click Order.
2. Click Manual.
3. Click on each toolpath in the desired order.
Output to Machine Page 181
Ordering Toolpath Groups Using Sorting Methods
To determine the toolpath order using an automatic sorting method:

4. Click Order.
5. Select the sorting method from the Current Sort Method list. The available methods are:

Shortest The toolpath will be sorted to produce the shortest overall set of toolpaths and
movements.
Rows The toolpaths will be sorted by ordering them into rows starting from the bottom of
the plate. Numbering within rows runs from left to right.
Columns The toolpaths will be sorted by ordering them into columns running from left to
right. Numbering within columns runs from bottom to top.
Inside Out The toolpaths will be sorted by position from the center of the plate to the edges.
Outside In The toolpaths will be sorted by position from the edges of the plate to the center.
6. Click OK.

Generating Output
Menu: Machining / Output
Toolbar: Output / Output Options
The goal of virtually all the work you do in the software is creating toolpaths that will then be used to
create an output file, or be sent directly to your router, engraver, or milling machine. After toolpaths
have been created, the Output dialog determines which toolpaths will be sent, their order, and a
number of other aspects of the output process.

Click Output.

Page 182 Output to Machine

Generating output consists of the following steps:
1. Selecting the machine driver to use when outputting the design.
2. Determining the cutting order of the cuts that make up the design.
3. Selecting output parameters.
4. Outputting the design either to the Output Control Center or a file.

 Sending output can be as simple as opening the Output dialog and then clicking either To File or
To Machine. The machine driver, cutting order options and output parameters are there to
provide flexibility, not to make the process more complicated.

Selecting the Machine Driver

Click Driver to select the desired machine driver from the Driver Configuration dialog. For details on
the Driver Configuration dialog, see “Configuring Machine Drivers”.

Determining the Cutting Order

The order in which the cuts are made determines the amount of time that it will take to output a
finished piece. The software determines the cutting order based on a number of different parameters.

 It is not necessary to make any changes to the Ordering Options in order to successfully
generate output. The default ordering options are sufficient to generate a high-quality finished
piece. They only need to be changed if you want to fine-tune the process.

Output to Machine Page 183

The ordering options can be set using the Ordering Options list and its related buttons. The buttons
cause the list to display ordering options at four different levels:
 Priority is the highest level, and allows you to set the priority levels of the major parameters
relative to each other.
 Tool Order sets the relative priority of the various types of tools used in the cutting passes.
 Strategy Order sets the relative priority of the various strategies present in the design.
 Sort Method sets which of the different automatic toolpath sorting methods is in use.
 Small Part First – Check this box if you would like the small parts to cut out first.
 Maintain Grouping – Check this box to treat group objects as one in reference to the cut order.

 Reset Parameters using Preferences - Click here to reset the Parameters using the
Preferences.

 Save Current Parameters to Preferences – Click here to save the current parameters to
the Preferences.

 You can also access the Ordering Options table from the 2D Simulation and Ortho Simulation
tools. This allows you to make changes to the ordering options, and then immediately see how
they will affect that final output. Changes you make to the ordering options in 2D Simulation and
Ortho Simulation will be carried over to the Output dialog.

Setting the Priority

Clicking on the Priority button displays the Priority Order list, which lists the following parameters
that can be used to sort the cuts in the design:
Tool The type of cutting too used to make the cut.
Object The object that the cut forms a part of. An object in this context means a separate
piece that will be cut from the plate.
Strategy The strategy to which the cut belongs.

Page 184 Output to Machine

 Bundle The bundle to which the cut belongs. Bundles are groups of toolpaths that make up a
cutting pass.
Pass The cutting pass to which the cut belongs.

For example, if the priorities are in the order listed above, the cuts will be sorted first by the type of
tool they use, then by the individual contours to which the cuts of each tool type belong.

Reordering the Priority List Entries

Entries in the list can be reordered by dragging them up or down in the list. Click on the row header
on the left edge of the entry to select it, then drag the entry up or down by the header.

Setting the Priority to Minimize Tool Changes

The default Priority is designed to minimize tool changes in the output:
1. Tool
2. Object
3. Strategy
4. Bundle
5. Pass
If your output uses two tools, say a ¼” end mill and a 90-degree conic, all of the toolpaths associated
with the first tool would come first, followed by all of the toolpaths associated with the second tool.

Setting the Priority to Cut Each Object Completely Before Continuing

There may be times when minimizing tool changes is not the most important thing to you. For
example, the output may contain a number of toolpath groups and it is more important that you cut
out each piece one at a time in order to allow you to progress with other work in the shop. In that
case, you may want to move „Object‟ to the top of the priority list. If each object (toolpath group) uses
both the ¼” end mill and the 90-degree conic from the example above, there would be a tool change
required as each object cuts out. This might increase the number of tool changes significantly, but it
would allow you to get finished pieces off the table before the entire job is complete.

Returning to the Default Priority Settings

Click Default Order to return the Priority settings to their default order.

Setting the Tool Order

Clicking the Tool Order button displays the Tools list, which lists the priorities assigned to the
different tool types used in the design. These settings are used to sort the cuts by tool type in the
Tool stage of the sorting process.
For example, if a ¼” end mill tool will be used to cut separate pieces out of the plate, you should
make that tool the lowest priority so that any other cuts that need to be made to the piece will be
made before it is separated from the plate.

Reordering Tools
Drag the tool entries up and down in the list to assign their priorities. Click on the row header on the
left edge of the entry to select it, then drag the entry up or down by the header.

Output to Machine Page 185

Defining Tools as Unused
Clearing the check box in the Use column to the right of a tool will prevent any cuts that use that tool
from being output.

Setting the Strategy Order

Clicking the Strategy Order button displays the Strategies list, which lists the priorities assigned to
the different toolpath strategies that appear in the design. These settings are used to sort the cuts by
strategy in the Strategy stage of the sorting process.
For example, if you used the same contours to create both male and female Routing Offset toolpaths
for an inlay job, you would not want to send both strategies to the machine at the same time,
because you would use different material to cut out the male offset than you would for the female
offset. So, you would move one of the strategies lower on the list, or even mark it unused.
Drag the strategy entries up and down in the list to assign their priorities. Click on the row header on
the left edge of the entry to select it, then drag the entry up or down by the header.

Defining Strategies as Unused

Clearing the check box in the Use column to the right of a strategy will prevent any cuts from that
strategy from being output.

Setting the Toolpath Sort Method

Clicking the Sort Method button displays the Sort Methods list, which allows you to select a sorting
method that will be used to automatically order the toolpath groups in the design. This is exactly the
same as the ordering that can be done using the Order Toolpaths dialog.
If you have already ordered the toolpath groups manually, none of the methods will be checked.
If you check a method, it will automatically be applied to the toolpath groups in your design.
For details on the various sorting methods, see “Setting the Toolpath Order”.

Selecting Output Parameters

The following output parameters are available:

Which toolpaths Select one of the following options:

All toolpaths All toolpaths will be output.
Selected only Only the currently selected toolpaths will be output.
Depth Select one of the following options:
All Toolpaths at all depths will be output.
[Specific Depth] Only the cut passes at the specified depth will be output. This might
be done to finish a job that had been interrupted near its end, for
instance.
Orientation Allows you to output the toolpaths rotated by some increment of 90
degrees. Select 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees.
Copies This option is not implemented at this time. Leave it at 1.

Page 186 Output to Machine

 Hold Output If you are sending the output to a machine through the Output Control
Center, this option tells the OCC to hold the output in a queue so that
you can send the queue of jobs to the machine when you are ready.

Outputting the Design

Outputting the Design to a File
To output the design to a file:
1. Click To File.
2. In the standard Windows Save As dialog that opens, specify the file name for the output file
and click OK.

Outputting the Design to a Machine

To output the design to a machine, click To Machine.
The design will be created as a job in the Output Control Center queue for the selected machine.

Using Output Control Center to Manage Output

The Output Control Center (OCC) is used to communicate and manage your plotter, engraver and
large format printer files.

The left side of the dialog displays the queues for all of the machines that have been set up. Clicking
on the plus sign next to the queue expands it to show the Done queue for that machine.
When you select a queue from the left side, the right side will display any jobs that are queued to be
sent to this machine. The following information is displayed for each job:

Job The file name of the design that is being output.

Status The current status of the job:
Ready The job is ready to process
Hold The job is being held (the Hold Job parameter was selected when it was
output).

Output to Machine Page 187

 Processing The job is being output on the machine. A percentage of the job that has
been output is displayed.
Error There was some error when communicating with the machine.
Size The size of the job file.
Date The date the job was sent on.
Time The time the job was sent.
Computer The computer the job was sent from.

Outputting Jobs
When you choose the Plot or RIP Print command, Inspire places a “job” in the queue folder of the
target machine. The jobs are placed in the queue one after the other, in the order of their arrival.
The OCC automatically sends the jobs to the machine for output. The jobs are automatically sent in
the order they are received.

Held Jobs
The Output dialog has a parameter called Hold Job. If you choose this parameter, the job will be
created and placed in the queue, but it will not be processed and output until you release it using the
Release command.

Holding Jobs
To hold a job that is currently in the output queue:
1. Select the job.
2. From the Job menu select Hold.

Releasing Held Jobs

To release a held job:
1. Select the job.
2. From the Job menu select Release.

Using the Done Queue to Repeat Output

Each machine‟s queue has a sub-queue called Done. When a job has been processed and output, it
is moved to the Done queue, and the OCC starts processing the next job. Jobs in the Done queue
can be sent to the machine to be output again. The main advantage of this is that the jobs do not
need to be processed a second time, which can save time for large and complex jobs.
To output a job from the Done queue:
1. Select the job.
2. From the Job menu select ReEngrave.
You can control the number of jobs kept in the Done queue through the Options command.

Page 188 Output to Machine

Aborting Processing of a Job
To abort processing of a job:
1. Select the job.
2. From the Job menu select Abort.

Deleting Jobs
To delete a job from a queue:
1. Select the job.
2. From the Job menu select Delete.
3. Click OK to confirm deletion.

Output to Machine Page 189

Page 190 Output to Machine
12.3D Surfaces and 3D Toolpaths
Menu: Surface
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces

Introduction
EnRoute Pro introduces a
number of new concepts for
creating designs and the
toolpaths to cut out these
designs. All of the previous
functions have been oriented
around working with two-
dimensional (2D) geometry, and
then creating either 2D or
engraving toolpaths based on
the 2D geometry. The Pro
functions provide the ability to
create three-dimensional (3D)
surfaces and then create 3D
toolpaths associated with these
surfaces. The surfaces you
create are compatible with all of
the other design elements, and
the working environment is no
different than the environment
for the 2D design. This allows
you to easily utilize whatever type of design and toolpath strategy is most appropriate for your
application.
This chapter provides a brief introduction to the concept of 3D surfaces, and then subsequent
chapters provide detailed information on creating surfaces, manipulating and combining surfaces,
and then creating toolpaths to machine these surfaces.

3D Surface Applications
There are certainly countless ways in which 3D surfaces can be utilized in commercial applications.
The EnRoute Pro tools are designed primarily as creative tools, making them most useful for
applications that require creative designs. This includes woodworking and woodcarving, signs,
jewelry, mold-making, and any other application that requires creative design tools.
While EnRoute‟s 3D tools can be used to create precise surfaces, their primary application is not
considered to be in creating 3D engineered parts for mechanical applications.

3D Surfaces and 3D Toolpaths Page 191

Creating 3D Surfaces
EnRoute provides an array of tools that are used to create 3D surfaces, which are referred to as
Reliefs. Reliefs are created and modified using both 2D contours and 3D mesh objects. 2D
Contours are used to sweep and spin profiles and cross sections and to extrude shapes to create
surfaces. 3D mesh objects can be created in EnRoute, and then applied to reliefs to create a
finished surface. EnRoute also allows you to import a number of different file formats, so mesh
objects that are created in other applications can be used too.

Creating Output for 3D Surfaces

3D toolpaths are created in much the same way as 2D toolpaths in EnRoute. Hatch Fills and Island
Fills are the most common strategy types that are used with reliefs, but other strategies like routing
offsets and engraving can also be effectively used to machine a surface. When these strategies are
used with a relief, some additional parameters become necessary to define how the toolpaths should
be created. Otherwise, the process is the same as the processes defined in Chapter 6. Creating 3D
toolpaths is discussed in detail in Chapter 19.

Page 192 3D Surfaces and 3D Toolpaths

13.Creating Reliefs

Creating a Relief
Menu: Surface / Create Relief
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Create Relief
The first step in working with surfaces is to create a relief, which can then be modified, and used to

create 3D toolpaths. Click Create Relief.

This will activate the Precision Toolbar for creating a relief. This dialog provides several parameters
that allow you to create and modify reliefs in many different ways. The following sections provide a
description of the parameters and how they affect the resulting relief.

Relief Shape Relief parameters

Relief Options Preview Relief angle

Application Method

Relief Shape
There are three basic shapes available to use for creating a relief. They provide the starting point for
creating all of the different surfaces available in EnRoute.

Round
The round relief uses the relief angle to create a surface that is similar to a
flexible surface that has been inflated. It can be used by itself to create
rounded organic shapes, and it can also be effectively used to modify other
surfaces.

Creating Reliefs Page 193

Beveled
The beveled option creates a surface that is similar to the shape of a surface
that is created by using Pyramid toolpaths. EnRoute creates this type of
surface by extending a flat surface up from the perimeter of the selected
contour to the „center‟ of the shape where it meets a surface extended up
from the other side of the shape. This is a complex operation, but EnRoute
handles all of the computations, and all that is required is to provide the angle
of the surface.

Flat
The flat option is used to create a simple flat surface. This option is used
primarily as a means of creating a surface that can then be modified using
other relief tools such as the sweeping and extrusion tools. By specifying a
Height of 0.00, the flat surface is created at the height of the contours. If a
height is specified, then the flat surface is created above that contours by
that amount, as shown in the adjacent image.

Relief Options
The relief options allow you to modify the basic relief shapes to create different surface shapes. So,
for a given relief shape, such as Round, you have the following four different options that allow you to
modify how that shape is created.

Normal
This is the default option that is described in the previous Relief Shape section. The key
distinguishing characteristic of this option is that the relief shape, either round or beveled, is created
based on the specified angle. The height of the relief is defined based on the width of the surface at
each location. As the surface becomes wider or narrower, its height is greater or smaller accordingly.
The following images illustrate this option for both round and beveled relief shapes.

Page 194 Creating Reliefs

Constant Height
The Constant Height option changes the way that round and beveled shapes are created. Instead of
using a relief angle to define the relative steepness of the surface, you define a height for the relief,
and the surface is created to match that height. This option creates a surface that can be described
as more mechanical looking. The way that it varies from the Normal option is most apparent in areas
where different parts of a relief merge together. The following two graphics illustrate this option.

Scale to Height
This option is a variation of the Normal option. Using this option first creates the surface using the
Normal option, and then the relief is scaled vertically so that its height matches the specified height.
It comes in handy when you want to create normal relief, but you also want it to be a specific height.
It is also a way to create surfaces that are subtly different by specifying different angles and the same
height.
The following images show a relief that was created using the Scale to Height option. The relief on
the left used a relief angle of 85 degrees and the relief on the left used an angle of 15 degrees. The
height of each relief is the same, but the shape of each relief is different because of the different
angle.

Creating Reliefs Page 195

Limit to Height
This option is also a variation of the Normal option. The relief is first created using the normal option,
and then it is cut off at the specified height. It is useful is cases where you want to create a relief that
has rounded or beveled profile up to a certain height, and then a flat top surface.
The following graphic shows a relief that uses a rounded shape that is limited to a height that is about
half the height that it would have been if it wasn‟t limited. This is an option that will not likely be used
very often, but it can be useful for specific applications.

Application Method
The application method defines how the application of a relief modifies the surface. The terms for
each option are descriptive of how the relief will be modified.

 The Application Method is a concept that is common throughout all of the relief creation tools.
The way that the concept is used is consistent for each of these tools.

Add
This is the option that will likely be used most
often. It is used to create a raised relief. If you
are modifying an existing relief, the surface will be
raised using the selected contours and
parameters specified for the relief.
The following image shows an example of a relief
created using the Add option.
In this image, the top surface was created using
the Add option on an elliptical contour.
The bottom surface was created by adding the letters to an existing relief surface. This was
accomplished by selecting the relief and the contours for the letters and then applying the relief
function.

Page 196 Creating Reliefs

Subtract
This option is used to create a recessed
relief. It can either be applied to contours to
create new recessed reliefs, or using
contours to modify an existing relief. If an
existing relief is to be modified, it should be
selected along with whatever contours are to
be used to modify it.
The following graphic shows the effect of the
subtract option.
The top portion of the image shows
individual contours that were used to create
individual reliefs. The bottom elliptical relief
was modified using the same contours and
the subtract option.

Merge Highest
This option is most effective when it is used to modify an existing relief. It can be used when creating
a new relief, but the effect will be the same as the Add option. When it is used to modify a relief, the
new portion of the relief only modifies the existing relief where it is higher than the existing relief.
This is best illustrated with a simple
example, as shown in the following
image.
In this example, the top letter was
created using the Merge Highest option.
Notice that it is the same as if it was
created using the Add option.
The bottom portion of the image shows
an existing elliptical relief that was
modified using the same contour. The
key thing to notice is that the relief was
only modified where the relief created by
the new contour was taller than the
existing relief.

 Note that if you are creating a new

relief, the Add, Merge Highest and
Replace options will all create the
same result.

Creating Reliefs Page 197

Merge Lowest
The Merge Lowest option is similar to Merge Highest, except that a relief is only modified where the
new relief is lower than the existing relief. This option is a little less intuitive than the Merge Highest
option. Essentially, wherever a relief would not be modified by a Merge Highest option, it would be
modified by a Merge Lowest option.
The following graphic demonstrates how a
contour can be used to modify an existing relief
using this option.
The top portion of the image shows the result
of using this option to create a new relief. Note
that the result is a flat relief. This result is
caused by the fact that a flat surface is the
lowest surface over the entire area of the relief,
so that is the result. This indicates that this
option should not be used when creating new
reliefs.
The bottom image demonstrates the result of
modifying an existing relief using the same
contour. The relief is modified only in areas
where the new profile is lower than the existing
relief. In areas where the new profile is higher than the existing relief, the existing relief is not
modified. This option will likely be appropriate only in special applications.

 Note that using the Merge Lowest option to create a new relief will result in a flat surface being
created.

Replace
The Replace option is also used primarily
to modify an existing relief. If it is used to
create a new relief, the result is the same
as the Add option. When it is used to
modify a relief, the applied profile takes
the place of the existing relief wherever
the new profile overlaps the existing
profile.
The following image shows the result of
the Replace option used to create and
modify a relief.
In this image, the top letter was created
as a new relief. The bottom relief was
modified using the contour of the letter.
You can see that the relief created by the
letter takes the place, or replaces, the
existing relief.

Page 198 Creating Reliefs

Relief Parameters
Height
The Height parameter is used to define the height of the relief that is created when appropriate for
the selected relief option. A height is used for the Constant Height, Scale to Height, and Limit to
Height options. The entered value uses the active units.
EnRoute enables and disables this parameter based on the Relief Option selected, so when it is not
necessary for a value to be entered, this parameter is disabled. When the Normal option is selected,
the relief is defined using the angle parameter, so the height is not needed.

Resolution
This parameter is used by EnRoute when a new relief is being created with this command. The
Resolution is specified in „dots per inch‟ (dpi) regardless of the units that are selected. So, even if
you are operating EnRoute with active unit of millimeters, this parameter is still specified in dpi.
The resolution of the relief defines the size of the grid units that make up the relief. A relief is a
gridded surface and when a relief is created, it is necessary to define how large each grid unit should
be. If a resolution of 100 dpi is selected, then each grid unit will be 1/100 inches wide and tall.
Therefore, the level of detail for the information on that relief will be limited 0.01 inch. This resolution
is typically adequate for most surfaces in EnRoute, unless you are creating a small object that
requires more detail.

Creating Reliefs Page 199

The thing to remember is that reliefs in your drawing require memory that is directly related to the
size of the relief and its resolution. As you increase the size of a relief, it requires more memory. If
two reliefs are the same size and one relief is 100 dpi and the other 200 dpi, the second relief will
require four times the amount of memory as the first. You can see that this is an important
consideration when defining a relief. In general, you should define as low a resolution for a relief as
will accommodate the level of detail for that relief.

Base
The Base parameter allows you to move the relief surface up, creating vertical sides on the portion of
the relief that you are modifying. If you are creating a new relief, a base dimension will create vertical
sides around the perimeter of the relief.
This parameter will likely be most useful when you are modifying an existing relief and would like to
include vertical sides around the portion you are modifying. If you are creating a new relief and want
it to have vertical sides, it is possible to move it vertically to position it in the plate so that when it is
cut out the parts will have the correct height of vertical edges.
The following image shows two reliefs that include base dimensions. The top relief was created with
a rounded profile and a base dimension to create the vertical sides on the letter. The bottom image
was a relief that was modified to add the letter with the base dimension.

Page 200 Creating Reliefs

Angle
The Angle parameter is used to define Round and Beveled reliefs when the Normal relief option is
selected. Both positive and negative angles may be used between 0 and 90. With beveled reliefs,
the angle defines the angle of the bevel. With round reliefs, the angle defines the angle of a line
tangent to the circle that defines relief. If an angle of 90 degrees is used with a round relief, a semi-
circle is used to create the relief.
The preview drawing in the dialog shows a small preview of the relief shape based on the angle that
is defined. The angle can be entered directly into the edit box, or the spinner arrows can be used to
define the angle, and there is also a slider bar that can be used to define the angle.
The following graphic show how different effects can easily be achieved just by using different
angles. Relatively flat surfaces such as those on the left are created by using small angles, and
more dramatic surfaces are created by using larger angles such as those on the right.

 When the Constant Height relief option is selected, the Angle parameter is disabled because it is
not used in this option.

Creating Reliefs Page 201

Using the Relief Dialog
Now that the options and parameters have been introduced in the previous sections, the next task is
to use the Relief creation tool to create and modify a relief. This section includes a presentation of
the steps required to create a relief using just this tool.
The following graphic shows some simple 2D artwork that is used to create the relief example. To
repeat this example, you can create an ellipse and some contour artwork similar to the „fleur‟ shown
in this example.

1. Create your 2D artwork. In

this example, create an
ellipse and center artwork
like the fleur. The ellipse is
approximately 8 inches tall
by 6.5 inches wide (200mm
x 116mm).

2. Select the ellipse and offset

it with a 0.5 inch inline and a
0.01 inch outline.

Page 202 Creating Reliefs

 3. Select the original ellipse.
This will be used to create
the base relief.
4. Click on the Create Relief
icon, or select the Surface
menu and Create Relief.

5. Select the Flat relief option.

6. Select the Add option.

7. Define the parameters to

Height = 0.00, Base = 0.00
and Resolution = 100 and
select the Normal relief type.

8. Click Apply to get the

following result. Click the
Rendered Icon to toggle
to the rendered view of the
relief on and off.

9. Now select the relief and the

two offset ellipses that were
created in Step 2. (Toggle
the rendered view off in
order to select the ellipses).
10. Select the Round relief
option.

11. Select the Add Option and

leave the relief type on
Normal.
12. Set the Angle to 50 degrees.

Creating Reliefs Page 203

 13. Click Apply to create the
next step in the finished
relief.

14. Now select the relief and the

smaller ellipse.
15. Select the Round relief
option.

16. Select the Subtract

application method.

17. Set the Angle to 30 degrees.

18. Click Apply to create the
next portion of the relief.

19. Now select the relief and the

center artwork.
20. Select the Beveled option

21. Select the Add application

method.

22. Define the parameters to

Height = 0.30, Base = 0.00
and select the Constant
Height relief type.

Page 204 Creating Reliefs

 23. Click Apply to create the
finished relief.

As you can see, using just the Create Relief tool provides some very powerful capabilities for
creating finished reliefs in EnRoute. The following chapters discuss the many other tools EnRoute
provides for creating and modifying surfaces. The concepts presented in this chapter regarding
adding and subtracting reliefs are consistent throughout each of the other functions.

Creating Reliefs Page 205

Page 206
14.Revolutions and Extrusions

Introduction
The previous chapter provides the basic tools for creating relief surfaces. This chapter describes
additional tools that increase your ability to define intricate surfaces. These tools use revolutions and
extrusions to create meshed objects and modify selected relief surfaces.
When modifying reliefs, the concepts presented in the previous chapter regarding application
methods work identically with these tools. The primary new concept with these tools is that EnRoute
uses wizards to prompt you regarding the selection of appropriate contours to use to define how the
function is to be applied. After you understand how they work, they provide a flexible method for
completing each function.

Revolve
Menu: Surface / Create Surfaces / Revolve
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Revolve

The Revolve tool allows you to use one or more contours to revolve around an axis to either modify a
relief or to create a new mesh object, as illustrated in the following image.

Relief Surface

Mesh Object

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 207

Revolve Dialog
Selecting the Revolve icon , or selecting the Surface menu and then Create Surface and
Revolve, will activate the Revolve dialog. This dialog allows you to select the appropriate options
and parameters required to create the new surface.
The revolve dialog provides two sets of parameters depending on whether you have selected the
option of creating a mesh object, or any other application method for modifying an existing relief. If
you select an application method for modifying a relief, the following dialog is presented.

Relief parameters

Relief Options

Application Method to modify the selected relief

Angles for revolution Wizard prompts

Mesh Parameters

Application Method to create a mesh object

Application Method
All of the options for applying the results of the revolve operation are the same as the options
described in the previous chapter on relief creation. The options for Add, Subtract, Merge Highest,

Merge Lowest, and Replace all apply to the situation where the revolution is to
be applied to an existing relief. For this to be possible, it is necessary to select the relief to be
modified before starting the Revolve command.

The right-most application method option allows you to create a mesh object with the Revolve
command. As shown in the dialogs above, when this option is selected, the parameters required for
the command are different than when a relief is to be modified. When this option is selected, the
parameters change, providing space to enter the number of slices and stacks that will make up the
new object. These are described below, and the rest of the revolve command is the same whether
you are modifying a relief or creating a new mesh object.

Page 208 Revolutions and Extrusions

Relief Options
These options function similar to how they work in the relief creation tool. In this case you have three
options, Normal, Scale to Height, and Limit to Height.
 Normal – The revolved surface is created just as the selected profile and axis define it, without
any vertical scaling.
 Scale to Height – The revolved surface is scaled to match the height parameter as it is applied to
the relief. This allows you to create a revolved surface and scale it in one step.
 Limit to Height – The revolved surface is limited in height by the height parameter. If a portion of
the revolved surface extends above this height, it is truncated before it is applied to the selected
relief.

Relief Parameters
The relief parameters of Height and Base are available when modifying a relief.
 Height – This value defines the height if either the „Scale to Height‟ or „Limit to Height‟ relief option
is selected.
 Base – This value allows you to define a base height that can be added to the revolved surface as
it is applied to the selected relief.

Angles for Revolution

The Start Angle and Finish Angle define the portion of a complete 360-degree revolution that will
be completed. A complete revolution would have a start angle of 0 degrees and an end angle of 360
degrees. A half revolution would use a start angle of 0 degrees and an end angle of 180 degrees.
The following front view of a revolved mesh object illustrates the start and finish angles. This object
used a start angle of 45 degrees and an end angle of 135 degrees.

End Angle

Start Angle

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 209

Wizard Prompts
The Revolve tool requires more than one step in order to complete it. This portion of the dialog
contains an area that contains a prompt that tells you the next step required in order to complete the
function. It also contains buttons that allow you to move from step to step, back up a step, back up to
that start of the function, execute the function, or exit the function.
The first prompt asks you to ‘Select the contours to be revolved.’ After selecting one or more
contours, you can select the next step button, which will then prompt you to ‘Select the axis of
revolution (Optional)’. At this stage, you can either select a contour that will serve as the axis of
revolution, or select the execute button.
Following is a listing of each of the wizard buttons and its function.

Start Return to the start of the command

Back Go back one step

Next Go to the next step
Execute Execute the function

Cancel Cancel the function

Mesh Parameters
When the mesh option is selected, it activates parameters that are specific to this option. They
include the number of Slices and the number of Stacks that are to be used to create the mesh
object.
A mesh object is composed of triangles, or facets, that make up its surface. It is necessary to instruct
EnRoute regarding how many of these facets should be used to construct the object. The number of
Stacks is the number of sections that are used along the length of the profile that is revolved. The
Slices value is the number of sections that are used between the start and end angles.
The following graphic illustrates this concept. This object was created to resemble a pie, with each of
the pieces of the pie representing a slice, and the facets that make up each piece of the pie
representing the stacks. The profile of a piece of the pie was revolved around the center of the pie.

Page 210 Revolutions and Extrusions

Modify a Relief Surface
The first option is to use the Revolve tool to modify an existing relief surface. The advantage of this
option is that it takes care of creating the revolution and applying it to the relief in one step. Also, it
automatically takes care of creating a smooth surface without you having to specify any additional
parameters. The limitation of this option is that it does not allow you to modify the revolved surface
before applying it to the relief.
The following steps lead you through the process of creating a revolution to modify an existing relief.
1. Create your 2D artwork. In this
example, create an ellipse, a vertical
line, and a profile like the one shown.
The ellipse is approximately 8.5 inches
tall by 7.75 inches wide (215mm x
195mm).

2. Select the ellipse and use it to create a

round relief using an angle of 25
degrees.

3. Select the relief, and then select the

Revolve icon , or select the Surface
menu and then Create Surface/Revolve.
4. Click on the Add icon to select that
option

5. Select the Normal application method

6. Define a Start Angle of 0.0 and an End
Angle of 180.00
7. Click to select the profile contour you
want to revolve, and then click the Next
Step icon in the wizard.

8. Click on the vertical contour to identify

the axis of revolution. This step is
optional.

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 211

 9. Click on the Execute button to complete
the command.
10. The following shows a rendered
perspective view of the resulting relief.

Create a Mesh Surface

Creating a mesh surface using the Revolve tool is almost the same as using this tool to modify a
relief. Key differences are that it is not necessary to identify a relief to modify, you need to select the
mesh object option, and then you need to define the mesh parameters of slices and stacks. The
resulting mesh object can then be used to modify a relief, but first you can scale, rotate and position
the object so that when you add it to a relief it has the effect you need. You can also define the
number of slices and stacks, using the faceted nature of the object to your advantage.
The following steps illustrate the method of creating a mesh object using the Revolve tool.

1. Create your 2D artwork. In this

example, create a vertical line and a
profile like the one shown.

2. Select the Revolve icon , or select

the Surface menu and then Create
Surface/Revolve.
3. Click on the Mesh icon to select that
option

Page 212 Revolutions and Extrusions

 4. Define Slices = 32 and Stacks = 24
5. Define a Start Angle of 0.0 and an End
Angle of 180.00
6. Click to select the profile contour you
want to revolve, and then click the Next
Step icon in the wizard.

7. Click on the vertical contour to identify

the axis of revolution. (This step is
optional.)

8. Click on the Execute button to complete

the command.
9. The following shows the mesh object
like the one that will be created. This
object can then be scaled and rotated,
and then used to modify a relief.

Spin
Menu: Surface / Create Surfaces / Spin
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Revolve / Spin
The Spin Tool is quite similar to the Revolve Tool that was explained in the previous section. The
primary difference is that in the Spin tool, the selected contours are spun around the Z-axis, located
at a center of rotation by the user. In addition, there are a couple of options that are introduced in the
spin tool that give you some additional control over the shape of the resulting surface.
You have the option to apply a spin directly to a relief, or to create a mesh surface. As with this
option in other tools, when the spin is applied to a relief it is automatically smoothed and when you
create a mesh surface, the result is an object that can be modified further before applying it to a
relief.
With some careful planning, the spin tool can be used to create intricate and interesting surfaces.

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 213

Spin Dialog
Selecting the Spin icon , or selecting the Surface menu and then Create Surface and Spin, will
activate the Spin dialog. This dialog allows you to select the appropriate options and parameters
required to create the new surface.
The Spin dialog provides two sets of parameters depending on whether you have selected the option
of creating a mesh object, or any other application method for modifying an existing relief. If you
select an application method for modifying a relief, the following dialog is presented.
Relief Options
Relief parameters

Angles for spin

Wizard prompts
Application Method to modify the selected relief

If you select the Application Method for creating a mesh object, the dialog is changed to allow you
to enter the proper parameters for the mesh, and shown below.

Mesh Parameters

Angles for spin

Wizard prompts

Application Method to create a mesh object

Page 214 Revolutions and Extrusions

Application Method
All of the options for applying the results of the spin operation are the same as the options described
in the chapter on relief creation. The options for Add, Subtract, Merge Highest, Merge Lowest, and

Replace all apply to the situation where the revolution is to be applied to an

existing relief. For this to be possible, it is necessary to select the relief to be modified before starting
the Spin command.

The right-most application method option allows you to create a mesh object with the Spin
command. As shown in the dialogs above, when this option is selected, the parameters required for
the command are different than when a relief is to be modified. When this option is selected, the
parameters change, providing space to enter the number of slices and stacks that will make up the
new object. These are described below, and the rest of the Spin command is the same whether you
are modifying a relief or creating a new mesh object.

Relief Options
These options function similar to how they work in the relief creation tool. In this case you have three
options, Normal, Scale to Height, and Limit to Height.
 Normal – The new spin surface is created just as the selected profile and other options define it,
without any vertical scaling.
 Scale to Height – The new spin surface is scaled to match the height parameter as it is applied to
the relief. This allows you to create a surface and scale it in one step.
 Limit to Height – The new spin surface is limited in height by the height parameter. If a portion of
the new surface extends above this height, it is truncated before it is applied to the selected relief.

Relief Parameters
The relief parameters of Height and Base are available when modifying a relief.
 Height – This value defines the height if either the „Scale to Height‟ or „Limit to Height‟ relief option
is selected.
 Base – This value allows you to define a base height that can be added to the revolved surface as
it is applied to the selected relief.

Spin Angles
The Start Angle and Finish Angle define the portion of a complete 360-degree spin surface that will
be completed. A complete revolution would have a start angle of 0 degrees and an end angle of 360
degrees. A half revolution would use a start angle of 0 degrees and an end angle of 180 degrees.
The following top view of a mesh object illustrates the start and finish angles. This object used a
start angle of 45 degrees and an end angle of 135 degrees.

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 215

 End Angle

Start Angle

In addition to defining the start and end angles using the dialog, the Spin tool also allows you to
interactively define this angle by clicking and dragging on the circle that is used to define the center
of the spin. This circle is shown in the image below.

Click and drag to

change the spin angle

Mesh Parameters
When the mesh option is selected, it activates parameters that are specific to this option. They
include the number of Slices and the number of Stacks that are to be used to create the mesh
object.
A mesh object is composed of triangles, or facets, that make up its surface. It is necessary to instruct
EnRoute regarding how many of these facets should be used to construct the object. The number of
Slices is the number of sections that are used along the length of the profile that is spun. The
Stacks value is the number of sections that are used between the start and end angles.
The following graphic illustrates this concept. The same profile was used to create these objects.
The object on the left was created using more slices and fewer stacks, and the object on the right
was created using fewer slices and more stacks.

Slices = 24 Slices = 8
Stacks = 8 Stacks = 24

Page 216 Revolutions and Extrusions

Wizard Prompts
The Spin tool requires more than one step in order to complete it. This portion of the dialog contains
an area that contains a prompt that tells you the next step required in order to complete the function.
It also contains buttons that allow you to move from step to step, back up a step, back up to that start
of the function, execute the function, or exit the function.

Prompt

Buttons to change steps

The following table lists the prompts in the Spin tool, along with an explanation the appropriate
action.
Select the contours to spin This is the first step, and you are prompted to select the contours
you want to use as the profiles for the spin. Note that you can
select more than one profile contour to use.
Select the height control curve This optional step allows you to select another curve to use to
(Optional) modify the height of the spin surface.
Select the width control curve This optional step allows you to select another curve to use to
(Optional) modify the width of the surface as it is spun around the center
axis.

Following is a listing of each of the wizard buttons and its function.

Start Return to the start of the command

Back Go back one step

Next Go to the next step
Execute Execute the function

Cancel Cancel the function

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 217

Height Control Curve
The optional second step of the wizard gives you the option to identify a curve that will modify the
shape of the spun surface as it is created. This provides a creative tool that allows you to create a
surface that can be quite different that the one you would get without this option.
The following graphic shows two surfaces created using this tool. The surface on the left was
created using a Height Control Curve. The surface on the right used the same profile without using
this step.

The next graphic shows the contours that were used to create the surfaces above. The Height
Control Curve is a contour in EnRoute that is used to define the shape of how the surface is to be
modified.
After selecting the Height Control Curve, the Influence Line is automatically drawn along the
bottom of the curve. This line determines the amount of influence the Height Control Curve will
have on the spun surface. As you interactively drag the Influence Line away from the Height
Control Curve, the curve will have less influence on the spun surface as it is created.

Height Control Curve

Influence line. Click and drag it to

change the amount of influence of
the Height Control Curve

Spin Center/Spin Angle Circle

Profile contour

Page 218 Revolutions and Extrusions

Width Control Curve
The optional third step of the wizard works similarly to the second step, except now you have the
option of choosing a curve that will affect the width of the spun surface.
The following graphic shows two spun surfaces. The surface on the left was created using a Width
Control Curve, and the surface on the right did not use this option.

The optional steps to modify the surface can be used separately, or together to create surfaces. The
following image shows surfaces that were created using the same method, except for the use of
these optional steps.

With both With Width With Height

options Control Curve Control curve Just the profile

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 219

Modify a Relief Surface
This section provides a table with the steps necessary to create a spin surface using the option of
modifying an existing relief.
1. Create the 2D artwork. In this example,
create a circle and a contour you want
to use as the profile for the spin.

2. Select the circle and use it to create a

flat relief.

3. Select the relief, and then select the

Spin icon, or select the Surface
menu and then Create Surface/Spin.
4. Click on the Add icon to select that
option.

5. Select the Normal application method

6. Define a Start Angle of 0.0 and an End
Angle of 360.00
7. Click and drag the blue centering circle
to define the center point for the spin.

8. Click to select the profile contour you

want to spin, and then click the Next
Step icon in the wizard.

Page 220 Revolutions and Extrusions

 9. If you want to include either of the
optional steps, you can identify a Height
Control Curve and/or a Width Control
Curve.

10. Click on the Execute button to

complete the command.
11. The following shows a rendered top
view of the resulting relief.

Create a Mesh Surface

This next set of steps shows how to create a mesh object using the Spin command. It also
demonstrates the two optional steps for selecting a Height Control Curve and a Width Control
Curve.
1. Create your 2D artwork. In
this example, create the
contour you want to use as the
profile for the spin, and also
create two additional curves to
use as the Height Control
Curve and the Width Control
Curve.

2. Select the relief, and then

select the Spin icon, or
select the Surface menu and
then Create Surface/Spin.
3. Click on the Mesh icon to
select that option.

4. Define Slices = 24 and

Stacks = 72

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 221

 5. Define a Start Angle of 0.0
and an End Angle of 360.00
6. Click and drag the blue
centering circle to define the
center point for the spin.

7. Click to select the profile

contour you want to revolve,
and then click the Next Step
icon in the wizard.

8. At this step, you are prompted

to select the Height Control
Curve.

9. Click on the Height Control

Curve. A red influence line is
drawn; click and drag this line
down to reduce the influence
of the Height Control Curve.

10. Click on the Next Step icon

to move to the next
step in the wizard. You will be
prompted to select a width
control curve.

11. Click on the Width Control

Curve. A gray influence line is
drawn; click and drag this line
down to reduce the influence
of the Width Control Curve.

12. Click on the Execute button to

complete the command.

Page 222 Revolutions and Extrusions

 13. An object similar to the one
shown to the right will be
created.

14. This image shows a rendered

view of the object. You can
adjust the number of Slices
and Stacks to change the
„smoothness‟ of the object.

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 223

Extrude
Menu: Surface / Create Surfaces / Extrude
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Extrude

The Extrude tool provides a means to extrude a profile, or profiles, along a path to either modify a
relief or create a mesh object. While the previous two tools are used to spin and revolve profiles
around a central axis, this tool creates its surface along a path. Otherwise, it is very similar to the
Spin and Revolve tools.
Two options that provide some additional flexibility include the ability to change the size of the
profiles as they are extruded, and the ability to rotate the profiles as they are extruded. These
options allow you to create some interesting surfaces, as will be demonstrated in the examples in this
section.
The image below shows an extrusion where the profile was rotated as it was extruded.

Page 224 Revolutions and Extrusions

Extrude Dialog
Selecting the Extrude icon , or selecting the Surface menu and then Create Surface and
Extrude, will activate the Extrude dialog. This dialog allows you to select the appropriate options
and parameters required to create the new surface.
The Extrude dialog provides two sets of parameters depending on whether you have selected the
option of creating a mesh object, or any other application method for modifying an existing relief. If
you select an application method for modifying a relief, the following dialog is presented.

Relief parameters
Relief Options
Miter Option

Scale and Rotation Wizard prompts

Profile Placement
Application Method to modify the selected relief

If you select the Application Method for creating a mesh object, the dialog is changed to allow you
to enter the proper parameters for the mesh, and shown below.
Miter Option
Mesh Parameters

Scale and Rotation

Wizard prompts
Profile Placement

Application Method to create a mesh object

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 225

Application Method
All of the options for applying the results of the extrude operation are the same as the options
described in the chapter on relief creation. The options for Add, Subtract, Merge Highest, Merge

Lowest, and Replace all apply to the situation where the revolution is to
be applied to an existing relief. For this to be possible, it is necessary to select the relief to be
modified before starting the Extrude command.

The right-most application method option allows you to create a mesh object with the Extrude
command. As shown in the dialogs above, when this option is selected, the parameters required for
the command are different than when a relief is to be modified. When this option is selected, the
parameters change, providing space to enter the number of slices and stacks that will make up the
new object. These are described below, and the rest of the Extrude command is the same whether
you are modifying a relief or creating a new mesh object.

Relief Options
These options function similar to how they work in the relief creation tool. In this case you have three
options, Normal, Scale to Height, and Limit to Height.
 Normal – The new extruded surface is created just as the selected profile and other options define
it, without any vertical scaling.
 Scale to Height – The new extruded surface is scaled to match the height parameter as it is
applied to the relief. This allows you to create a surface and scale it in one step.
 Limit to Height – The new extruded surface is limited in height by the height parameter. If a
portion of the new surface extends above this height, it is truncated before it is applied to the
selected relief.

Scale and Rotation

These options allow you to modify the extruded surface. The Scale factor identifies the proportion
that the profile is to be scaled along the length that it is extruded. If you don‟t want to scale the
profile, then define a value of 1.0. If you want to reduce the profile size by one half, then define a
value of 0.5 for the Scale factor.
The following image shows an object created using a circle extruded along the length of a semi-
circle. The scale factor for this extrusion was 0.25.

Page 226 Revolutions and Extrusions

The Rotation parameter defines the number of times that the profile will be rotated as it is extruded.
A value of 1.0 will cause the profile to be rotated 360 degrees over the length of the extrusion. This
is illustrated in the following graphic that was created by extruding a square profile along a semi-
circle while rotating it one time.

Profile Placement

The Profile Placement buttons allow you to position the extruded profile in nine different
positions relative to the path. Each button indicates a position on the selection of profiles that will be
extruded. This position is the location that the profiles will be places as they are extruded around the
path.
If you select the lower left button, then the lower left corner of the selected profile is where it is
located as it is extruded around the path. The following graphic shows a top view of set of simple
extrusions that were each created using the same profile and the same path, with just the Profile
Placement button changing for each object. The top view and right view show how the objects were
created both horizontally and vertically.

Top View Right View

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 227

Relief Parameters
The relief parameters of Height and Base are available when modifying a relief.
 Height – This value defines the height if either the „Scale to Height‟ or „Limit to Height‟ relief option
is selected.
 Base – This value allows you to define a base height that can be added to the extruded surface as
it is applied to the selected relief.

Mesh Parameter
When the mesh option is selected, it activates parameters that are specific to this option. They
include the number of Slices and the number of Stacks that are to be used to create the mesh
object.
A mesh object is composed of triangles, or facets, that make up its surface. It is necessary to instruct
EnRoute regarding how many of these facets should be used to construct the object. The number of
Slices is the number of sections that are used along the length of the profile that is spun. The
Stacks value is the number of sections that are used along the extrusion.
The following graphic illustrates this concept. The same profile was used to create these objects.
The object on the left was created using more slices and fewer stacks, and the object on the right
was created using fewer slices and more stacks.

Page 228 Revolutions and Extrusions

Modify a Relief Surface
This section provides a table with the steps necessary to create an extruded surface using the option
of modifying an existing relief.

1. Create the 2D artwork. In this

example, create an ellipse and then
outline it. Then place four
overlapping circles and weld then
together. After they are welded, if
there is a center hole, ungroup the
object and delete the center.

2. Select the ellipse and use it to

create a flat relief.

3. Select the relief, and then select

the Extrude icon, or select the
Surface menu and then Create
Surface/Extrude.
4. Click on the Add icon to select that
option.

5. Select the Normal application

method
6. Define Scale = 1.00 and Rotations
= 0.0
7. Make sure that the Miter option is
unchecked, and click on the center
Profile Placement button.

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 229

 8. Click to select the profile contour
you want to extrude, and then click
the Next Step icon in the
wizard.

9. Click on the original ellipse to use

as the path for the extrusion.

10. Click on the Execute button to

complete the command.
11. The following shows a rendered top
view of the resulting relief.

Page 230 Revolutions and Extrusions

Create a Mesh Surface
The example in this section demonstrates how to create a mesh object by extruding a profile.
1. Create the 2D artwork. Create a
small profile as shown in the upper
left, and then create a path similar
to the one shown. It is not
necessary to duplicate this shape
precisely. It was created by
drawing simple rectangles and then
welding them together.

2. Select the Extrude icon, or

select the Surface menu and then
Create Surface/Extrude.

3. Click on the Mesh icon to select

that option.

4. Define Slices = 24 and Stacks =

150
5. Define Scale = 1.00 and Rotations
= 6.0
6. Make sure that the Miter option is
checked, and click on the center
Profile Placement button.

7. Click to select the profile contour

you want to extrude, and then click
the Next Step icon in the
wizard.
8. Click on the original ellipse to use
as the path for the extrusion.

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 231

 9. Click on the Execute button to
complete the command.

10. The following shows a top view of

the resulting object.

Page 232 Revolutions and Extrusions

Sweep Two Rails
Menu: Surface / Create Surfaces / Sweep Two Rails
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Revolve / Sweep Two Rails

The Sweep Two Rails tool provides another method of using profile contours to either modify an
existing relief or create a new mesh surface. The rails are open contours that provide a path for the
right and left edges of cross section contours to follow as the profiles are used to create an extruded
surface.
This tool is very flexible, and can be used to create a wide range of surfaces. It is also very useful
when used to modify existing relief surfaces, particularly when the relief surface acts as a stencil to
extract the swept surface. This will be illustrated by the examples later in this section.
The following simple mesh surface demonstrates the result of sweeping a semi-circle and an angled
contour along two straight rails. This demonstrates how EnRoute transitions between cross sections
along the length of the rails.

This next image demonstrates a more complex surface that was created by using curved rails and
curved cross sections.

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 233

Sweep Two Rails Dialog
Selecting the Sweep Two Rails icon , or selecting the Surface menu and then Create Surface
and Sweep Two Rails, will activate the Sweep Two Rails dialog. This dialog allows you to select the
appropriate options and parameters required to create the new surface.
The Sweep Two Rails dialog provides two sets of parameters depending on whether you have
selected the option of creating a mesh object, or any other application method for modifying an
existing relief. If you select an application method for modifying a relief, the following dialog is
presented.

Relief parameters
Relief Options

Application Method to modify the selected relief Wizard prompts

If you select the mesh application method, then the proper parameters for creating a mesh object are
presented in the following dialog.

Mesh Parameters

Wizard prompts

Application Method to create a mesh object

Page 234 Revolutions and Extrusions

Application Method
All of the options for applying the results of the sweep two rails operation are the same as the options
described in the chapter on relief creation. The options for Add, Subtract, Merge Highest, Merge

Lowest, and Replace all apply to the situation where the swept surface is to be
applied to an existing relief. For this to be possible, it is necessary to select the relief to be modified
before starting the Sweep Two Rails command.

The right-most application method option allows you to create a mesh object with the Sweep
Two Rails command. As shown in the dialogs above, when this option is selected, the parameters
required for the command are different than when a relief is to be modified. When this option is
selected, the parameters change, providing space to enter the number of slices and stacks that will
make up the new object. These are described below, and the rest of the command is the same
whether you are modifying a relief or creating a new mesh object.

Relief Options
These options function similar to how they work in the relief creation tool. In this case you have three
options, Normal, Scale to Height, and Limit to Height.
 Normal – The new surface is created just as the selected profile and other options define it,
without any vertical scaling.
 Scale to Height – The new surface is scaled to match the height parameter as it is applied to the
relief. This allows you to create a surface and scale it in one step.
 Limit to Height – The new surface is limited in height by the height parameter. If a portion of the
new surface extends above this height, it is truncated before it is applied to the selected relief.

Relief Parameters
The relief parameters of Height and Base are available when modifying a relief.
 Height – This value defines the height if either the „Scale to Height‟ or „Limit to Height‟ relief option
is selected.
 Base – This value allows you to define a base height that can be added to the extruded surface as
it is applied to the selected relief.

Mesh Parameters
When the mesh option is selected, it activates parameters that are specific to this option. They
include the number of Slices and the number of Stacks that are to be used to create the mesh
object.
A mesh object is composed of triangles, or facets, that make up its surface. It is necessary to instruct
EnRoute regarding how many of these facets should be used to construct the object. The number of
Slices is the number of sections that are used along the width of the cross sections. The Stacks
value is the number of sections that are used along the rails.

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 235

Wizard Prompts
The Sweep Two Rails tool requires more than one step in order to complete it. This portion of the
dialog contains an area that contains a prompt that tells you the next step required in order to
complete the function. It also contains buttons that allow you to move from step to step, back up a
step, back up to the start of the function, execute the function, or exit the function.

Prompt

Buttons to change steps

The following table lists the prompts in the Sweep Two Rails tool, along with an explanation of the
appropriate action.
Select the first rail Click on the first open contour you would like to use as a rail.
Select the second rail Click on the second open contour you would like to use as a rail.
Select the sweep sections Click on the contours you want to use as the cross sections for the
surface. EnRoute will draw a green line between the rails for each
section you pick.

Following is a listing of each of the wizard buttons and its function.

Start Return to the start of the command

Back Go back one step

Next Go to the next step
Execute Execute the function

Cancel Cancel the function

 You can use a contour more than once as a cross section. Also, remember that you can click
and drag on the green lines to move the cross sections after they have been selected.

Page 236 Revolutions and Extrusions

Modify a Relief
The steps in this section demonstrate how to use the Sweep Two Rails tool to modify an existing
relief. In this case we will start with a flat relief in the shape of a grape leaf, and then use the Sweep
Two Rails function as a way to create a more realistic surface shape for the leaf.
1. First create the 2D artwork. In this
case, that includes a contour for
the shape of the leaf, contours for
the cross sections, and two open
contours for the rails. The
contours used for this example
are shown to the right.

2. Select the leaf contour and use it

to create a flat relief.

3. Select the relief, and then select

the Sweep Two Rails icon,

or select the Surface menu and
then Create Surface/Sweep Two
Rails.
4. Click on the Add icon to select
that option.

5. Select the Normal application

method
6. Define Height = 0.00 and Base
= 0.0
7. The wizard is prompting to select
the first rail. Click on the left rail
contour and then click the Next
step icon in the wizard.

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 237

 8. The wizard will prompt to select
the second rail. Click on the right
rail contour and then click the
Next Step icon in the
wizard.
9. The wizard will prompt to select
the cross sections. Click on the
cross section contours. Each time,
EnRoute will draw a green line to
show where the contour was
placed on the rails. The first two
you identify will be placed at each
end, and subsequent sections will
be divide the length

10. You can click and drag on the

green lines to move cross
sections along the rails to the
desired position.
11. Click on the Execute button to
complete the command.
12. The following shows a rendered
top view of the resulting relief.

This example demonstrates how the Sweep Two Rails command can be used to modify a surface to
create an organic shape. In this example, with just a few more steps, the leaf surface can be
completed as shown in the following image.

Page 238 Revolutions and Extrusions

Create a Mesh Surface
The Sweep Two Rails tool can also be used effectively to create interesting mesh surfaces. In the
following example, we create another leaf shape using a few simple contours.
1. Create the 2D artwork. This
example requires four contours;
two for the rails, and two for the
cross sections. In this example,
the two rail contours have been
edited so that they have
dimension in the z-axis rather than
being flat.

2. Select the Sweep Two Rails

icon, or select the Surface menu
and then Create Surface/Sweep
Two Rails.
3. Click on the Mesh icon to select
that option.

4. Define Slices = 36 and Stacks =

72
5. The wizard is prompting to select
the first rail. Click on the left rail
contour and then click the Next
step icon in the wizard.

Revolutions and Extrusions Page 239

 6. The wizard will prompt to select
the second rail. Click on the right
rail contour and then click the
Next Step icon in the
wizard.
7. The wizard will prompt to select
the cross sections. Click on the
cross section contours. Each time,
EnRoute will draw a green line to
show where the contour was
placed on the rails. The first two
you identify will be placed at each
end, and subsequent sections will
be divide the length

8. Click on the Execute button to

complete the command.
9. The following shows a top view of
the resulting object.

Page 240 Revolutions and Extrusions

15.Chamfering

Introduction
The Chamfer tools allow you to modify reliefs by applying profiles that can range anywhere from a
simple rounded edge all the way to an intricate profile that changes the whole relief.
Because of the way that this tool works, it is used only to modify reliefs rather than to create mesh
objects. The operation of the Chamfer tools is very similar to the other relief tools.
The following image shows an example of the Chamfer Centerline tool that was used to create this
intricate surface, using just one simple profile. In this case, the profile was applied to selected
contours and added to the elliptical relief that already had a rounded surface.

Standard Chamfer
Menu: Surface / Chamfer / Chamfer
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Chamfer Centerline / Chamfer

The Standard Chamfer works by first adding a height to a relief that is equal to the height of the
profile, and then removing material around the perimeter of the relief that is the shape of the profile.
An analogy for this method would be to visualize the result created by passing a hand-held router
with a shaper tool around the edge of a block of wood. The following image illustrates how this might
look using a common bit shape.

Chamfering Page 241

Before using the Chamfer tool, this relief was a flat relief with zero height. The shape of the profile
used to create the relief is shown below. This profile, which is just an open contour in EnRoute,
demonstrates the general shape, with the high point on the left side and the low point on the right
side that is used for most chamfer operations.

Notice that in the corners, the profile is cut off very similar to what would happen in the hand-held
router analogy.
As long as the relief is wider than the chamfer profile the full width of the profile is applied. As the
profile is passed around the perimeter of the relief (or the perimeter of the selected closed contours),
it is possible that one side might „cut off‟ the other side leaving only a partial profile. This can create
an attractive effect, or you may see that you need to modify your profile to keep this from happening.
The following graphic illustrates how this works.

Page 242 Chamfering

 Step 1 – The height of the profile is added to the relief.

Step 2 – The profile is passed around one side of the relief.

The shape of the relief after Step 2.

Step 3 – The profile is passed around the other side.

The final shape of the relief. Notice that the profile was
truncated where it was cut off in Step 3.

The following image shows how this looks with a relief in EnRoute.

Standard Chamfer Dialog

Activate the Chamfer dialog by clicking on the Chamfer icon , or by selecting the Surface menu
item and then Chamfer/Chamfer. Prior to activating the command, select the relief you want edit. If
you want to use separate contours to create the chamfered surface and then have this applied to the
selected relief, then you also need to select these contours before activating the Chamfer dialog.

 You can edit more than one relief with a chamfer operation just by selecting all of the reliefs you
want to edit before you start the command.

Chamfering Page 243

 Chamfer Parameters

Application Method to modify the selected relief Wizard prompts

Application Method
All of the options for applying the results of this operation are the same as the options described in
the chapter on relief creation. The options for Add, Subtract, Merge Highest, Merge Lowest, and

Replace all apply to the selected relief or reliefs. If you have selected contours in
addition to the relief, they will be used to create the chamfer, otherwise the boundary contours of the
relief will be used for the chamfer.

Chamfer Parameters
It is only necessary to specify two parameters for the chamfer command, but depending on the type
of relief you are editing, your choices can have a dramatic effect on the outcome.

Base
The Base parameter allows you to specify an additional relief height that will be added to the height
of the profile contour when the chamfer is performed. The effect of this parameter is the same as
with other relief creation commands.

Miter and Centerline

The Miter and Centerline specifications allow you to choose how the chamfer tool applies the profile
in corners. For simple shapes and simple profile shapes, you likely won‟t notice much difference, but
as the shape of the relief becomes more complex, and with different profiles, this parameter
becomes important.
When specifying this parameter, you have the choice of selecting Miter or Centerline, or you have
the option of using neither.
The best way to explain the effect of this parameter is to show a few examples. The following image
demonstrates the difference between selecting Miter or No Miter using a simple rounded profile for
the chamfer.

Page 244 Chamfering

 With Miter
Without Miter
There are times when it may be appropriate to use a profile that does not adhere to the convention of
placing the high side of the profile on the left edge of the profile. In these cases, the Centerline
parameter choice will most likely be the appropriate parameter to use. The problem is that with the
standard Miter option, the profile has the problem of cutting off the relief in the corners, creating a
result that probably won‟t be correct.
The Centerline option tells EnRoute that it is necessary to maintain an imaginary bisector of the
corner angle, and not allow the profile to cut itself off as it moves into and out of the corner.
Again, an illustration provides the best illustration of this issue. In the following image, you can see
that the relief on the left has the problem of getting cut off by the profile as it moves around the
outside corners. Fortunately, the simple solution is to choose the Centerline option.

Centerline Option

Miter Option

The Centerline option allows you to utilize profiles that are even more complex. The following
example shows how to use a profile that replicates a raised-panel shape that is common in the
cabinet-making industry.
The profile shape is shown below. The wide flat section on the left side of the profile is meant to
ensure that it extends across the width of the contours.

Chamfering Page 245

This profile was used to create the following relief. A rounded profile was also used around the
outside of the relief.

Wizard Prompts
The Chamfer tool allows you to complete the command in two steps, with the second step being
options. The wizard portion of the dialog contains an area that contains a prompt for the next step
required in order to complete the function. It also contains buttons that allow you to move from step
to step, back up a step, back to the start of the function, execute the function, or exit the function.

Prompt

Buttons to change steps

Page 246 Chamfering

The following table lists the prompts in the Sweep Two Rails tool, along with an explanation of the
appropriate action.
Select the chamfering contour Click on the open contour you want to use as the profile contour
for the shapes for the chamfer.
Select the chamfering contour Click on the contour you want to use to chamfer the holes in your
for the holes (Optional) relief or the holes in the selected contours. This step is optional
and the profile contour selected in the first step will be used for
both containers and holes by default.

Following is a listing of each of the wizard buttons and its function.

Start Return to the start of the command

Back Go back one step

Next Go to the next step
Execute Execute the function

Cancel Cancel the function

You will notice that the optional second step in the wizard is to identify a different profile contour to
use for chamfering the holes in your selection. While this option will likely not be used too often, the
following images show how it can be used effectively to create an interesting surface in one process.

Chamfering Page 247

Chamfer Centerline
Menu: Surface / Chamfer / Chamfer Centerline
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Chamfer Centerline
The Chamfer Centerline tool provides a very useful variation on the standard chamfer tool. There
are two key aspects of how it works that are different from the standard Chamfer tool. First, the
profile contour is extended to the center of the relief shape being chamfered; second, the profile
contour is scale as necessary to create the chamfer surface. This makes the Chamfer Centerline
tool less mechanical, and allows you to create very natural-looking surfaces.
The following surface was created in one step using just the Chamfer Centerline tool.

One thing to note in this image is that EnRoute automatically adjusts the profile as the relief goes into
corners, creating a very natural-looking surface. This does not require any input on the part of the
user.
The following surfaces were created using the Standard Chamfer and Chamfer Centerline tools. You
can see that the surface on the left provides a smooth, very pleasing surface.

Page 248 Chamfering

 Standard Chamfer

Chamfer Centerline

Chamfer Centerline Dialog

The dialog for the Chamfer Centerline tool is very similar to the Standard Chamfer dialog. The
wizard works identically, as well as the relief application options. The only differences are that the
Relief Parameters are a little different, and you have the Relief Options that provide more relief
height options. Those differences will be explained in this section. Please refer to the Standard
Chamfer Dialog section for other explanations.

Relief Options
Relief parameters

Wizard prompts
Application Method to modify the selected relief

Relief Options
These options function similar to how they work in the relief creation tool. In this case you have three
options, Normal, Constant Height, Scale to Height, and Limit to Height.
 Normal – The new surface is created just as the selected profile and Relief Parameters define it,
without any additional vertical scaling.
 Constant Height – The new surface is created to match the height specified in the Height
parameter.

Chamfering Page 249

 Scale to Height – The new surface is scaled to match the Height parameter as it is applied to the
relief. This allows you to create a surface and scale it in one step.
 Limit to Height – The new surface is limited in height by the height parameter. If a portion of the
new surface extends above this height, it is truncated before it is applied to the selected relief.

 With the Scale to Height option, the relief is first created using the Normal option, and then it is
scaled so that the maximum height of the relief matches the Height parameter.
The Constant Height option works quite well with the Chamfer Centerline tool. This is worth noting
because the results you get by selecting the Constant Height option are often quite improved over
the results without it. The following image demonstrates the different results that can be obtained by
choosing this option.

Normal Relief Constant Height Relief

Relief Parameters
As with all the other tools, the Base parameter provides a means of adding on to the relief height to
create vertical sides on the relief.
The Height parameter will be used every time the Chamfer Centerline tool is used. The following
table shows how the Height parameter is used with each of the Relief Options
Normal Height of the tallest point in the relief.
Constant Height Height of the relief in general
Scale to Height Height of the tallest point in the relief. In this case, it gives the same results
as the Normal option.
Limit to Height Maximum height of the relief.

Page 250 Chamfering

Chamfer Centerline Example
The following example shows the steps involved in creating a relief surface using the Chamfer
Centerline tool.
1. First create the 2D artwork. In this
case, that includes an ellipse that is
approximately 7 inches wide by 9
inches tall. The primary artwork
includes some fancy 2D clipart that
is commercially available. The open
contour will be the profile for the
chamfer. It is a simple Bezier curve
drawn in the EnRoute.

2. Select the ellipse contour and create

a 100 dpi rounded relief using an
angle of 30 degrees.

3. Select the relief and the clipart, and

then select the Chamfer Centerline

icon , or select the Surface

menu and then Chamfer/Chamfer
Centerline.
4. Click on the Add icon to select that
option.

5. Select the Normal application

method
6. Define Height = 0.30 and Base =
0.0

Chamfering Page 251

 7. The wizard is prompting to select the
chamfer profile contour. Click on the
open profile contour to select it.

8. Click on the Execute button to

complete the command.
9. The following shows a rendered top
view of the resulting relief.

Baroque Carve Chamfer

Menu: Surface / Chamfer / Baroque Carve Chamfer
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Chamfer Centerline / Baroque Carve Chamfer

The Baroque Carve Chamfer tool can be used to create the look of wood carving. The tool allows
you to use a different profile shape for the outside and the inside of the contour.
The following example shows the steps involved in creating a relief surface using the Baroque
Chamfer tool.

Page 252 Chamfering

 1. First create the 2D artwork.
In this case, that includes a
5 inch square. The primary
artwork includes some
fancy 2D clipart that is
commercially available.

2. The open contours will be

the profile for the outside
Outside Inside
and inside chamfer. It is a
simple Bezier curve drawn contour contour
in EnRoute.

3. Select the square contour

and create a 100 dpi limited
height, beveled relief using
an angle of 45 degrees.

4. Select the relief and the

clipart, and then select the
Baroque Chamfer icon.

5. Click on the Add icon to

select that option.

6. Select the Limit Height

application method
7. Define Height = 0.50 and
Base = 0.0
8. The wizard is prompting to
select the chamfer profile
contour for the outside
curves. Click on the
outside open contour
profile to select it. Click on
the forward arrow.

Chamfering Page 253

 9. The wizard is prompting to
select the chamfer profile
contour for the inside
curves. Click on the inside
open contour profile to
select it.
10. Click on the Execute button
to complete the command.
11. The following shows a
rendered perspective view
of the resulting relief.

Page 254 Chamfering

16. Using 3D Meshes

Introduction
The 3D modeling process uses 3D surfaces to define and depict the objects in the design. There are
several different ways to accomplish this. In EnRoute, reliefs are used as the method for defining
and manipulating 3D surfaces that are used to create toolpaths for output.
Another common method of defining 3D objects is as 3D meshes. These objects are made up of
triangles of varying sizes that define their surface. EnRoute enables you to both create and utilize
3D meshes as part of the relief design process.
As with all of the different methods for defining 3D surfaces, mesh objects have advantages and
disadvantages. One clear advantage is that many common 3D modeling software packages provide
the ability to export and import mesh objects. For this reason, meshes are probably the most
common type of 3D objects. There are many companies that sell 3D objects of just about any type of
object that you can imagine. This may be a good way to acquire an object to incorporate into your
design that would otherwise be difficult and time-consuming to create.
In addition to being able to import and use 3D models, many of EnRoute‟s modeling tools provide the
option of creating a mesh object rather than modifying a relief. These meshes can then be
positioned, rotated and scaled in order to make them just right for incorporating into a relief design.

Using 3D Meshes Page 255

Using 3D Meshes from Other Applications
EnRoute currently imports 3D mesh objects in three different formats,
 DXF – Data eXchange Format is the format created by AutoDesk® as a standard method for
bringing data into and out of AutoCAD®. It has become a standard method for exchanging data
between many software packages. EnRoute imports both 2D and 3D data using this format.
 3DS – This is the format used by 3D Studio®. EnRoute imports 3D files saved using this format.
 STL – STereo Lithography is a standard method created for sharing 3D mesh surface data.
EnRoute imports STL mesh objects.

Creating 3D Meshes with EnRoute Tools

Within EnRoute, there are a number of ways to create 3D meshes. Most of these methods are
described in detail along with the tools that provide this option. Refer to the manual sections that
describe the Revolve, Spin, Extrude and Sweep Two Rails functions to see how to create these
types of mesh objects.

Primitives
Menu: Surface / Create Primitive
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Create Primitive Objects

The Primitives tool is used to create a range of basic 3D shapes. These shapes can be used to build
more complex shapes, or they can be used as design elements in your relief. You likely won‟t need
them too often, but they can come in handy.

Sphere Torus
Cylinder Disk
Cone Plane

Box

Page 256 Using 3D Meshes

To access the Primitives dialog, click the Primitives icon, or select the Surface menu and
then click Create Primitive. The following dialog will be activated.

Primitive selection buttons Selected Primitive Parameters

Whichever primitive button is active will activate the parameters for that primitive type. The
parameters are similar between primitive types, but they are specific to that type.
The following table lists the different parameter types, along with an explanation of what that
parameter defines.
X,Y and Z These are the coordinates for the location of the center of
the primitive
Slices This is the number of sections either around the
circumference of the object or along one axis
Stacks This is the number of sections along one axis, typically the
z-axis, of the object.
Radius This is half the diameter of a circular dimension of the
object
Height This is the z dimension of the object.
Size This is the dimension along one axis of the object, such as
„X Size‟.
Sweep Angle For the Torus object, this is the number of degrees of the
sweep of the object around the „outer‟ radius.
Close top or Close Bottom You can choose whether Cylinders, Cones and Boxes
should have surfaces that cover their tops and bottoms.

Using 3D Meshes Page 257

Applying Meshes to a Relief
Menu: Surface / Apply Mesh
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Apply Mesh to Relief

After meshes are created or imported, their primary function is to be used to modify relief surfaces.

The Apply Mesh tool is used to accomplish this.

In order to enable the Apply Mesh function, it is necessary to have at least one relief and one mesh

in your selection. After selection a mesh and a relief, click on the Apply Mesh icon , or select
the Surface menu and Apply Mesh to activate the dialog. To complete the function, just click on the
Apply button.

Apply Mesh Dialog

Selector between Faceted and Smooth option

Smoothing level for smooth option

Application Method to modify the selected relief

Faceted or Smooth
One of the characteristics of a mesh surface is that it is composed of triangles, or facets, that make
up its surface. When a mesh object is applied to a relief surface, the facets can be quite obvious and
may be an undesirable characteristic.

EnRoute provides a Smooth option that implements a means of smoothing out the facets of
the mesh to provide a smoother finished surface. For surfaces that are intended to be smooth, the

results of using this option can be quite dramatic. If the Faceted option is selected, then the
object is applied to the relief surface using its facets directly.
The following images show the difference that can be realized by using the Smooth option.

Page 258 Using 3D Meshes

Application Method
All of the options for applying the results of this operation are the same as the options described in
the chapter on relief creation. The options for Add, Subtract, Merge Highest, Merge Lowest, and

Replace all apply to the selected relief or reliefs.

The vertical location of the mesh relative to the vertical location of the relief controls how much the
relief is modified. It is important to position the mesh object correctly in the z axis relative to the
relief, so when it is applied to the relief, the results are correct.
The following image shows a front view that includes a relief and four mesh spheres that are located
at different positions in the z axis. A perspective view of the relief shows the results of applying these
objects to the relief using the Add option.

Using 3D Meshes Page 259

 Relief surface

Front View showing vertical position of meshes and relief

Perspective view of the relief after meshes were added

Using a Mask
There may be times when it is desirable to use just a portion of a mesh object in your design. This
can be accomplished by using a mask. A mask is just a closed contour that is selected along with
the relief and the mesh object when the Apply Mesh command is started.
The following image shows a large relief, 3D mesh of a lion, and a smaller elliptical contour which
acts as the mask. All three of these elements are part of the selection.

Page 260 Using 3D Meshes

With these selected, execute the Apply Mesh command to add the mesh to the relief. The result is
shown in the next image.

Using 3D Meshes Page 261

After adding some borders to the relief to complete the design, you see a perspective view of the
relief in the next image. You can see how the use of the mask made it simple to incorporate only the
portion of the mesh object that was needed.

Page 262 Using 3D Meshes

17.Modifying and Combining Reliefs

Introduction
After you have created a relief, EnRoute provides many tools that allow you to modify it to fit the
needs of your design. This chapter provides descriptions of the tools that are available for modifying
reliefs as part of your design process.

Selecting Reliefs
To select a relief, click on the contour that defines its perimeter.
You can also select multiple reliefs using one of the following methods:
 Hold down the SHIFT key and click on the reliefs one after the other.
 Click and drag to draw a selection box around the reliefs.

Cutting, Copying and Pasting Reliefs

One handy aspect of reliefs in EnRoute is that they exist in the same workspace as all of the other
EnRoute object types. This means that they can be treated in much the same way as any other
EnRoute object.

Cutting and Pasting

To cut and paste reliefs:
1. Select the reliefs to cut.

2. From the Edit menu choose Cut, click on the Cut Icon, or press Ctrl+X.
3. Select the drawing where the reliefs are to be pasted.

4. From the Edit menu choose Paste, click on the Paste Icon, or press Ctrl+V.

 After a relief is placed on the clipboard either by cutting or copying it, it remains there until it is
replaced by something else. This allows you to paste it more than once.

Copying and Pasting

To copy and paste reliefs:
1. Select the reliefs to copy.

2. From the Edit menu choose Copy, click on the Copy Icon, or press Ctrl+C.
3. Select the drawing where the reliefs are to be pasted.

Modifying and Combining Reliefs Page 263

 4. From the Edit menu choose Paste, click on the Paste Icon, or press Ctrl+V.

 Another easy way to copy a relief is to click and drag on it while pressing the CTRL key. When
you release the mouse button a copy of the selected reliefs is placed at the new location.

Deleting Relief Objects

To delete one or more reliefs:
1. Select the reliefs.

2. From the Edit menu, select Delete, or you may also just press the DELETE key.

 Deleting relief objects is the same as deleting any other object in EnRoute.

Clearing Reliefs
Clearing a relief removes the relief surface from the object, but it retains the contours that made up
the perimeter of the relief. You will use this during the relief design process to clear a relief so that
you can recreate it using different parameters.
To clear a relief:
1. Select the relief.

2. From the Surface menu, select Delete Relief, or just select the Delete Relief Icon from
the relief toolbar.

Moving Reliefs
Moving reliefs is done much the same way as moving any other object in EnRoute. You can click
and drag on a relief object to move it in the top, front and right views.
The key difference is that the vertical position of a relief object is very important when it comes time
to create toolpaths and output toolpaths. In addition to the Precision Input Center, EnRoute provides
several tools to help you position relief objects in the z-axis.
To move a relief using the Precision Input Center:
1. Select the relief in the view (Top, Front or Right) that you want to use as the reference plane.
For example, in the Top view the reference plane is the X-Y plane. In the Z axis this plane is
located at the closest Z-location on the object(s) you have selected.
2. Press F2 to activate the Precision Input Center.
3. Click on the Move tab.
4. Click on the button that represents the corner of the object you want to specify.

Page 264 Modifying and Combining Reliefs

 5. Specify the X, Y, and Z coordinates for the selected corner.
6. Click on the OK button to finish moving the object(s).

Vertical Positioning of Reliefs

The method for positioning reliefs described above works well, and you can use this method
exclusively; however, EnRoute also provides tools that are specifically designed to assist you with
positioning reliefs vertically within the boundaries of the Plate.
Access the Align Reliefs tools by clicking on the Align Relief icon in the Relief toolbar to activate
the Align Reliefs flyout toolbar.

The following table describes the function of each of the Align Reliefs functions
Align reliefs to Aligns each of the selected reliefs to the bottom of the plate.
bottom of plate
Align selection to Aligns the selection to the bottom of the plate. The relative
bottom of plate position of the reliefs in the selection doesn‟t change.
Align reliefs to top Aligns each of the selected reliefs to the top of the plate.
of plate
Align selection to Aligns the selection to the top of the plate. The relative position of
top of plate the reliefs in the selection doesn‟t change.
Align reliefs to Aligns each of the selected reliefs to the middle of the plate.
middle of plate
Align selection to Aligns the selection to the middle of the plate. The relative
middle of plate position of the reliefs in the selection doesn‟t change.

Rotating Reliefs
Rotating reliefs is accomplished the same way as rotating any other objects in EnRoute. Refer to the
section on Rotating Contours in the Arranging Contours chapter.

Modifying and Combining Reliefs Page 265

Scaling Reliefs
Scaling reliefs is accomplished the same way as scaling any other objects in EnRoute. You can
either scale the relief by selecting it and then clicking and dragging on one corner of the selection
box, or you can use the Precision Input Center to precisely scale the relief. (See the Scaling
Contours description in the Arranging Contours chapter)
When it comes to scaling reliefs, there is an important consideration involving the resolution of the
relief. Remember that when you first create a relief, you specify a resolution for that relief. This
specifies the resolution of the grid that defines the relief surface. After the relief is created, the total
numbers of grid points that define the relief are set. So, if you scale the relief, the effective size of
the grid points in the relief is scaled too.
If you created a relief that was 50 mm x 50 mm with a resolution of 100 dpi and then scaled it up to a
size of 500 mm x 500 mm, the effective resolution of the relief would drop to 10 dpi. This illustrates
that it is important to consider the effect of scaling a relief, and the effect that it will have on the
quality of the finished piece.
The following image shows how the size and shape of the relief grid is affected by a scaling
operation.

Original Relief Scaled Relief

Page 266 Modifying and Combining Reliefs

Fit Relief to Plate
Menu: Surface / Fit to Plate
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Smooth Relief / Fit to Plate

You can use the moving and scaling tools in EnRoute to size and position a relief just as you would
other objects. There are times, however, when it would be useful to be able to automatically fit a

relief into your plate as you get it ready for toolpaths. The Fit Relief to Plate function provides
this capability. It will automatically position and scale a relief so that it fits vertically within the defined
plate in your active drawing.
To fit a relief to the plate:
1. Select the relief.
2. From the Surface menu, select Fit Relief to Plate.

Smoothing Reliefs
Menu: Surface / Smooth Relief
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Smooth Relief
There are times when you are working on a relief design when it will be useful to be able to soften, or
smooth, the relief either to make it more attractive or to make it so that it will machine better.

EnRoute provides the Smooth Relief tool accomplish this.

1. Select the reliefs to be smoothed.
2. From the Surface menu, select Smooth Relief.
3. Click and drag to set the Smoothing Radius and Smoothing Power.
4. Click Apply.

 You can apply the smoothing function to a relief more than one time in order to smooth it more
and more.
The following image shows an example of the results of smoothing a relief.

Smoothed Relief

Modifying and Combining Reliefs Page 267

 You can apply smoothing to just a portion of a relief by selecting a contour along with the relief.
The selected contour(s) acts as a mask, and the relief will only be smoothed within the boundary
of the contour.

Inverting Reliefs
Menu: Surface / Invert Relief
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Smooth Relief / Invert Relief
Inverting a relief has the effect of reversing the z-coordinates of the relief relative to the location of
the perimeter contours of the relief. This is a simple way to convert a „positive‟ relief to a „negative‟
relief.

To invert a relief:
1. Select the reliefs to be inverted.

2. From the Surface menu, select Invert Relief.

You can also select the Invert Relief function from a screen icon. The function is located on a flyout
toolbar that is activated by clicking a holding the Smooth Relief icon. The flyout is shown to the right.
One thing you can see in the images above is that inverting a relief only modifies it in the z axis. If
you plan to invert a relief to use it as a mold, it may also be desirable to mirror the relief prior so that
any impressions created from a mold have the proper x-y orientation. A relief can be mirrored using
the same method as any other EnRoute object. From the Transform menu, select Mirror and then
either Mirror Horizontal or Mirror Vertical.
The following images show the sequence of actions to both invert and mirror a relief in preparation
for using it as a mold.

Page 268 Modifying and Combining Reliefs

Modifying and Combining Reliefs Page 269
Adding a Draft Angle to a Relief
Menu: Surface / Apply Draft Angle to Relief
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Smooth Relief / Add Draft Angle
When you create a relief, you will often create portions of the relief that have a vertical side. This
vertical side can be problematic for two reasons. First, if the vertical side is relatively tall, its height
could be greater than the cutting length of the tool you will use to mill it with. This can cause
problems that might cause the tool to break. Second, if you are going to use the finished piece to
create a mold you may need to provide a draft angle in order to allow the molded pieces to come out
of the mold properly.

EnRoute provides a Draft Angle function that allows you to add a draft angle to your relief.

To add a draft angle:

1. Select the relief.
2. From the Surface menu, select Draft Angle.
3. In the Precision Input dialog, enter desired values for Draft Angle and Height Threshold.
4. Click Apply.

Page 270 Modifying and Combining Reliefs

Create a mesh surface from a Relief
Menu: Surface / Create mesh surface from relief
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Smooth Relief / Create a mesh surface from relief
This tool allows you to create a mesh from an existing relief.
1. Select the relief.
2. Click and hold the Smooth
icon, then click on the Smooth Icon Create Mesh from Relief
Create mesh from relief
icon.
3.
4. Enter the Mesh tolerance
in the parameters field and
click Apply

5. The mesh will be created

and placed in the same
location as the relief.

Relief Relief and Mesh Mesh

Modifying and Combining Reliefs Page 271

Merging Reliefs
Menu: Surface / Merge Reliefs
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Merge Reliefs
This tool allows you to merge one or more reliefs with a base relief. This allows you to create
portions of a relief separately and then merge them together to create the final surface.

The following graphic shows the dialog that is activated when you select the Merge Reliefs
function.

Wizard Prompts

Application Method to modify the selected relief

As you can see, it is not a complicated dialog. To complete the merge action, it is just necessary to
select the application method for how the reliefs will be merged, select the base relief and then select
the relief(s) that will be merged with the base relief.
The following example illustrates the process.
1. First create the reliefs that
you will merge. In this case
we have created two simple
reliefs, an ellipse and a star.

2. Position the reliefs correctly

for merging.

3. Select Merge Reliefs.

Page 272 Modifying and Combining Reliefs

 4. Click on the Add icon to
select that option in the
dialog.

5. The wizard prompts you to

select the base relief. Click
on the ellipse relief to select
it, then click on the Next
button
6. The wizard prompts you to
select the reliefs to merge.
Click on the star relief to
select it, then click on the
Execute button to
complete the merge
7. This image shows the result
of the merge action.

This image shows the merged relief along with the

original star relief.

 The Merge Relief tool can merge reliefs of different resolutions, and reliefs that have been
rotated and scaled without any problems.

Modifying and Combining Reliefs Page 273

Combine Reliefs
Menu: Surface / Combine Reliefs
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Merge Reliefs / Combine Reliefs
Use the combine Reliefs tool to combine one or more selected reliefs.
The example below demonstrates three separate reliefs combined into one relief in two different
ways.
1. Select the reliefs to be combined.

2. Click and hold the Merge Reliefs Icon to open the flyout toolbar.

3. Click on the Combine Reliefs Icon.

 If the reliefs overlap they will combine to create one relief with one contour.
 If one of the reliefs is completely enclosed within another, it will create a hole in the relief.

Extracting Slices
Menu: Surface / Extract Slices
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Merge Reliefs / Extract Slices

The Extract Slices tool allows you to “cut” the relief into layers. Use this tool to “stack” your material
to create large objects. For example, if your material is 1.5 inches and the object that you want to
create is 4 inches, you can cut your relief into 3 slices and then stack the material to create the
object.

Extract Slices Dialog

Page 274 Modifying and Combining Reliefs

Relief Dimensions
Height The total height of the selected relief.
Top The location of the top of the selected relief.
Bottom The location of the bottom of the selected relief.

Slice
Slices The number of slices that you want to create.
Thickness The thickness of each slice.
Current Slice The current slice number. This tells you which slice parameters are displayed.
The slices are numbered from top to bottom.
Thickness Thickness of the current slice.
Bottom Location of the bottom of the current slice.
Create Current This tells EnRoute to create only the slice that you have selected to be the current
Slice slice.
Create all Select this parameter to create all of the slices.
slices
Click this button to create the slices.

Click this button to exit the tool without creating the slices.

Example 1:
This example is showing how this design was extracted from the background relief.
1. Click and hold the Merge Relief

Icon to open the flyout

toolbar then click on the Slices

Icon. This will open the

Slices Dialog.

Modifying and Combining Reliefs Page 275

 2. Click on Front to work in the
front view and then click on the
relief. The relief information is
loaded into the Slices Dialog.

3. In this example, we created 1

slice with a thickness of 1.0175.
The bottom of the slice is
located .30 from the bottom of
the relief.
4. As you change the parameters
you will notice that the pink
lines represent the slice
position.

5. Click on the execute button.

6. The first image of the top view

shows the outline of the new
contour that the slice has
created.
7. The second image shows the
rendered view of the object.

Page 276 Modifying and Combining Reliefs

Example 2:
This example is dividing the relief into 3.
1. Click and hold the Merge Relief

Icon to open the flyout

toolbar then click on the Slices

Icon. This will open the

Slices Dialog.

2. Change the number of slices to

3. This example shows the
slices will each be .4392 thick.
The Current Slice, slice 1 is
shown with the pink lines. The
bottom of the slice is positioned
at .8783.
3. You can see the layer lines in
the front view. Change the
Current slice number to get the
exact location for each slice
layer. The Create all slices
parameters was selected, so
each of the slice layers will be
extracted.

4. This is the top view of the slices

that have been created.

5. This is the front view of the

slices that have been created.
Notice the contour lines.

Modifying and Combining Reliefs Page 277

This image shows a rendered view of each of the separate slice layers that have been created.

Page 278 Modifying and Combining Reliefs

18.Using Bitmaps

Introduction
EnRoute utilizes bitmap images as a method for modifying relief surfaces. Bitmaps can be useful in
creating a texture that makes up part of your design. They can also be useful as an efficient method
for getting design information into EnRoute that might be difficult to create using other methods.
EnRoute utilizes the colors or grayscale shading in a bitmap image to modify the height of the relief
using parameters that you provide. The process of applying a bitmap to a relief is simple, but it can
be used in many different ways to create intricate surfaces.

Applying Bitmaps to a Relief

The following graphic shows the dialog that is activated by the Apply Bitmap tool. This

function is activated by Selecting Surface/Apply Bitmap, or by selecting the Apply Bitmap

icon from the 3D Surfaces toolbar.
Height of the applied bitmap

Application Method to modify the selected relief

Using Bitmaps Page 279

The Application Method defines how the bitmap will be applied to the relief surface. Typically you

will select either the Add or Subtract method in order to apply either a positive or
negative version of the bitmap. The Height parameter defines the maximum height of the bitmap as it
is applied.
The following simple example illustrates the process of applying a bitmap to a relief.
1. First create the relief that you want to
add the bitmap to, and also import the
bitmap file into your drawing. In this
case, we have created an ellipse as
the relief, and have imported a bitmap
of a brick wall that will be used as a
texture.
2. Position the bitmap on top of the
relief.

3. With both the relief and the bitmap

selected, choose the Apply Bitmap
tool by selecting Surface/Apply bitmap

4. Choose the Application Method and

the Height. In this case, choose Add,
and define a Height of 0.20

5. Click Apply.
6. This image shows a rendered
perspective view of the results.

Page 280 Using Bitmaps

Using a Mask
When you apply a bitmap to a relief, you may not always want to apply the bitmap to the entire relief.
EnRoute provides a method for masking the bitmap so that it applies only to the desired portion of
the relief.
Any contour that is not part of the relief boundary or that does not have toolpaths applied to it can be
used as a mask. It is only necessary to select the masking contours along with the relief and the
bitmap when you activate the Apply Bitmap function. You will notice that the masking contours are
automatically sorted into groups of containers and holes, and when the bitmap is applied only the
portion of the bitmap that is inside the mask will be applied.
The following image shows a relief that had a bitmap texture applied using letters as a mask.

Using Bitmaps Page 281

3D Effects using Bitmaps
It is possible to create realistic 3D effects using bitmaps, but this requires bitmap images that are
created with this in mind. Remember that when a bitmap is applied, the colors and shading in the
image are what control how the bitmap modifies the relief.
In a grayscale image, the different shades of gray on the scale from white to black define the height
of the bitmap. The Height parameter that you define provides the overall height of the bitmap. With
a grayscale image, white colors would be applied at this Height value, and then the shades of gray
would be shorter down to black which has no effect on the relief.
The following image shows an example of a grayscale drawing that was created in order to have the
proper effect on a relief.

You can see that the lightest shades in the waves will be the tallest parts of the bitmap. Since the
fish is a little darker, it will be less tall, and the background is black so it won‟t affect the relief.

Page 282 Using Bitmaps

The next image shows a relief after this bitmap has been applied. You can see that the shading
provides a finished relief that is quite realistic.

The next thought you may have is that it would be nice to be able to apply a photograph to a relief to
get a 3D effect. It certainly is quite feasible to use a photographic image in a relief. Remember
thought that EnRoute uses the shading in the image to determine height. Something that is taller in
the photograph may or may not be a lighter shade than objects that are further back in the image.
Since a photograph is flat, it does not provide 3D information to the software to determine realistic
heights.

Using Bitmaps Page 283

The result you get with a photograph may or may not be what is desired for the subjects in the
photograph. The following images show a photograph, and the relief surface that was created using
the image.

Page 284 Using Bitmaps

19.Texture Tools

Introduction
EnRoute also has the capability to create textures for a relief without the aid of bitmaps. While
bitmaps can be useful in creating a texture that makes up part of your design they can be somewhat
limited in that the size of the bitmap may not always work with your current design.
EnRoute has implemented a number of texture tools to design and create an unlimited number of
possible textures to apply to a relief. Several designs have already been defined and entered in as
templates. This is a good starting point for several different textures. Each of these textures can be
used as defined or further refined to achieve the precise texture for your design. EnRoute then
allows for the ability to save any new textures you have created as your own templates. This will
allow you to build up an inventory of many different textures to retrieve for use with just a few clicks of
the mouse.

Applying Textures to a Relief

Menu: Surface / Textures
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Textures
There are several types of textures available.
The categories include:
 Basic Noise  FlagStone
 Brick  Flame
 Cellular  Hammered
 Dots  Hexes

Texture Tools Page 285

  Marble  Terrain
 MudPot  Veneer
 MultiCell  Weave
 MutiFract  Wood
After selecting the relief, click to choose the type of texture to create. Each texture choice will bring
up a dialog specific to that texture. Within the dialogs a template can be selected or specific
parameters can be entered to create the desired texture.

Texture Dialog
The first section of the textures dialog will contain the same information for all of the texture types.
The second section of the dialog will contain the parameters section that is specific to each type of
texture. The dialog is used in the same manner for each of the different textures. The first section of
the dialog is described below:

This section of the dialog allows you to get specific information

about the texture type that you have chosen. The name of the
Texture is listed here and you can click on the information icon

to get specific information for each of the parameter

settings.
This section works the same way as the create relief section.
Add, Subtract, Merge Highest, Merge Lowest, and Replace.
See the create reliefs section for more information about these
parameters.
Height The height section specifies the height of the relief.
Template The template section is used to create and store specific
design parameters.

Page 286 Texture Tools

 You can access some preloaded design templates by clicking
the arrow for the drop down menu. Select any of these
templates with the click of a mouse.
The parameters will load for the template that you have
chosen.

Save You can also create your own specific texture designs and
name and save them to the template library.
Once the new parameters have been entered;
Click on the Save button.
Enter the name of the template that you wish to save and click
OK.
Delete If you choose to delete a template, click on the name of the
template that you want to delete and click the delete button. A
dialog will open asking you to confirm that you want to delete
this template.
This section shows you a small preview of the parameters that
you have entered. It is a nice tool to use while you are
designing and creating new textures for your designs.

Apply Press Apply to apply the texture to the selected relief.

Close Click Close to close the Texture Dialog.
Reset Reset will change the parameters back to the default
parameters for the specific texture.

Texture Tools Page 287

Parameters Section of the Textures Dialog
Each of the Texture types will have its own set of parameters. The below example is the dialog for
the bricks parameters.

Click on the information icon to open the dialog for each specific texture. The Texture notes will give
you information for each of the parameters specific to the texture you have selected.
Below is shown the Information Notes for the Bricks Texture. You can create your own templates for
each of the textures using the guidelines here and the preview window.

Page 288 Texture Tools

Example using the Brick Texture:
1. In this example,
the brick texture is
shown on 4
different shapes of
reliefs. Flat,
Rounded, Beveled
and Limited
Height. Create
simple a simple
ellipse shape and
use the Multicopy
tool to copy the
shape.
2. Add the different
relief shapes to
the contour.

3. Select the reliefs

and click and hold
the textures icon
in the 3D Surfaces  EnRoute saves the last texture that was used to be the icon in the
Toolbar. This will 3D Surfaces Toolbar. For example, if the last texture you used
activate the flyout was the Brick Texture, then the brick icon would be the one in the
menu. 3D Surfaces toolbar and you would only need to click on the icon
4. Click on the Brick to activate the Brick Precision Toolbar. This helps to streamline
Texture Icon. This the creative process.
will open the
Precision Toolbar.

5. Select the
Parameters: Add
to Relief

Texture Tools Page 289

 6. In this example we
simply chose the
brick texture from
the template
section.
Click on the arrow
to open the drop
down list. As you
highlight the
choices in the list,
the preview
window will show  You can also choose to create your own new texture by adjusting
you a small the parameters. The Information icon will give you specifics
example of the about each parameter and the preview window will allow you to
texture. see the changes as you develop the new texture.

7. Click on the Apply

button to apply the
texture to the
reliefs.
The textures will
be applied to the
reliefs and the
Precision Toolbar
will close.
 Notice how the texture is consistently applied to each of the
different shapes.

 Signs can be easily created using the textures with masks.

Page 290 Texture Tools

20.Relief Edit Tools
The New Relief Editing tools provide a quick and simple method for editing any relief surface using
tools that are similar to bitmap painting tools. This provides another powerful creative tool for relief
creation.
There are five new tools to use to edit your existing relief or to use to create a new relief using the
mouse to draw a free hand design. The same basic concept of Add, Subtract, Merge Highest, Merge
Lowest and Replace are used in combination with the shape of the tool specified.

Edit Relief Toolbar

Menu: Surface / Relief Edit
Toolbar: 3D Surfaces / Edit Selected Relief

These tools are found in the Surface Menu under Relief Edit, or in 3D Surfaces Toolbar by

selecting the Edit Selected Relief tool.

Parameters:
Smooth Relief Edit Tool – This tool is rounded at its tap and base so it works
well to gently modify a relief surface.
Bevel Relief Edit Tool – The bevel shape on this tool is great for adding details
to your surface.
Dome Relief Edit Tool – This tool has an arc shape.

Flat Relief Edit Tool – This is good for interactively adding a specific amount to
your surface
Blended Relief Edit Tool – This tool is used to blend the surface. It will even out
the surface within the selected radius.
Radius The radius specifies the size of the tool.
Angle This is the angle from the edge of the tool to the center. This is used to define the
height of the edit tool.
Height This specifies the height of the flat tool.

Relief Edit Tools Page 291

 Use Spline If this option is checked, when you click and drag the mouse to edit the relief,
EnRoute saves the points and then uses them to define a smooth curve for the
edit. If it is unchecked then EnRoute uses the points it gets from the mouse
directly without trying to smooth them.
Build Surface If this parameter is checked, each time that you drag the tool over an area of the
relief, the surface will be affected by the specific parameters of that tool and add
to any prior movements of the mouse with that specific tool.
Fade The fade parameter reduces the radius of the tool from the set size to zero within
the stroke of the mouse movement. This allows you to blend with the existing
relief.
Shrink The shrink parameter affects the height of the tool parameters, reducing it from
the highest to the lowest within the mouse movement. This also allows the tool to
blend with the existing relief.
Apply Click Apply to accept changes that have been made with an edit tool. These edits
can be reversed outside of the edit tool by using undo.
Clear Click the clear button if you choose not to accept the changes made while using
the edit tools. If you change tools, the change is accepted for the previous tool.
You can use the Undo tool if you do not like the changes to the relief that have
been already been accepted.
Close Click close to exit the tool.

Fade and Shrink

The fade and shrink parameters are used in conjunction with the Spline parameter. Using these
parameters will help to blend into the existing relief. One thing to remember is that the larger the
radius of the tool and the higher the resolution of the relief, the longer it will take to process.
This shows the bevel tool with the Fade parameter set all the
way to the right. The mouse movement was from left to right.
The tool edited the relief from the largest to the smallest
point.

This shows the bevel tool with the Shrink parameter set all
the way to the right. The mouse movement again was left to
right. The relief does not get smaller in diameter, but the
height of the relief moves from highest point to lowest point.

Page 292 Relief Edit Tools

Build Parameter
The build parameter allows you to use your tools to “build up” a specific area of your relief. In the
examples below you can see how the relief is affected with and without the build parameter.

Top View with Build parameter checked. Perspective View with Build parameter checked.

Top view with Build parameter unchecked. Perspective view with Build parameter unchecked.

Examples using relief edit tools

This example shows the use of the Relief Editing Tools. The top image is a quick assembly of a
violin. Using the Relief Edit tools, you can add details and use the smoothing tool to blend and
soften the design.

Relief Edit Tools Page 293

This image shows small adjustments to the relief.

Page 294 Relief Edit Tools

21. 3D Toolpaths

Introduction
After creating a relief, the next step is to create the toolpaths you will use to mill the finished piece.
Although the results can be quite different, the process of creating 3D toolpaths is largely the same
as creating other types of toolpaths in EnRoute. It includes selecting the proper strategy and then
defining the tools and other parameters that will be used to create the toolpaths. The difference is
that with 3D toolpaths there are a few additional parameters that are required to define how the relief
is used to create the toolpaths.
This chapter describes how to use relief surfaces to create 3D toolpaths. It assumes the reader is
already familiar with EnRoute 2D toolpath strategies.

3D Toolpath Strategies
3D toolpaths can be created using most of the same strategies that are used for other types of
toolpaths. This includes routing offset, hatch fill, island fill, and engrave. The hatch fill and island fill
strategies will be the ones you use most commonly since they are the ones that are used to mill the
relief surfaces you create. Routing offsets are useful with reliefs to clean up tooling marks on vertical
edges in the relief, and the engraving strategy allows you to add 3D engravings on relief surfaces.

3D Toolpaths Page 295

3D Toolpath Strategy Parameter
The parameters that are required for defining 3D toolpaths are activated as part of the standard
strategies if you have one or more reliefs selected when you activate that strategy.

The first thing you notice when you activate a strategy with a relief selected is the new checkbox at
the bottom of the parameters dialog, named Apply to relief. By checking this checkbox, you have
access to four additional parameters that define how the toolpaths will be applied to the relief.

Apply to Surface
Apply to surface means that the toolpath will follow the surface of the relief and the depth of cut will
be adjusted to follow the relief. If the toolpath covers an area with no relief, the depth is defined by
the settings in the cut definition. The cut depth defines the maximum depth of the new toolpaths.

Carve into surface

Carve into surface allows the toolpath to follow the relief while using the cut depth information to
define how deep to cut into the relief. One of the common uses of this parameter would be to create
a 3D Engrave toolpath that follows the surface of the relief while creating the 3D effect into the relief
surface.
When you select this option two more check boxes appear.
Project is the most common selection; it calculates the toolpaths as if they were applied/projected
onto the relief.
Float calculates the toolpath and makes sure the tool will not remove part of the relief. This can
cause distortion of the toolpaths and should only be used in special circumstances, if it is particularly
important for the new toolpaths not to gouge into the relief.

Apply Overcut
Overcut amount (Fills Only) allows EnRoute to compensate for the characteristics of the ball end
mills used to create 3D objects. Without this parameter, the outside edges of your object would have
a scalloped effect. Overcut allows the toolpath to be created OUTSIDE the boundaries of the relief to
eliminate this problem.

 As a rule of thumb overcut should be set to a little less than ½ the tool diameter on the finish
pass.

Page 296 3D Toolpaths

Cut Definition Parameters
In the Cut Definition dialog there are a few more parameters that are new in 3D.

In the Depths section Offset from surface allows you to set how close you want the toolpaths to
follow the surface of the relief. Usually this is defined for a roughing pass to ensure that the roughing
pass does not damage the finished surface. The offset distance is determined by many factors,
including type of material, type of tool (roughing and finish), and how fast you want the roughing pass
to run.

The following shows toolpaths with a 0.20 offset.

3D Toolpaths Page 297

Step Rough
This option is available with Hatch and Island fills. It provides an optional method for creating
toolpaths to rough out the relief surface prior to creating the finish toolpaths.
The advantage of this method is that it creates 2D toolpaths at multiple pass depths that remove as
much material as possible at each pass depth. Because the toolpaths are 2D, they can typically be
defined using higher feed rates than 3D toolpaths. Also, each pass only cuts the portions of the relief
it can reach, so it is typically more efficient than using multiple passes of standard 3D fills as roughing
passes.
The possible disadvantage of this method is that steps are left for the finish pass. The height of the
steps is equal to the difference between depths of each pass of the step rough. The ball end mill that
is used for the finish pass must be capable of cutting the steps that remain after the step rough.

The first image shows toolpaths with the step rough option. The second image shows a rendered
view of these toolpaths.

Page 298 3D Toolpaths

Key 3D Toolpath Concepts
Before you start creating 3D toolpaths there are a few things to consider that mostly do not apply in
2D. You likely already understand that a three- axis router creates 3D objects with a ball end mill that
“steps over” incrementally, making numerous passes at different depths to waste the material around
the finished surface. The constraints here are the size of the tool, the amount of overlap, and how
much detail is required. The relationship is the smaller the tool, the larger the overlap, the finer the
detail, the LONGER the time to cut. EnRoute gives you the control you need to balance these
factors so that you can create a high quality finished surface in a reasonable amount of time.
In general, the depths of cut are greater across greater areas of your material. This means you need
to be careful to use the visualization tools in EnRoute to be sure your job will cut correctly. The rough
tool and the roughing strategies will go a long way toward getting the job done. The reason for
roughing is to clear material out of the way for the finish pass to run. You generally want to run the
finish cut in a single pass as this pass takes the longest time to run; also, you have a more limited
selection of tools for the finish cut. Another thing to consider is the length of the tool in relation to the
surrounding material. It is easy to get yourself in trouble trying to get a small tool into a deep area.
EnRoute gives you the tools to avoid these situations but you need to be aware that they exist.

3D Toolpaths Page 299

Overlap
When it comes time to mill out a 3D surface, the selection of the proper overlap percentage becomes
quite important. The proper percentage can vary widely depending on the size of the relief, the size
of the tool, the type of material being used, and the quality of the finished surface that is desired.
Milling a relief surface requires a ball end mill tool in order to allow you to cut smooth surfaces. The
spherical surface of the tool will create small grooves in the finished surface. The size of the grooves
will vary depending on the amount of overlap. As you increase overlap percentage the tool marks
are reduced, but the time required to mill the surface increases. The goal is to choose an overlap
value that balances cut quality with cut time.
The best way to determine proper overlap for a job is to create and cut a test relief using the same
type of material as the job. Then you can estimate the duration of the entire job, and see the surface
quality, and the amount of finish work that will be necessary to complete the job.
Typical overlap values range from 80% for larger reliefs that don‟t require a smooth finish, to 95% for
small reliefs cut from dense material that requires a very smooth finish.

Page 300 3D Toolpaths

3D Toolpath Example
The following example illustrates the process of applying 3D toolpaths using the Island Fill Strategy
and Hatch Fill Strategy.
1. Start with a plate size of 4

x 4 x 1. Draw an
oval and a star. Align the

objects to center.

2. Select the Create a Relief

icon.
3. Click the Add icon to
select that option.

4. Select the Rounded

option.

5. Select the Limit to height

Application method.

Define Height = .30

Base =0.00
Resolution = 100
6. Enter the angle parameter
as 45.00.
Click Apply.

7. This is a rendered top

view of the object.

8. Select the relief, hold the

Shift key and select the
star. Select the Add Icon.

By selecting both the relief

and the star, this tells
EnRoute to apply the star
to the relief rather than
creating a new separate
3D Toolpaths Page 301
 relief for the star.
9. Select the Beveled option.

10. Select the Limit to Height

application Method.

Define:
Height = .30
Base =0.00
11. Enter the angle parameter
as 45.00

12. The rendered view should

look similar to this.

13. Select the relief. Click

and hold the Align relief
icon. Select the Align all
reliefs to top of plate
option.
14. This will move the relief
into the plate vertically.
The front view shows the
vertical placement of the
relief in the plate.
15. You may also place the
relief precisely by pressing
F2 to activate the
Precision Input Center.

Click on the Move tab and

enter the desired X-
position of the relief.

This option works best

when the Front view is
active, because then the
button box selection
applies to the X and Z
Page 302 3D Toolpaths
 location of the relief.

16. Select Island Fill.

Add a ¼ inch ball nose
tool.

When a relief is selected,

the option Apply to relief is
activated in the
parameters section. Make
sure this is checked.
Choose Apply to surface
and Apply overcut.
Enter overcut amount of
0.08.

Usually the overcut

amount should be set at a
little less than one-half of
the diameter of the tool.
17. Click in the edit box for the
¼ inch tool to activate the
Cut Definitions dialog.

18. Enter a final depth of 0.60.

19. Enter fill overlap of 85%.

For a finished surface, the
overlap percentage will
typically vary between
80% and 95%, depending
on the material, and the
quality of the finished
surface that is required.
20. Enter number of passes
as 1. In this example we
are not defining a rough
cut tool, and the
assumption is that the ¼
inch ball end mill tool will
be capable of cutting the
full depth of the relief in
one pass.

3D Toolpaths Page 303

 21. Click Ok to return to the
Island Fill Dialog. Click
OK to calculate the tool
paths.

This is the top view of the

Island Fill tool paths.

22. This is the front view.

To cut the object from the

material, a Routing Offset
toolpath would be
defined.
23. This example shows the
same relief with Hatch Fill
toolpaths applied. The
same parameters have
been applied when
defining the toolpaths.

The preferred strategy

would be determined by
the type of material used.
The cutting time in this
instance would likely be
shorter with the Island Fill
strategy.

Page 304 3D Toolpaths

3D Toolpaths with a Step Rough
This next example demonstrates the application of toolpaths to a larger and more intricate design.
This type of relief requires a little more thought when creating toolpaths. Because it is deep, it likely
isn‟t possible to cut it out using one tool. Therefore, it is necessary to create one or two roughing
passes to remove the bulk of the waste material prior to running the finish toolpath.
The first cut we add is a rough pass. The primary purpose of this cut is to remove material efficiently.
The step rough option allows for the most efficient removal of material.
The following relief will be cut using the Island Fill strategy. The first pass utilizes the step rough
feature. This allows for most of the material to be cleared away prior to the finishing passes. The
parameters are defined as follows.

1. This is the top view of the relief that

will be toolpathed in this example.

The size of the relief is

approximately 12 x 15 x 2 inches.

2. This is the Front view of the relief in

this example.

3. A 3/8 inch end mill tool is used for

the step rough toolpaths.

3D Toolpaths Page 305

The following parameters were entered to create the Island Fill toolpaths.
4. Select the following:
Apply to Relief
Apply to Surface
Apply Overcut
Overcut amount = 0.50
5.

6. Define the Depths as:

Surface = 0.00
Final Depth = 2.0
Offset from surface = 0.20
Step Rough = checked

7. Overlap of 75%.
Corner tags = unchecked

8. Passes are defined as:

Number = 8
Maximum per Pass = 3.0
Actual per Pass = 0.25
Final Pass = unchecked
Final Pass Depth = 0.00

9. The following feed rates are

defined. This part is to be cut from
Western Red Cedar, which is a soft
wood that is prone to chipping.

Feed Rate = 220.00

Final Pass Feed = 0.00
Plunge Rate = 100.0
Dwell = 0.00
Spindle = 18000
10. Select the Climb direction.

Page 306 3D Toolpaths

 11. The toolpaths for the 3/8 inch tool
are shown here.

12. This image shows a rendered view

of the step rough toolpath using the
3/8-inch tool.

3D Toolpaths Page 307

Roughing Pass
The next step in defining the toolpaths for this relief is another roughing pass. The second cut to add
is another rough cut. The purpose here is to create a surface that is closer to the finished surface
than the step rough. One disadvantage of a step rough is that it creates a surface with ledges that
may be too tall for the finish tool we will use. A standard roughing pass will create a relatively smooth
surface.
13. Select the Island Fill Strategy and
a ¼ inch end mill tool for this cut.
14. Select the following:
Apply to Relief
Apply to Surface
Apply Overcut
Overcut amount = 0.50

15. Surface = 0.00

Final depth = 2.00
Offset from surface = .10
Step Rough = unchecked

16. Overlap = 75%

Corner tags = checked

An overlap of 75% gives a

relatively smooth surface without
requiring too much time to cut.
17. Passes,
Number = 1
Maximum per Pass = 2.1
Actual per Pass = 2.0
Final pass = unchecked
Final Pass Depth = 0.0

18. Feed Rate = 280.0

Final Pass Feed = 0.00
Plunge Rate = 100.0
Dwell = 0.00
Spindle = 18000

Page 308 3D Toolpaths

 19. Select the Climb direction.

20. In the perspective view; you can

see that we have created one
pass that follows the surface.
Notice that the toolpaths are not
directly ON the surface. This is
because we used an end mill and
the program calculates to the edge
of the tool but the toolpaths are
displayed as centerlines. Normally
the roughing pass would be set up
with an offset, which creates a
toolpath that keeps the edge of
the tool away from the relief by the
offset amount. In this example we
used an offset amount of 0.10
inch.

21. This is the front view of the

roughing pass toolpaths.

22. This is a rendered view of the step

rough pass and the roughing pass
toolpaths.

3D Toolpaths Page 309

Finish Pass
The final step in cutting this relief is to add the finish pass. For this pass a 1/8 inch ball end mill tool
has been defined. You can create one strategy that includes both the roughing and finish passes, but
you may prefer to create them separately since this can allow easier visualization and control later.

23. Select the following:

Apply to relief
Apply to surface
Apply overcut
Overcut = 0.10
24. Surface = 0.00
Final depth = 2.0
Offset from surface = 0.00
Step Rough = unchecked

Notice with the finish pass that

the offset is set to 0.00.
25. Overlap = 88%
Corner tags = unchecked

26. Passes:
Number = 1
Maximum per Pass = 2.10
Actual per Pass = 2.0
Final pass = unchecked
Final Pass Depth 0.00

27. Feed Rate = 360.00

Final Pass Feed = 0.00
Plunge Rate = 100.0
Dwell = 0.00
Spindle = 18000

28. Select the climb direction.

Page 310 3D Toolpaths

 29. This is a rendered view including
all toolpaths.

30. This is a close-up view of the 3D

toolpaths. Rotate it in perspective
and you will see the dense
pattern of your finish pass
toolpaths. The appropriate
overlap amount varies depending
on the material you are cutting,
the amount of cleanup work you
want to do, and the length of time
you have to run the job. Values
of 75% (coarse) to 95% (fine) are
typical. The higher the overlap
the more time the job will require
to run. We suggest that you
experiment by running the same
relief at different overlaps to get
a feel for the time and texture.

3D Toolpaths Page 311

Engrave Toolpaths on a Relief
This next example shows the application of 3D toolpaths applied directly to a relief.
1. In this example the plate size is 4 x 6 x
1. The object is a 4 x 6 inch rectangle.
2. Select the rectangle. Create a relief
using the following parameters:

Add to relief
Rounded relief
Normal
Resolution = 100

Angle = 50 degrees

3. The results should be similar to this

perspective view image.

4. Move the relief into the plate.

Select the relief. Click and hold the

Align relief icon. Select the Align all
reliefs to top of plate option.

5. Add a text object to the design.

Center the text object with the

relief.

Page 312 3D Toolpaths

 6. Select both the relief and the text
object.

Select the Engrave toolpath icon.

Add a Conic Tool with a Depth of .10

7. Select the following:

3D Engrave toolpath
Internal
Apply to relief
Carve into surface.
The parameter here is the choice to
carve into the surface rather than to
apply to the surface.

8. After entering the appropriate strategy

and cut parameters, click OK in the
strategy dialog to create the toolpaths.
9. Look at the job in the Perspective view
and see how the contours stay at the
top of the plate while the toolpaths
follow the underlying relief. This tool
allows us to create a 2 1/2D toolpath
along a 3D object. Remember, a key to
this technique is to select the relief as
well as the object when you first
activate the toolpath dialog.

10. This is a rendered view of the

object after the relief surface has been
toolpathed using a hatch fill and the
engrave toolpaths have been applied.

Notice how the engraved word follows

the curve of the relief.

3D Toolpaths Page 313

Routing Offset
1. Use the same relief as in
the previous example to
create a routing offset
toolpath. In this
example, you will see
that creating a routing
offset to cut out a relief
is no different than
creating any other type
of routing offset.
2. Select the relief. Select
the Routing Offset icon.

Add a ¼ inch End

Mill tool, with a depth of
1.00
3. Select the External
parameter.

4. In the cut parameters

dialog for the ¼” End Mill
tool, change the number
of passes to 3.

Click OK to get back to

the strategy dialog.

In the strategy dialog,

click OK to create the
routing offset toolpaths.
5. The perspective view is
a good way to view the
toolpaths.

Page 314 3D Toolpaths

 6. This is a rendered view
of the final object. It
includes the fill and
engrave toolpaths from
the previous example.

3D Toolpaths Page 315

Create Rendered View of Toolpaths
This tool displays a
rendered solid model
view of the results of the
toolpaths cutting the
material. It accurately
renders all of the
different tool shapes, so
you can see the results
of both 2D and 3D
toolpaths.
To simulate output of your design using a rendered view:

1. From the Output toolbar, select Create Rendered Simulation of Toolpaths.

2. In the Create Rendered Simulation dialog, use the controls provided to play the simulation.

 Hit the up and down arrow keys to speed up and slow down the simulation.
Rewind This button will rewind the simulation to the beginning.
Draw next This will advance the simulation until the next segment has
segment been output.
Pause This will start the simulation and allow it to play until the end.
Next Lift This will advance the simulation to the next tool lift.
Next Tool This will advance the simulation to the next tool change.
End This will end the simulation and close the Simulate 2D dialog.
Order This button displays a Toolpath Ordering dialog that is identical
to the one in the Output dialog.
Changes in Priority Ordering, Tool, Strategy and Sort Method
may all be accomplished directly in the 2D Simulation tool so
that the effect of any change may be viewed.

 After any ordering changes are made, be sure to click on the „Update Order‟ button so that the
changes are reflected in the output and simulation.
3. Click Done to end the simulation.

 Be sure to activate the Rendered View icon .

Page 316 3D Toolpaths

 Image with rendered view activated.

Image without rendered view activated.

3D Toolpaths Page 317

Page 318 3D Toolpaths
22.Automatic Toolpaths

Introduction
The EnRoute Wood version of EnRoute provides Automatic Toolpath (ATP) capabilities that allow
you to process parts contained in external DXF geometry files. This type of geometry is commonly
generated by design applications that serve industries such as the cabinetmaking and furniture
making industries.
EnRoute‟s Automatic Toolpath capabilities provide an efficient way to process large numbers of parts
as part of a Nested-Based Manufacturing (NBM) process.
This chapter provides a description of EnRoute‟s Automatic Toolpath capabilities, including a
description of how to set up the required configuration settings, how to set ordering and output
preferences, and then how to process files.
The following graphic shows a sheet of nested parts that have been processed using EnRoute
Wood.

Automatic Toolpaths Page 319

Design Application Support
Several design applications are supported by EnRoute Wood, and new application support is added
based on requests from users, manufacturers and customers. The following applications are
currently supported by EnRoute.
Cabinet Vision
Click n‟ Cut
Extreme
FlexiCABS
KCDw
Pattern Systems
Quisine

Editor’s Note: The graphics in this Automatic Toolpath discussion must often show a particular
design application as the active application. In the interest of simplicity, KCDw was selected as the
active application to show in most of these graphics. This is not intended to offer a specific
recommendation or to exclude any of the supported applications. References to the active
application in the text are either represented as <active application> or <KCDw> and should be
interpreted to mean that any of the design applications can be inserted into these references.

Overview of the ATP Process

When DXF files are created in the design applications supported by EnRoute, different types of
machining operations are separated onto different layers in the DXF files. The geometry on all the
layers in a file represents a single part, and all of the machining such as drilling, milling, and cutting,
that is to be performed on that part. In order to process the part, the ATP needs to be instructed
about what operations (Strategies) should be applied to each layer of geometry in each DXF file.
When EnRoute processes a part, it uses this mapping of toolpath Strategies to apply toolpaths to
each piece of geometry in the part. After all the parts have been imported and had toolpaths applied,
they are nested together onto sheets and then machining output files are created based on the
ordering and output preferences defined.
At first, this process may appear to be rather complicated, but the nice part is that after you have
defined the desired parameters for Layer/Strategy mapping, ordering and output they can be saved
in an ATP configuration file. Then when it is time to process another job the ATP file can be opened
to recall all of the desired settings. As few as three mouse clicks can be required to process a job
that may contain dozens of parts.
The following diagram shows the general flow of tasks utilized to process an Automatic Toolpath job.

Page 320 Automatic Toolpaths

 Automatic Toolpath Process

This only needs to be set

Select the Design Application one time.

Select Files to Process

These steps can all be

saved in the ATP file so
Map Layers and Strategies
they can be completed
simply by loading a saved
ATP parameter file.
Select Ordering and Nesting Params

Select Output Options

Process Files

Activating the ATP Dialog

The ATP dialog is activated by selecting the File menu and clicking on Automatic Toolpaths. It can
also be activated by clicking on the Automatic Toolpath button located in the Output toolbar.

Automatic Toolpaths Page 321

The ATP Dialog
All of the ATP functions are contained in one dialog. The tabs in the dialog represent the major steps
that were introduced in the ATP overview previously. Initially many of the parameters in the ATP
dialog are blank. When a saved ATP parameter file is loaded, this dialog is filled out based on the
parameters in the ATP file. The next several sections provide a step-by-step discussion of the
process of defining the required layer mapping and other parameters required to successfully
process parts using the ATP.
Dialog Tabs

Processing Buttons

Processing Buttons
There are seven buttons that are present all the time that the ATP dialog is active. This is because
these functions can be activated at any time. These buttons are highlighted above.
Load – This activates a load dialog for loading a saved ATP file. ATP files may be located anywhere
that is most convenient the same as standard EnRoute drawing files.
Save – This allows you to save the current parameters into an ATP file. If an ATP file has been
previously saved or loaded during this ATP session, the file will be saved without prompting you to
identify where, and by what name, to save the file. If the file has not been previously saved, you will
be prompted to name the file to save.
Save As – This is the same as the Save button, except that it always activates the save dialog to
prompt you for a name under which to save the file.
Close – This closes the current ATP session, and returns you to the EnRoute environment. If
changes have been made to current ATP parameters, you will be asked whether to save these
changes as the active ATP parameters. If you click on Yes, the current parameters will be saved in
EnRoute‟s memory so that if you get back into the ATP these parameters will be restored.

Page 322 Automatic Toolpaths

There are three Process Buttons that tell EnRoute to use the current ATP parameters to process part
information. The difference between these buttons is that they each tell EnRoute to process different
part information. Very likely you will utilize just one of these buttons for a majority of your work,
depending on how your part information is processed.
Process Active – This processes the active EnRoute drawing. This is the drawing that was active
when you started the current ATP session. For most users, this option will not be utilized very often,
but it can be convenient if you would like to quickly process some parts that you have created in
EnRoute, or imported from another application.
Process Files – This button processes a list of DXF files that you have identified in the list shown in
the „Select Files‟ tab. This option allows you to process geometry files that have been created by a
separate design application that may not be directly supported by the ATP. For example, many
users utilize AutoCAD to generate their designs, and then would like to process these designs in
EnRoute. This option makes it easy to accomplish this task.
Process <Active Design Application> - This button processes the files that have been specified for
the active design application. The button text changes depending on which design application is
active. For example, if KCDw is the active design application, the button will read „Process KCDw‟.

Selecting the Active Design Application

If you are using one of the supported design applications, this should be set first before starting the
process of defining the layer mapping and processing files. After this has been set, EnRoute will
remember this setting so it won‟t be necessary to define it again unless you change design
applications.
To set this parameter, click on the Setup tab and select the desired application from the list in the
dropdown as shown below.

Automatic Toolpaths Page 323

Note - Notice that it is possible to select No active application as an option too. If this option is
selected, then individual DXF files may be processed in pretty much the same way as if they came
from a supported design application. One key difference is that information about the size, material
and orientation of the parts won’t be available to interpret as part of the processing.

Selecting Files to Process

After the design application is specified, the next step is to select which parts are to be processed.
The output created by each of the supported design applications includes a List File that is a list of all
of the separate DXF files in a job.
For example, if you have used KCDw to design a set of kitchen cabinets and then output this
geometry to be processed in the ATP, each part is represented by a separate DXF file. The List File
for that job is a table that lists all of the DXF files in that job along with additional information such as
the size, material, quantity and rotation for each part.
EnRoute allows you to import List Files which load part information for each of the parts in the job.
The presence of each of the DXF files is automatically verified, and the information about the parts is
shown in the table.
To select a list file, first click on the Design Application tab in the ATP dialog. This tab will have the
name of the active design application (Click n‟ Cut, Quisine, etc…). Then click on the Add List File
button, which will activate an Open File dialog. This dialog will look specifically for files that match
the extension of the list file for the active application.

Select List File Tab

Page 324 Automatic Toolpaths

 List Files for the active application in
the current folder

After the List File loads, the parts are shown in the table. The dialog shows the total number of parts
to be processed. If you process a job after a List File has been imported, the parts will be created
just as they were specified. As an option, some of the parameters about the parts may be modified if
desired. It is not possible to change such things as the size of the part, but you can change the
quantity of each part, turn off the processing of selected parts, or custom rotate individual parts.
The following screen capture shows the table after it has been populated with the parts from a
selected List File. One thing to note is that the parameters included in this table will change
depending on the active design application. This is controlled by the information that is provided by
each application.

Editable columns in the

part table

It is possible to process multiple jobs simply by adding more than one list file to the list of parts. If a
list file is included in the list that shouldn‟t be, click on the Clear button to clear the parts list and then
add the appropriate parts to the list.
When ATP parameter files are saved, the part information in this tab is not saved as part of that file.
This is because this information represents project-specific information that will change with each job.

Automatic Toolpaths Page 325

Note again that the Process buttons remain visible when this tab is active. If all of the other
parameters have been specified correctly, all that is necessary now is to click on the Process
<KCDw> button to complete the job. If the ATP parameters have not been defined, the next step is
to move on to the Layer Mapping step which is described in the next section.

Selecting Files with No Active Application

In the case where there is not an active design application, part files are selected individually rather
than by using a List File. Click on the Select Files tab, and then click on Add to activate an Open
Files dialog. Find the DXF files to be processed and select them and click on the Open button and
they will be added to the parts list in the ATP.

Select Files Tab

Use these
buttons to add
and remove
DXF files to the
list.

This dialog is activated

when you click on the
Add button above.
Identify the files to add
and click on the Open
button.

Layer Mapping
This is a very important step in the process, and essentially represents the core concept in Automatic
Toolpath processing. When design application jobs are created, DXF files are utilized to pass on
geometry and other design information. Required machining operations will likely include routing
offsets, drills and fills, using a number of different tools and depths.
The geometry in the DXF files is separated onto different layers based on what type of machining will
be required. Shapes to be cut out will go on a layer, geometry for dados will go on different layers,
and drill points on different layers. This arrangement of geometry on specific layers can be
customized to match very specific manufacturing methods, but after it has been specified for a given

Page 326 Automatic Toolpaths

method it likely won‟t change.
The Layer Mapping in EnRoute‟s ATP provides a method to synchronize the toolpath creation to
match the geometry in the DXF files. As an example, if the rectangle that represents the perimeter of
a part is placed on a layer called Cutout, the ATP should be configured to look for the layer Cutout
and then to create a routing offset toolpath using the desired EnRoute Strategy. This is where that
happens.
First activate the Define Layers tab by clicking on it. The layers table will initially be blank. What is
needed is to create a list of layers that corresponds to the layers included in the DXF files of the jobs
to be processed. Then Strategies will be assigned to these layers. When the job is processed, these
Strategies will be applied to all of the geometry that resides in that layer in each of the DXF files.

Define Layers Tab

Layer Mapping
buttons

Define the Layers

The Layer Mapping buttons provide the means to create and edit the layer definitions.
Add Layer – Click this button to add a new blank layer to the list.
Remove Layer – Click this button to remove the selected layer.
Clear Layers – Click this button to remove all the layers in the list
One method of defining the layers is to add layers one at a time and then edit the Layer Name to
match a layer in the DXF files. In order to edit the layer name, just click in the row of the Layer Name
column to be edited and type. Continue to add layers and edit them until all of the desired layers
have been added.
This can be a complicated process because you may not know all the layer names that are included
in the job to be processed. One solution is to import the DXF files into EnRoute in order to find all the
layers. A better alternative is to use the „Use‟ buttons. If a List File has been specified so that a list
of parts is active, it is only necessary to click on the Use <KCDw> button to find the layers to map.
EnRoute will automatically open each of the part files and extract the layers included and then add
these layers to the layer-mapping table.
Use Active – Click this button to extract all the layers in the active EnRoute drawing.

Automatic Toolpaths Page 327

Use Files – Click this button to extract the layers in the list of individual files that have been selected
in the case where no design application is active.
Use <KCDw> - Click this button to extract the layers from the DXF files that represent the parts that
have been selected in the parts list. If no parts have been selected, then this button won‟t add any
new layers.

Click the Use

KCDw button to
bring in the layers
from the active
parts list

At this stage, the

Strategies have
not been mapped
to the layers.

Map Strategies
The next step is to select the Strategies to assign to each layer. Remember that strategy templates
are saved using the Strategy dialog in EnRoute. Strategy templates can be saved for every type of
toolpath that can be created by EnRoute. After a Strategy Template has been saved, it is then
available to the ATP to be specified in the ATP Strategy Mapping table.

Click the Save as…

button in the
Strategy dialog to
save the active
Strategy as a
template. This
saved template can
then be used by the
ATP

Page 328 Automatic Toolpaths

 Use the Strategy
template dropdown
to review the names
of the saved
strategies, and to
select a template to
activate.

In the ATP dialog, the saved Strategy templates are selected for mapping to each layer in the list.
Both a normal Strategy and a Small Part Strategy may be selected for each mapped layer. The
Small Part Strategy will be used for any parts that have a surface area that is less than a threshold
defined by the user in the EnRoute Preferences dialog.
In order to select a strategy in a layer, just click on the dropdown arrow on the right side of each
strategy cell. This will display a list of all eligible saved strategies. The type of strategy is shown in
parentheses next to each strategy name. For example, in the following screen capture, the first
strategy in the list is „Panel T0375 D075(offset-male)‟ which tells us that this is a male routing offset
strategy. In this case, the name of the strategy was used to provide some information about the tool
and depth, and its name was created to match the name of the layer it is to be assigned to. There
are many different strategy naming conventions that can be used, and each user should arrive at a
system that works best for their situation.

Both a normal Strategy and a Small Part Strategy

may be defined. The Small Part Strategy is utilized
for parts that have a surface area below a threshold
that is defined by the user. If a Small Part strategy is
not defined, then the Strategy is used for all the
parts.

Automatic Toolpaths Page 329

 Activate the Preferences dialog
by clicking Setup and
Preferences… Then click on
the Initialization tab to show
the area threshold for small
parts.

After strategies have been mapped to each of the layers, it is necessary to define several additional
parameters in order to complete the Layer Mapping task. These include Design Depth/Use Depth,
TP, NT, NS and OP. Although the representation of these parameters is a little cryptic, the settings
will likely remain the same for most of your jobs.

Additional parameters in addition to the Strategies

that must be defined for each mapped layer.

Design Depth/Use Depth – This parameter provides a way to utilize any given Strategy template for
more than one cut depth or thickness of material. „Design Depth‟ refers to the depth that the selected
Strategy was configured for.
When Strategy Templates are created, the strategy is specified with a specific depth. If a routing
offset depth is set to a depth of 0.50 inches, then this is the depth at which toolpaths will be created
when this strategy is applied. If this strategy is used to cut out material that is 0.50 inches thick, then
this works great. However, if I also want to use this same strategy to cut out material that is 0.75
inches thick, there could be a problem. The Design Depth parameter helps solve the problem. In
this case, I would set Design Depth to 0.50 inches, and click on Use Depth to put a check in the
checkbox.
When the DXF geometry is created by the design application, it is typically placed at the depth at
which it is intended to cut. Contours that are to be cut at 0.50 inches are placed 0.50 inches below
zero in the vertical (Z) axis. If Design Depth is specified, and Use Depth is checked, EnRoute uses
the vertical position of the contour to determine whether to automatically adjust the Strategy depth.

Page 330 Automatic Toolpaths

In our example, if the contour is at -0.50, then no changes are made, but if the contour is at say -
0.75, then the strategy would be modified to have a depth of 0.75. This means that the same
strategy could be assigned to layers that will import geometry at different depths.
Some good examples of this include dado layers that are intended to cut at different depths, and
cutout layers that may be used for cutting 0.25, 0.50 and 0.75 inch thick material. The advantage to
this method is that it ultimately requires fewer strategy definitions to accommodate the range of
toolpaths that may need to be created on a job.
When Strategy templates are saved, it may be a good practice to include the design depth in the
name of the strategy so that it is easy to remember this number as it is utilized in the ATP.
TP – Toolpath. This provides an option for creating toolpaths for the geometry on each layer. Most
of the time this parameter should be checked. There may be cases, however, where information on
a particular layer should not get toolpaths, but it should be included in the processed files.
NT – Nest Together. This tells the ATP that this layer should be included with the „part‟ that is
defined in the rest of the DXF file. When output from a supported design application is being
processed, this parameter should always be selected. There may be certain situations when DXF
files that were created some other way are being processed. In these cases it is possible that
several parts may be included in one file, and this is the situation that may work better using the NS
(Nest Separate) option.
NS – Nest Separate. This option tells the ATP to treat individual contours as separate parts, and to
not treat each DXF file as a complete part. See the discussion for the NT option for the situations
when this may be appropriate.
OP – Output. The layer should be included with the part in the toolpath output. This should be
checked in virtually all cases. There may be unique situations in which geometry information is
included in the part files that should not be included in the output.

Default Strategy
The Default Strategy provides an option for specifying a Strategy to be utilized in case a layer is
included in the processed parts that is not included in the layer mapping. It is not necessary to
specify the Default Strategy.

Automatic Toolpaths Page 331

Ordering and Nesting
After the layer mapping is complete, then it is necessary to specify how the toolpaths should be
ordered, and then how the parts should be nested. This part of the process is virtually the same as
the ordering and nesting that is performed within the normal EnRoute output process.
To activate this tab, click on the Ordering and Nesting tab in the ATP dialog.

Ordering Options
The ordering options are the same as within EnRoute. A detailed description of this is included in
Chapter 10. The following provides a description in the context of the ATP.

The Ordering
Options provide
the means of
specifying the order
of the toolpaths
when the output
files are created.

Priority
The Priority determines the order in which the toolpaths are ordered, using each of the five Priority
options. These items may be placed in the desired order by clicking on the item to be moved, and
then clicking and dragging on the item to move it.
When the output is created, the toolpaths are ordered working from the bottom item in the list up to
the top Priority item. For a given output file, the toolpaths are ordered five times; so, for the list in the
dialog above they would be ordered first based on the order of the Layers, and then based on the
Pass depths, then based on the sorted Objects, then based on the Strategy Order, and finally based
on the Tool Order.
The result of this process is that the toolpaths will always be ordered to match the order of the top
Priority item. They will be ordered to match the order of the second Priority item to the extent that it
is consistent with the Tool Order, and so on down the Priority list. This means that the top items
have the most impact on the order of the toolpaths.
The following simple example illustrates the concept of the Priority Ordering of toolpaths using
numbers to represent toolpaths.

Page 332 Automatic Toolpaths

 The following numbers are unordered. The numbers aren‟t repeated, and
they are either big numbers or small.

5, 8, 3, 9, 2, 7, 1, 4, 6
The numbers are first ordered based on their numeric sequence.

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Now, the numbers are ordered based on size, with the small numbers first,
providing the following final order.

3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 1, 2, 4, 8
You can see that by ordering by numeric sequence first and then size we
get a specific order to the numbers. Within each of the two size groups, the
numbers are in numeric sequence even though they are not in numeric
sequence overall.

In the second option the numbers are first ordered based on their size.

8, 2, 1, 4, 5, 3, 9, 7, 6
Now, the numbers are ordered based on numeric sequence, providing the
following final order.

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
You can see that by ordering by size first and then numeric sequence we
get an order that is quite different than in the first option even though all we
did was switch our ordering priorities.

Tool Order
The Tool Order gives the opportunity to define the order of the tools that are used in the current job.
This order is used when the toolpaths are ordered using the Tool priority. EnRoute automatically lists
the tools that are utilized in the Strategies included in both the Layer Mapping and the current parts
to be processed.
Note that EnRoute checks both the parts in the parts list as well as the Strategies in the layer
mapping for the tools. This means that if you have not yet specified any parts to process, there won’t
be any tools in this list. As soon as parts are selected to process, the required tools will show up in
the tool list.
Tools can be included or excluded from the output by checking or un-checking the Use checkbox for
each tool.

Automatic Toolpaths Page 333

Tool Order shows
the order of the
tools required by
the current Layer
Mapping and parts
list. The tools can
be moved in the list
to the desired tool
output order.

Strategy Order
The Strategy Order is similar to the Tool Order. The Strategy list is populated using the strategies
from the layer mapping, for those parts that are included in the parts list. This order is used when the
toolpaths are ordered using the Strategy priority. A strategy can be excluded from the output by un-
checking the Use checkbox for that strategy.

Strategy Order
shows the order
of the strategies
required by the
current Layer
Mapping and
Parts list. The
strategies can be
moved in the list
to the desired
output order.

Sort Method
The Sort Method defines how parts on a sheet will be sorted. This part order is used when the
toolpaths are ordered using the Object priority.

Page 334 Automatic Toolpaths

Sort Method
lets you select
how the parts
on each sheet
will be sorted.
Typically you
will use the
Shortest
method, but
you may
occasionally
prefer to sort
the parts into
Rows or
Columns.

Small Parts First – This checkbox lets you ensure that the parts will be sorted so that any parts that
are smaller in area than the Small Part threshold will be ordered before the larger parts. This option
can be particularly useful if you are using a vacuum system to hold parts down. It allows the small
parts to be cut out first, when the vacuum is most capable of holding them down.

Nesting Options
The Nesting Options provide the parameters to specify how the parts should automatically be
arranged on the sheets as they are prepared for output. The nesting process attempts to make the
most efficient use of the material, minimizing waste.
EnRoute and EnRoute Wood use a true-shape nester, which means that it considers the precise
shape of the part instead of treating the part as a rectangle in all cases. The advantage of true-
shape nesting is that it can make the best use of the material by arranging parts so that waste is
minimized.
Nesting of the parts is a key step, because the nested sheets are the basis for the output files that
are created. When the parts are processed, an EnRoute drawing is created that contains layers that
represent each of the nested sheets. Each drawing layer corresponds to an output file. In the
nested sheet drawing, the layer names correspond to the material that sheet represents.
During the nesting process, the ATP keeps parts that are to be cut from the same material together.
This means that if you have a job that includes ¾” melamine, ¼” plywood, and ½” plywood, then all
of the ¾” melamine parts will be nested together, all of the ¼” plywood parts will be nested together,
and all of the ¾” plywood parts will stay together. EnRoute uses the material names included in the
List Files to determine what material each part will be cut from.

Automatic Toolpaths Page 335

 Nesting
Options
provides the
parameters for
EnRoute‟s true-
shape nester to
arrange parts on
the sheets.

Angle Step – These are the angle increments that the nester uses for each part as it works to find
the best arrangement of the parts on the sheet. Smaller angles increase the number of options that
the nester must consider, so it increases the amount of time to nest each sheet.
When processing files in the ATP, much of the material to be cut has a wood or some other
directional surface so often times it is best to set the step angle to 180 degrees. This minimizes the
options for the nester to consider, and will help reduce processing time. Even when the material is
not grained, experience shows that setting the step angle to some value below 90 degrees most
often is not necessary in order to make the best use of the material.
Gap – This is the spacing between the individual parts. The overall size of each part includes the
size required by any external toolpaths, so it is often acceptable to set the Gap to a very small value,
or even 0.0, in order to maximize material usage.
Margin – This is the spacing from the edge of the sheet of material to the parts nearest the edge.
Again, this value may be set to a small value since the boundary of each part includes the toolpath
dimension.
Multilayer – This tells EnRoute that it can create new sheet layers in the output drawing as
necessary in order to nest all the parts. For example if there are 50 parts to be cut from ¾” melamine
and only 10 parts will fit on each sheet, EnRoute will automatically create the 5 sheet layers in the
output drawing required to nest all the parts. Consecutive sheet layers are named to show how
many sheets are required of each material.
Use Holes – This allows the nester to utilize the holes in which to nest parts on a sheet. This option
does not typically get used with the files that are most commonly processed in the ATP. The
following graphic shows the difference between nesting with and without the Use Holes option
checked.

Page 336 Automatic Toolpaths

 Use Hole is Unchecked -
The rectangles have an inner
„hole‟ that could potentially
be used for cutting parts. If
Use Holes is not checked,
then objects are not placed
in these holes.

Use Hole is Checked - In

this case you can see that
the holes are utilized for
placing objects. The result is
that it can be possible to cut
the same number of parts by
using less material.

Plate Size
This section tells the ATP what size material is going to be used for cutting the job, and where
surface is to be defined.

Plate Size tells

the ATP what
size material
will be used for
cutting the
parts, and
where the
surface will be
defined on the
machine.

Width – This is the X dimension of the material. The units of this dimension match the active units in
EnRoute.
Height – This is the Y dimension of the material.

Automatic Toolpaths Page 337

Thickness – This is the default Z dimension of the material. When output is created for the active
design application, the plate thickness is automatically adjusted as necessary to match the thickness
of the parts on each sheet. If files are being processed with no active design application, or if the
active EnRoute drawing is being processed then this thickness is used.
Surface – This is a user preference that may change depending on the machine being used, or the
type of material being cut. Typically the surface is set to the bottom of the plate because then small
variances in material thickness do not cause problems when cutting parts out.
Grain Direction – The assumption is that parts coming into the ATP are oriented based on the grain
direction in the X direction. If this parameter is set to the Y direction, then parts are automatically
rotated by 90 degrees as they are imported from the DXF files.

ATP Setup
The Setup tab contains parameters that determine what type of output files are created when a job is
processed. There are three types of output that can be generated, including (1) the machining output
files (the g-code files), (2) a printout of each nested sheet that shows what parts are included on
each sheet, and (3) label output files that allow labels to be printed for each part.

Output Options
These checkboxes allow you to choose what output you would like to generate.
Create output files – This option creates the machine files that will be sent to the router. The files
will be located in the location that is specified in the Output Settings section described below.
When a job is finished processing the ATP provides a message box that lists the output files created.

Page 338 Automatic Toolpaths

Create printout of parts – This option prints an image of each nested sheet, including a text label
that identifies each part on the sheet, as well as a title that is the name of the output file that was
created. This type of printout makes it much easier to identify individual parts so that they can be
organized as they come off the machine after they are cut.
The barcode button to the right of this checkbox allows you to specify a barcode font that will be used
to generate a barcode version of the filename of the output file. Some machine manufacturers allow
their users to locate and track output files using barcodes and this helps facilitate that option.
The following image shows an example of a printout of a job processed in the ATP

Create label output – This tells EnRoute to generate label output using the parameters defined in
the Label Settings on this dialog. Labels provide a higher level of tracking ability for the parts. This
is an option that can be added to the standard EnRoute Wood package that allows you to design and
generate individual labels for each part that you process in the ATP. Labels can form a key part of a
manufacturing process. EnRoute uses an XML format that makes it easy for design applications to
provide a wide range of information to EnRoute that can be passed along to each label. Information
about edge banding, customer, finishes, or virtually any other information can be included in labels.
Following is an example label. It was designed to include standard information about the filename,
dimensions and material. It also includes a thumbnail view of the nested sheet that shows which part
this label is for, along with an arrow that indicates the orientation of the part on the sheet.

Automatic Toolpaths Page 339

Output Settings
These two parameters tell EnRoute where the output files should be placed, and how they should be
named. The Output Path button activates a dialog for specifying the path to the output files. This
path is displayed to the right of the button.
The Output filename parameter serves as a prefix to the names of the output files. It is a way to
define filenames that are easily identifiable. Output files are automatically named using the material
name for the parts. If the Output filename parameter is set, then the material name portion of the
filename is appended after this parameter.
As an example, if the Output filename parameter was set to „Smith01‟ and the material it was to be
cut using is „3/4 Plywood‟ then the output filename would be „Smith01_3_4 Plywood.cnc‟. Notice that
the „/‟ is replaced with „_‟ since this is not a legal character in a filename. Also, the extension on the
filename would be based on the active

The Output Settings parameters allow you to specify

where output files are saved, and a prefix to the file
names.
machine.

Page 340 Automatic Toolpaths

Label Settings
If the labeling option is enabled, these parameters are used to select the size and design of the
labels to be printed. Two separate applications are used to define Label Design and Label Format
files.
Label Design – This file format uses the XML file format to specify the layout of the labels. The files
have an „lds‟ extension and are created using EnRoute‟s Label Designer™ application.
Label Format File – The label formats specify how labels are arranged on a sheet. Many standard
label formats are provided with EnRoute, and new ones are easily created using the Label Maker™
application. The „lfc‟ file format stores the label format, and is selected with this parameter.
Label Format – When the Label Format file is specified, its individual label formats may be selected
using this parameter.

Example Steps to Process Your Files

The previous sections describe each of the steps required to use EnRoute‟s Automatic Toolpath
feature to process part files. This section provides a brief step-by-step listing of how you would
typically proceed through the process. It follows the flowchart described in the ATP Overview
presented at the start of this chapter.

Processing a Job Starting from Scratch

These steps assume that you are setting up the ATP from the start, and have not yet performed any
Layer Mapping and have not set any of the other parameters in the ATP.
1. Start EnRoute
2. Define strategy templates If you are a new EnRoute user, this will likely take some trial
in EnRoute based on the and error on your part to determine the machining
machining operations and operations you will typically use.
tools you typically use.
3. Set up the EnRoute Tool EnRoute is supplied with a default tool library that you will
Library to include the tools likely modify to meet your needs.
you will use with your ATP
machining.
4. Configure the Machine This will likely include configuring your tool changer and/or
Setup parameters in drill bank to match your machine configuration.
EnRoute so that they
match your actual
machine configuration
5. Start the ATP You are now ready to set up the ATP.
6. Go to the Setup tab and
set the Active Design
Application
7. Go to the tab for the Prior to this you should have created job output from your
active application (KCDw, design application.
etc…) and select the File
List for the job you would

Automatic Toolpaths Page 341

 like to process
8. Go to the Define Layers Now we need to set the layers and strategies we will use to
tab in order to define the process the job.
Layer Mapping
9. Click on the Use KCDw This will extract all of the layer names from the DXF files in
(or other application) the active job so that you don‟t have to search them out
button in order to find yourself.
what layers are used
10. Select a Strategy for each These will be used to process the geometry on the
of the layers. corresponding layers in the parts.
11. Select a Small Part Remember that you need to define the small part threshold
Strategy for the cutout in EnRoute‟s preferences if you are going to use this.
layer(s) if that is desired.
12. Define the Design If you would like EnRoute to automatically adjust toolpath
Depth/Use Depth depths based on the geometry depth in the DXF files, define
parameter for each layer the depth that the strategy was designed for and then check
Use Depth.
13. Select TP, NT and OP for These parameters should be checked for virtually all
each layer standard applications.
14. Define a Default Strategy This probably isn‟t necessary for standard jobs, and it could
if you want one get you in trouble if a surprise layer shows up in a file.
15. Click on the Ordering and
Nesting tab
16. Set the Priority order you You likely want to have either Tool or Strategy at the top of
want to use. the Priority list.
17. Define the Tool Order EnRoute extracts the tool list based on your Layer Mapping.
Generally, move tools used for drilling and fills ahead of
tools used for routing offsets.
18. Define the Strategy Order These are the strategies that the Layer Mapping uses.
Typically you want to have the male routing offsets at the
end so that objects don‟t cut out before they have finished
the other operations.
19. Select the Sort Method Typically the Shortest option works fine.
20. Set the Plate Size What size material are you going to use? 96x48, 97x 49
etc… If you are processing output from a design application
then the thickness parameter will be adjusted automatically.
21. Set the Surface option Do you typically set the machine surface at the top or bottom
of your material?
22. Set the Grain Direction Typically leave it in the X direction.
23. Set the Nesting Options Angle Step = 180 or 90
Multilayer = checked

Page 342 Automatic Toolpaths

 Use Holes = unchecked
Gap = 0.0 or some small number
Margin = 0.0 or some small number
Position Button = Bottom, Left or Lower Left typically.
24. Click on the Setup tab
25. Set the Output Options Check the appropriate options. If this is the first time
through, you may not want to generate any output until you
have reviewed a few jobs. Because EnRoute creates an
active drawing containing all the nested sheets it is easy to
review the results of the processed job without having any
other output created. Just scroll through the layers to see
the nested sheets.
26. Set the Output Settings Tell EnRoute where to send the output.
27. Set the Label Settings If you are creating label output, choose a label design and a
label format. Remember that labeling is an optional feature.
28. SAVE THE ATP FILE Before you do any processing, click on the Save button and
save all of the setting you have defined. Then when you
need to make changes you will only have to change the
parameters that need to be modified.
29. Click on the Process The button will have the name of whichever design
<KCDw> button application you are using.

30. Click on the Close button You will be prompted to Save Changes. If you click on Yes
and review the results of then all of the parameters and the list of parts will be
the job in the active retained so that if you get back into the ATP things will be as
EnRoute Drawing. you left them.

Automatic Toolpaths Page 343

Processing a Job Using a Saved ATP File
This example assumes that you have already defined the job parameters and now need to process a
new set of part files. It illustrates that after you have been through the process of mapping the layers
and setting the other processing parameters it becomes very quick and easy to process jobs that can
contain dozens of parts.

Open the ATP

Load the List File you want to
process
Load the saved ATP file
Click on Process <KCDw>
Review the nested sheets Flip through the sheets in the EnRoute drawing to make
sure things look correct.
Send the output files to your
machine

Page 344 Automatic Toolpaths

Automatic Toolpaths Page 345
Appendix A - Keyboard Shortcuts
Copy Ctrl + C
Cut Ctrl + X
Define Layers F7
Delete Del
Exit Alt + X
Group Ctrl + G
Layers F7
Machine Setup F6
Material Library F4
Move Ctrl + M
New Ctrl + N
Open Ctrl + O
Paste Ctrl +V
Perspective F12
Precision Input Center F2
Preferences F10
Redo Shift + Ctrl + Z
Redraw Ctrl + R
Right Click Shortcut menu Right Click
Save Ctrl + S
Select All Ctrl + A
Simulate 2D F8
Tool Library F5
Undo Ctrl + Z
Ungroup Ctrl + U
View Toolpath Thickness F9
Zoom In Ctrl + I
Zoom Out Ctrl + K
Zoom Plate Ctrl + P

Index Page 347

Page 348 Index
Index
2D output simulation 283 trimming 79
3D Meshes 255 Bitmaps 279
apply meshes to relief 258 Bridges 120
create mesh with EnRoute tools 256 deleting 159
faceted 258 displaying 23
import 3D mesh objects 256 editing 157
smooth 258 inserting 158
using a mask 260 Build Parameter 293
3D Sufaces Carve into surface 296
Introduction 191 Centerline 244
3D Surfaces Toolbar 34 Chamfer Tool 241
3D toolpaths baroque carve 252
overlap 300 centerline dialog 249
3D Toolpaths 127, 191, 295, 305 chamfer centerline 248
3D toolpath example 301 chamfer example 251
3D toolpath strategies 295 chamfer parameters 244
3D toolpath strategy parameters 296 miter and centerline 244
engrave example 312 standard chamfer 241
finish pass example 310 standard dialog 243
key 3D toolpath concepts 299 wizard prompts 246
roughing pass example 308 Chamfer Toolbar 38
routing offset example 314 Changing cut type 123
step rough 298 Circles
step rough example 305 by center and point 65
Aborting a job 189 by center and radius 65
Active drivers 172 by corners 66
Align Reliefs Toolbar 38 by three points 66
Aligning Contours 106 Clean cut 132
Alignment Toolbar 36 Cleaning Up Contours 93
Aluminum 122 Climbing cuts 126
Angles for Revolution 209 Communication parameters 171
Apparent intersections 79 Configuring Machine Drivers 169
Apply to Surface 296 Construction Toolbar 33
Arc Copy 88 Containers and holes 95
Arcs Contour Editing Toolbar 33
by center, start and angle 67 Contour loop indicators 22
by center, start and end 66 Contours
by three points 67 closed 118
converting to arcs 86, 117 converting to arcs 86
copying around an arc 88 displaying 22
editing 76 editing 75
Array Copy 87 extending 77
Automatic cleanup 96 filleting 81, 82, 83
Bezier curves joining 83
converting to arcs 86, 117 merging 96
drawing 62 merging open contours 85
editing 76 selecting 95
extending 77 trimming 79
Index Page 349
Convert Curves to Arcs 86 Dimension Toolbar 39
Convert selection to arcs 86 Dimensions 72
Copying around an arc 88 angle dimension tool 73
Corner tags 137 diameter dimension tool 74
Corners leader dimension tool 74
corner tags 137 radius dimension tool 73
filleting 81, 82, 83 single dimension 73
sharp 119 Direction arrows 22
Create Rendered View 164 Direction arrows on toolpaths 23
Creating new files 51 Distort Contours 103
Cut Definitions Done queue 188
offset from surface 297 Dongle See Hardware keys
Cuts 117 Draw Lines Toolbar 41
changing cut type 123 Drill arrays
clean 123, 130 templates 142
climbing 126 Drill bank
cut parameters 122 configuring 170, 174
bridges 158 Drill circles
engraving 150 templates 141
entry/exit points 156 Drill corners
hatch fill 134 templates 146
island fill 137 Drill points
open contour offset 130 along a contour
pyramid 153 templates 145
cut templates 118, 127 drill cut parameters 146
determining cutting order 183 in centers of contours
direction 126 templates 143
dwell 125 templates 140
entry/exit parameters 126 Drill Toolbar 36
fill 130 Drill Tools 139
fine 130 Dwell 125, 171
passes 124 Edit Contours Toolbar 41
plunge rate 125 Edit Relief
rough 123 Build Parameter 293
shoulder 125 Fade 292
spindle speed 126 Parameters 291
width 124 Shrink 292
Cutting order 183 Edit Relief Toolbar 291
Deleting Editing
bridges 159 bridges 157
jobs 189 entry/exit points 155
strategies 154 insert corner tool 76
Deleting Contours 96 linearize curve selection 76
Depth of cut 119, 123, 128, 132 smooth approximation tool 77
Depth of toolpaths 23 Editing points 75
Designs converting contours to arcs 86
closing 54 Ellipses
creating 51 by center, height and width 68
drawing 59 by corners 67
exporting 54 Engrave Toolpath 149
opening 53 Engraving
saving 53 3D toolpaths 127
Page 350 Index
 cut parameters 150 hatch angle 134
Entry/exit parameters 126 hatch vs. Island fill 135
Entry/Exit Points 155 overlap 134
editing 155 template 134
editing cut parameters 156 Hatch Fill Toolpaths 130
Entry/exit positions Height Control Curve 218
displaying 23 Help 19
Exiting the software 26 Hexagons See polygons
Explode Selected Contours 86 Hold jobs 188
Exporting a design 54 Holes 95
Extend/Trim Toolbar 41 Influence Line 218
Extending contours 77 Inlay 120, 136
precise length 78 inlay gap 120
to boundaries 78 Installation 4
Extrude 224 hardware key 4
extrude dialog 225 Island fill
extrude example 229 corner tags 137
mesh parameters 228 hatch vs. island fill 135
profile placement 227 inlay 136
rotation parameter 227 optimization 136
scale and roatation 226 template 137
Extrusions Toolbar 37 Island Fill Toolpaths 135
Faceted 258 Jobs
Fade 292 aborting 189
Feed rates 171 deleting 189
File Toolbar 27 Done queue 188
Files held 188
creating 51 Joining contours 83
exporting 54 Keyboard shortcuts 347
Fill cut 130 Layers 16
Fill Toolbar 41 changing a contours layer 18
Fillet Libraries Toolbar 29
multiple fillet 83 License agreement 1
single fillet 82 Lines
Filleting contours 81, 82, 83 drawing 59
Fine Cut 130 editing 75
Flyout Menus 8 extending 77
Fractions, converting 119 trimming 79
Generating Output 182 Machine drivers
Grouping Contours 97 active drivers 172
Groups selecting 183
nesting 113 Mask 281
ungrouping 97 Measure 56
Guidelines 12 Merge 85
creating 12, 13 merge contours 96
deleting 13 merge selection 85
hiding 14 merge tolerance 85
locking 14 merging open contours 85
moving 13 Mesh
rotating 14 create surface 212
Hatch angle 134 extrude mesh example 231
Hatch fill spin example 221
Index Page 351
 sweep two rails mesh example 239 editing 154
Mirroring a Contour 104 plan templates 118
Interactively 104 templates 155
mirror horizontal 105 plate
mirror vertical 105 automatic fit 52
Miter 244 Plate 51
Modify Relief Toolbar 39 displaying 22
Move Objects 98 Plunge 171
boundary move 100 Plunge rate 125
move absolute 98 Points
move relative 99 editing 75
Moving Polyarc 59
bridges 158 Polygons
Multicopy drawing 68
arc copy 88 Precision Input Center 10
array copy 87 Preferences 19
copy around an arc 88 dimensions tab 24
path copy 90 display tab 21
Multiple Fillet 83 general tab 19
Nest Toolbar 40 grid tab 22
Nesting Contours 111 initialization tab 21
dynamic nest tool 113 ordering tab 25
multiple nest tool 114 relief tab 23
nest objects tool 111 start points 24
New files 51 unit tab 21
Nose cone optimization 136 view setup 15
Object Edit Toolbar 31 view setup tab 22
Octagons See polygons Primitives 256
Offset Contours 84 Priority 184
partial offset 84 Pyramid strategy
Offset Toolbar 42 cut parameters 153
Open contour offset templates 152
no 3D toolpaths 130 Pyramid Toolpaths 151
relief 129 Quitting 26
Open Contour Offset Toolpaths 128 Radiused corners 81, 82, 83
Opening a file 53 Recommended System Requirements 3
Ordering options 183 Rectangles
Ordering toolpaths 162, 163, 165, 316 drawing by corners 64
Other Command Icons 44 drawing by dimensions 64
Output Redo 16
2D simulation 283 Redraw 15
output parameters 186 Relief 129
to a file 187 angles for revolution 209
to a machine 187 application method 196
Output control center 187 add 196
Output Toolbar 30 merge highest 197
Overcut 296 merge lowest 198
Overlap 134, 300 replace 198
Passes 124 subtract 197
Path Copy 90 apply bitmap example 279
Pentagons See polygons chamfer tool 241
Plan 117 clearing reliefs 264
Page 352 Index
 create 193 Scale and Rotation 226
delete relief objects 264 Scale Toolbar 40
extrude tool 224 Scaling Contours 102
fit relief to plate 267 Scaling Reliefs 266
inverting 268 Screen refresh 15
mesh paramters 210 Scroll bars 10
mirror 268 Setting the Toolpath Order 181
modifying and combining 263 Settings Toolbar 29
moving reliefs 264 Shortcut menu 22
options 194 Shoulder 125
constant Height 195 Shrink 292
limit to height 196 Simulate 2D 283
normal 194 Simulating Output 161
scale to height 195 Single Fillet 82
relief dialog example 202 Slot cuts
relief parameters 199 templates 149
angle 201 Slot Toolpaths 148
base 200 Smooth 258
height 199 Snap 11
resolution 199 snap to center of arc 11
revolutions 207 snap to endpoint 11
revolve example 211 snap to grid 11
rotating 265 snap to guideline 11
scaling 265 snap to intersection 11
shape snap to midpoint 11
beveled 194 snap to nearby contour 11
flat 194 snap to perpendicular point 11
round 193 snap to tangent point 12
smoothing reliefs 267 Snaps Toolbar 35
spin tool 213 Snapshot 56
sweep two rails 233 Sort method 186
vertical positioning of reliefs 265 Spin 213
wizard prompts 210 height control curve 218
Relief Edit Tools 291 influence line 218
Relief Toolbar 40 mesh surface example 221
Reliefs spin angles 215
using bitmaps 279 spin dialog 214
Rendered View of Toolpaths 316 spin example 220
Return height 152 width control curve 219
Reverse open Contours 86 wizard prompts 217
Revolve 207 Spindle speed 126, 170
revolve dialog 208 Spiral Fill Toolpaths 138
revolve example 211 Stacks 216
revolve tool 207 Stars See polygons
wizard prompts 210 Start points
Right-click menu 22 displaying 23
Rotating Contours 101 Status Line 9
Routing offset Step Rough 298
templates 122 Strategies
Routing Offset Toolbar 36 adding 154
Routing Offset Toolpaths 118 editing 154
Rulers 9 removing 154
Index Page 353
 strategy templates 118, 130 Toolpaths 117
Strategy 117 cuts 117
Strategy order 186 direction arrows 23
Support Services 5 displaying 23
Sweep Two Rails 233 editing groups 154
sweep two rails dialog 234 final depth 23
sweep two rails example 237 group plan 117
Templates 53 ordering 162, 163, 165, 316
cut templates 118, 127 plan 117
drill array templates 142 editing 154
drill circle templates 141 toolpath groups 117
drill corner templates 146 toolpath strategy 117
drill point templates 140 toolpath width 23
drill points along a contour 145 Toolpaths Toolbar 32
drill points in centers of contours templates 143 Triangles See polygons
island fill template 137 Trimming contours 79
open contour offset templates 130 Precise Length 80
plan templates 118, 155 to boundaries 80
plate templates 53 Undo 16
pyramid templates 152 Units 9, 171
routing offset templates 122 USB
slot cut templates 149 hardware keys 4
strategy templates 118 Using a Mask 260
Text 69 Vectorize Bitmap 92
convert text objects to curves 72 views 321
editing existing text object tool 71 Views 8
editing text objects 70 Weld Toolbar 37
Text Toolbar 42 Welding contours
Texture Tool cut by line 110
parameter dialog 288 welding options 107
Texture Tools 285 Welding Contours
texture dialog 286 jigsaw weld 109
Textures Toolbar 42 Width Control Curve 219
Tool changer Width of cuts 124
configuring 170, 173 Width of toolpaths 23
Tool library 176 workflow 319
custom tool library 178 Workflow 7
Tool order 185 Zoom commands 14
Toolbars 8 Zoom Toolbar 28
Toolpath order 186

Page 354 Index